Documentos de Académico
Documentos de Profesional
Documentos de Cultura
Pro
V8i (SELECTseries 4)
Copyright Information
Trademark Notice
Bentley, the "B" Bentley logo, STAAD.Pro are registered or nonregistered trademarks of Bentley
Sytems, Incorporated or Bentley Software, Inc. All other marks are the property of their
respective owners.
Copyright Notice
2013, Bentley Systems, Incorporated. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may only be used pursuant to
applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of
Bentley Systems, Incorporated and/or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade
secret law and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.
Acknowledgments
Windows, Vista, SQL Server, MSDE, .NET, DirectX are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Acrobat logo are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
Table of Contents
About STAAD.Pro
Examples Manual
Graphical Environment
Batch Design
Design Modes
11
19
49
51
67
93
97
2E. British Codes - Design per British Cold Formed Steel Code
101
119
121
129
3C. Canadian Codes - Design Per Canadian Cold Formed Steel Code S136-94
165
173
191
193
201
205
207
211
213
219
235
281
356
376
378
382
386
388
394
404
406
414
424
426
448
472
490
11E. Indian Codes - Design per Indian Cold Formed Steel Code
512
520
iv STAAD.Pro
199
548
550
558
572
590
592
604
614
616
670
692
696
698
15B. Russian Codes - Steel Design Per SNiP 2.23-81* (Edition 1999)
726
744
746
752
754
17B. South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard SAB0162-1:1993
760
782
784
786
790
792
796
802
814
21A. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE 10-97
816
21B. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE Manuals and
Reports
822
828
844
846
862
884
896
904
908
918
922
vi STAAD.Pro
936
This documentation has been prepared to provide information pertaining to the various
international codes supported by STAAD. These codes are provided as additional codes by
Bentley Sytems, Incorporated. In other words, they do not come with the standard license
package. Hence, information on only some of the codes presented in this document may be
actually pertinent to the license package available to you.
This document is to be used in conjunction with the STAAD Technical Reference Manual and
the STAAD Application Examples Manual. Effort has been made to provide some basic
information about the analysis considerations and the logic used in the design approach. A
brief outline of the factors affecting the design along with references to the corresponding
clauses in the codes is also provided. Examples are provided at the appropriate places to
facilitate ease of understanding of the usage of the commands and design parameters. You are
urged to refer to the Examples Manual for solved problems that use the commands and
features of STAAD. Since the STAAD output contains references to the clauses in the code that
govern the design, we recommend that you consult the documentation of the code of that
country for additional details on the design criteria.
About STAAD.Pro
About STAAD.Pro
STAAD.Pro is a general purpose structural analysis and design program with applications
primarily in the building industry - commercial buildings, bridges and highway structures,
industrial structures, chemical plant structures, dams, retaining walls, turbine foundations,
culverts and other embedded structures, etc. The program hence consists of the following
facilities to enable this task.
1. Graphical model generation utilities as well as text editor based commands for
creating the mathematical model. Beam and column members are represented using
lines. Walls, slabs and panel type entities are represented using triangular and
quadrilateral finite elements. Solid blocks are represented using brick elements. These
utilities allow the user to create the geometry, assign properties, orient cross sections as
desired, assign materials like steel, concrete, timber, aluminum, specify supports, apply
loads explicitly as well as have the program generate loads, design parameters etc.
2. Analysis engines for performing linear elastic and pdelta analysis, finite element
analysis, frequency extraction, and dynamic response (spectrum, time history, steady
state, etc.).
3. Design engines for code checking and optimization of steel, aluminum and timber
members. Reinforcement calculations for concrete beams, columns, slabs and shear
walls. Design of shear and moment connections for steel members.
4. Result viewing, result verification and report generation tools for examining
displacement diagrams, bending moment and shear force diagrams, beam, plate and
solid stress contours, etc.
5. Peripheral tools for activities like import and export of data from and to other widely
accepted formats, links with other popular softwares for niche areas like reinforced and
prestressed concrete slab design, footing design, steel connection design, etc.
6. A library of exposed functions called OpenSTAAD which allows users to access
2 STAAD.Pro
About STAAD.Pro
STAAD.Pros internal functions and routines as well as its graphical commands to tap
into STAADs database and link input and output data to third-party software written
using languages like C, C++, VB, VBA, FORTRAN, Java, Delphi, etc. Thus, OpenSTAAD
allows users to link in-house or third-party applications with STAAD.Pro.
Examples Manual
This book offers examples of various problems that can be solved using the STAAD engine.
The examples represent various structural analyses and design problems commonly
encountered by structural engineers.
Graphical Environment
This document contains a detailed description of the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of
STAAD.Pro. The topics covered include model generation, structural analysis and design,
result verification, and report generation.
4 STAAD.Pro
Batch Design
Using this method, code checks and/or member selection is performed directly by the
analysis and design engine when an analysis is performed.
The contents of this manual, along with those in the Technical Reference manual, are all
used for batch design.
Design Modes
Code checks and member selection is performed in a post-processing module for either Steel
Design or Concrete Design. These modes are available in the Graphical User Interface.
Refer to the Steel Design mode and Concrete Design mode help sections for additional
information.
Table 14.1-Available steel design codes
in the Steel Design mode
Country/Region
6 STAAD.Pro
Code
Egypt
205 2001
Europe
EC3 DD
Great Britain
BS5950 2000
India
IS800
United States
AISCASD
Note: Design per the Chinese steel code GB50017-2003 must be performed per the
localized STAADSSDD interface. Please download and install this application from
Bentley SELECT.
Table 14.2-Available design codes in
the Concrete Design codes
Country/
Region
Code
Australia
AS 3600
China
GB50010
Egypt
ECCS 203
Eurocode 2 - 1991
Europe
Eurocode 2 - 2004
France
BAEL
Germany
DIN 1045-1
Great Britain
BS 8110
India
IS456
Japan
AIJ
Norway
NS3473
Russia
SP52-101-03
Singapore
CP65
Spain
EHE
Turkey
TS 500
ACI 318-99
United States
ACI 318-05 /
318M-05
8 STAAD.Pro
Section 1
Australian Codes
10 STAAD.Pro
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250mm
width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be
assumed to be circular with 350 mm diameter. It is absolutely imperative that the user not
provide the cross section area (AX) as an input.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Default Value
Description
Must be specified as
AUSTRALIAN to invokes
design per AS 3600 - 2001.
Design Code to follow.
See section 5.52.2 of the
Technical Reference
Manual.
CLEAR
DEPTH
FMC
25 mm
40 mm
YD
40 N/mm 2
FYMAIN
450 N/mm 2
12 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name
FYSEC
Default Value
Description
450 N/mm 2
MAXMAIN
60 mm
Maximum main
reinforcement bar size.
MINMAIN
10 mm
Minimum main
reinforcement bar size.
MAXSEC
12 mm
Maximum secondary
reinforcement bar size.
MINSEC
8 mm
Minimum secondary
reinforcement bar size.
RATIO
4.0
Maximum percentage of
longitudinal
reinforcement in columns.
REINF
0.0
Parameter Name
TRACK
Default Value
0.0
Description
For beam design:
0.0 = output consists
of reinforcement
details at the member
start, middle, and end
1.0 = critical moments
are printed in addition
to TRACK 0.0 output
2.0 = required steel for
intermediate sections
defined by NSECTION
are printedin addition
to TRACK 0.0 output
For column design:
0.0 = reinforcement
details are printed
WIDTH
ZD
14 STAAD.Pro
cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact that load combinations are just
algebraic combinations of forces and moments, whereas a primary load case is revised during
the P-delta analysis based on the deflections. Also, note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5
for dead load etc.) should be provided by the user. STAAD does not factor the loads
automatically.
16 STAAD.Pro
18 STAAD.Pro
1B.1 General
The design philosophy embodied in this specification is based on the concept of limit state
design. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at
which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are
recognized - ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state
design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and
resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under
various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are
acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without
exceeding the limit states of strength, stability, and serviceability. Accordingly, the most
economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as augmented by the
designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other such
parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks whether code requirements for
each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria.
The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation of AS 4100.
A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying concepts and
assumptions is available in the specification document.
Note: Local member deflections parallel to the local member y-axis can be checked against
a user-defined maximum span / deflection ratio. This can be performed using the
DFF, DJ1, and DJ2 design parameters, however this is only available for MEMBER
Design. Details are provided in the sections that follow.
Code
Reference
Stability
AS 4100 3.3
Serviceability
AS 4100 3.5
Brittle Fracture
AS 4100 3.7
Fire
AS4100 3.9
Other Design
Requirements
AS 4100 3.11
Note: NSC and NSF design parameters are used to manually specify a reduction in net
section area for compression or tension capacity calculations. These can be used to
account for bolt hole area reductions. Further details are provided in the sections
that follow.
20 STAAD.Pro
Note: Plastic analysis and design in accordance with AS 4100 section 4.5 is not
implemented in STAAD.Pro.
Hint: In order to correctly capture second-order effects for combination load cases
using a PDelta Analysis, the Repeat Load feature must be used. Second-order
effects will not be correctly evaluated if the Load Combination feature is
used. Load Combinations are combinations of results where Repeat Loads
instruct the program to perform the analysis on the combined load actions.
Refer to Section 5.32.11 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional
details on using Repeat Loads.
Description
WB, WC
UB, UC
T-SECTION
BT, CT
CHANNEL
PFC
ANGLE
EA, UA
TUBE
SHS, RHS
PIPE
CHS
Note: STAAD.Pro will not design the following section types to AS 4100: Double Profiles
(D), Composite Sections (C), Top Cover Plates (TC), Bottom Cover Plates (BC), and
Top & Bottom Cover Plates (TB), Double Channels (D, BA, & FR) and Double
Angles (LD & SD). Refer to Section Profile Tables in the Graphical Environment for
these options.
Hint: When adding and assigning sections using the built-in steel section library
through the Graphical Environment, STAAD.Pros default tables are American. To
change the default tables to Australian, select File > Configuration from the
STAAD.Pro Start page (no input file open). Set the Default Profile Table to
Australian on the Configure Program dialog Section Profile Table.
22 STAAD.Pro
1B.4.1 UB Shapes
These shapes are designated in the following way.
20 TO 30 TA ST UB150X14.0
36 TO 46 TA ST UB180X16.1
1B.4.2 UC Shapes
The designation for the UC shapes is similar to that for the UB shapes.
25 TO 35 TA ST UC100X14.8
23 56 TA ST UC310X96.8
In the above set of commands, member 11 is a back-to-back double channel PFC230 with no
spacing in between. Member 17 is a double channel PFC300 with a spacing of 0.5 length units
between the channels.
1B.4.7 Angles
Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is
specified as follows:
16 20 TA ST A30X30X6
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 30 mm and a leg thickness of 6 mm.
This specification may be used when the local Z axis corresponds to the z-z axis specified in
Chapter 2. If the local Y axis corresponds to the z-z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse angle)
may be used.
17 21 TA RA A150X150X16
Note: Single angles must be specified with an RA (Single Angle w/Reverse Y-Z Axis) in
order to be designed to AS 4100. This is to ensure that the major and minor
principal axes align with the local member z and y axes respectively, similar to
other section profiles.
In the second method, tubes are specified by their dimensions. For example,
24 STAAD.Pro
is a tube that has a height of 8 length units, width of 6 length units, and a wall thickness of
0.5 length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed for TUBE
sections specified in this latter manner.
In the second method, pipe sections may be provided by specifying the word PIPE followed by
the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 25 length units and inside diameter of 20 length
units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed on pipes specified in this
latter manner.
* REVERSE ANGLES
6 TA RA A150X150X16
* DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK TO BACK
7 TA SD A65X50X5 SP 0.6
* DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK TO BACK
8 TA LD A100X75X10 SP 0.75
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE HOLLOW SECTIONS)
9 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
* PIPES (CIRCULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS)
10 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
PRINT MEMB PROP
FINISH
change the steel material through the input file or GUI for each file created
26 STAAD.Pro
The nominal section capacity refers to the capacity of a cross-section to resists applied loads,
and accounts for cross-section yielding and local buckling effects. The nominal member
capacity on the other hand refers to the capacity of a member to resist applied loads, and
includes checks for global member buckling effects including Euler buckling, lateral-torsional
buckling, etc.
on effective plate widths per Cl.6.2.4, and the f yield stress is based on the minimum plate
y
yield stress.
Nominal member capacity, Nc, is a function of nominal section capacity and member
slenderness reduction factor (Cl.6.3.3). This value is calculated about both principal x and y
axes. Here, you are required to supply the value of b (Cl.6.3.3) through the ALBparameter
(see Table 1B.1). The effective length for the calculation of compressive strength may be
provided through the use of the parameters KY, KZ, LY, and LZ (see Table 1B.1).
1B.7.3 Bending
Bending capacities are calculated to AS 4100 Section 5. The allowable bending moment of
members is determined as the lesser of nominal section capacity and nominal member
capacity (ref. Cl.5.1).
The nominal section moment capacity, M , is calculated about both principal x and y axes
s
and is the capacity to resist cross-section yielding or local buckling and is expressed as the
product of the yield stress of the material and the effective section modulus (ref. Cl.5.2). The
effective section modulus is a function of section type (i.e., compact, noncompact, or
slender) and minimum plate yield stress f . The nominal member capacity depends on overall
y
flexural-torsional buckling of the member (ref.Cl.5.3).
Note: For sections where the web and flange yield stresses (fy,web and fy.flange respectively)
are different, the lower of the two yield stresses is applied to both the web and
flange to determine the slenderness of these elements.
Member moment capacity, Mb , is calculated about the principal x axis only (ref. Cl.5.6).
Critical flange effective cross-section restraints and corresponding design segment and subsegments are used as the basis for calculating capacities.
Note: This check is only carried out where Vv section web shear capacities are
calculated. Refer Table 1B.6-1 for details.
The member strength for sections subjected to axial compression and uniaxial or biaxial
bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. Here, the adequacy of a
member is also examined against both section (ref. Cl.8.3.4) and member capacity
(ref.Cl.8.4.5). These account for both in-plane and out-of-plane failures. If the summation of
the left hand side of the equations, addressed by the above clauses, exceeds 1.0 or the
allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 1B.1), the member is
considered to have FAILed under the loading condition.
28 STAAD.Pro
1B.7.5 Shear
Section web shear capacity, Vv , is calculated per Cl.5.11, including both shear yield and shear
buckling capacities. Once the capacity is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the
cross section to the shear capacity of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both
local Y & Z-axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see
Table 1B.1), the section is considered to have failed under shear.
Table 1B.6-1 below highlights which shear capacities are calculated for different profile types.
Table 1B.3-Section Type Shear Checks
General Profile Type
I-SECTION
(i.e., parallel to minor
principal y-axis)
Australian
Section
WB, WC,
UB, UC
Shear Checks
T-SECTION
BT, CT
CHANNEL
PFC
ANGLE
EA, UA
No checks performed
TUBE
SHS, RHS
PIPE
CHS
Note: Only unstiffened web capacities are calculated. Stiffened webs are not considered.
Bearing capacities are not considered.
1B.7.6 Torsion
STAAD.Pro does not design sections or members for torsion for AS4100.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 1B.4-Australian Steel Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default Value
Design
Scope
Description
Must be specified as
AUSTRALIAN to invoke
design per AS 4100 1998.
Design Code to
follow. See section
5.48.1 of the Technical
Reference Manual.
ALB
0.0
Member section
constant (refer cl.
6.3.3)
If ALB is 0.0, it is
automatically
calculated based on
TABLE 6.3.3(1), 6.3.3
(2); otherwise the
input value is used.
ALM
0.0
Moment
modification factor
(refer cl. 5.6.1.1)
If ALM is 0.0, it is
automatically
calculated based
cl.5.6.1.1; otherwise
the input value is
used.
30 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
BEAM
Default Value
Design
Scope
0.0
Description
DFF
Analytical
members
only
Deflection Length/
Maximum Allowable
local deflection.
DJ1
DJ2
DMAX
45.0 [in.]
Maximum allowable
depth (Applicable for
member selection)
DMIN
0.0 [in.]
Minimum required
depth (Applicable for
member selection)
FU
500.0 [MPa]
Ultimate strength of
steel.
FYLD
250.0 [MPa]
Yield strength of
steel.
IST
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Design
Scope
Description
KT
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LHT
Physical
members
only
32 STAAD.Pro
LY
Member Length
LZ
Member Length
Parameter
Name
MAIN
Default Value
Design
Scope
0.0
Description
NSC
1.0
NSF
PBRACE
1.0
None
PHI
0.9
Capacity reduction
factor
RATIO
1.0
Permissible ratio of
actual load effect to
the design strength.
SGR
0.0 = normal
grade
1.0 = high
strength grade
steel
SKL
1.0
SKR
1.0
A lateral rotation
restraint factor given
in Table 5.6.3(3)
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Design
Scope
Description
SKT
1.0
A twist restraint
factor given in Table
5.6.3(1)
TRACK
0.0
Output detail
0.0 = report only
minimum design
results
1.0 = report design
strengths in
addition to TRACK
0.0 output
2.0 = provide full
details of design
UNB
Member Length
Unsupported length
in bending
compression of the
bottom flange for
calculating moment
resistance.
UNT
Member Length
Unsupported length
in bending
compression of the
top flange for
calculating moment
resistance.
1B.8.1 Notes
a. DFF, DJ1, and DJ2 Deflection calculations
Compute Delta = SQRT((DX2 - DX1)2 + (DY2 - DY1)2 + (DZ2 - DZ1)2)
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 & DJ2 or, between start node and end node,
as the case may be.
34 STAAD.Pro
four joints and three members. The Deflection Length for all three members
will be equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1
and DJ2 should be used to model this situation. Thus, for all three members
here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2 should be 4.
b. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member
length and local deflections will be measured from original member line.
c. It is important to note that unless a DFF value is specified, STAAD will not
perform a deflection check. This is in accordance with the fact that there is no
default value for DFF.
b. LHT Parameter
If the shear force is constant within the segment, longitudinal position of the load is
assumed to be at the segment end.
If there is any variation of the shear force and the load is acting downward determined
from shear force variation and load height parameter indicates the load is acting on top
flange (flange at the positive local y axis) and restraints at the end of the segment is not
FU (FRU) or PU (PRU) Kl is assumed to be 1.4.
If there is any variation of the shear force and the load is acting upward determined
from shear force variation and load height parameter indicates the load is acting on top
flange (flange at the positive local y axis) and restraints at the end of the segment is not
FU (FRU) or PU (PRU) Kl is assumed to be 1.0 as the load acting at the top flange is
contributing to stabilize against local torsional buckling.
c. SGR Parameter
AS 4100 defines the values of steel grades that are used as either normal steel or high
grade steel. The following table explains the material values used when either option is
specified for a particular shape:
SGR Value
Steel
Grade
Used
300
400
0 (Normal)
300
1 (High)
350
0 (Normal)
250
1 (High)
350
Note: If a value for theFYLDparameter has been specified, then that value will be
used. Otherwise, the SGR value will be used to determine the yeild strength
and tensile strength values for the steel. based on maximum thickness of
the individual elements of the section. Only for shear capacity calculation
web thickness is used. Similarly, Tensile Strength is determined either from
FU parameter or from SGR parameter.
Warning: A check is introduced to see if yield stress is more than 450 MPa or not.
If it is, a warning is issued and the yield stress is set to 450 MPa.
The following example uses the Member design facility in STAAD.Pro. However, it is strongly
recommended to use the Physical member design capabilities for AS4100:
PARAMETER 1
CODE AUSTRALIAN
ALB 0.0 MEMBER ALL
ALM 1.13 MEMBER ALL
BEAM 1.0 MEMBER ALL
DFF 250.0 MEMBER ALL
DMAX 0.4 MEMBER ALL
DMIN 0.25 MEMBER ALL
FU 400.0 MEMBER ALL
FYLD 310.0 MEMBER ALL
IST 2.0 MEMBER ALL
KT 0.85 MEMBER ALL
36 STAAD.Pro
Hint: The member selection facility can be used to instruct the program to select a
different section if the specified section is found to be inadequate.
Code checking for an analytical member is done using forces and moments at every twelfth
point along the beam. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In
addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from the start joint)
and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed. The extent of detail of
the output can be controlled by using the TRACK parameter.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Example of commands for code checking:
UNIT NEWTON METER
PARAMETER
CODE AUSTRALIAN
FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 3 4
Note: When checking combined actions for the section capacities, the design actions at
the section station are used. However when checking combined actions for the
member capacities, the maximum forces from anywhere along the segment / subsegment being considered are used. This is as stipulated in AS 4100 8.2.
The output reports whether the member has PASSed or FAILed the design checks, as well as
the critical condition, critical load case, magnitudes of design actions for the most critical
cross-section location (distance from the start joint), and complete calculations for design.
The TRACK design parameter can be used to control the level of detail provided in the
output. Color-coded results can also be viewed in the GUIs Post Processing Beam |Unity
Check page.
In some cases some of the output will report N/A values. This occurs where a calculation
does not apply to a member. For example if a member never goes into tension then no values
can be reported in the tension capacity output sections.
Note: As per AS 4100 1.4, the TRACK 2.0 detailed level of output for PMEMBER Design
uses x and y subscripts to refer to major and minor principal axes respectively.
These differ to STAAD.Pro local member axes, where z and y refer to major and
minor principal axes.
38 STAAD.Pro
Hint: A Fixed Group command is also available, and can be used to force all members
within a user-defined group to take the same section size based on the most critical
governing design criteria for all members within that group. This is particularly
useful when you want to use the Member Selection feature, but want a group of
elements to have the same size. Refer to Section 5.49 of the Technical Reference
Manual for information on using this feature.
Note: Member Selection will change member sizes, and hence will change the structures
stiffness matrix. In order to correctly account for this, a subsequent analysis and
Code Check should be performed to ensure that the final structure is acceptable.
This may need to be carried out over several iterations.
Example of commands for member selection:
UNIT NEWTON METER
PARAMETER
FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
SELECT MEMB 3 4
Note: This feature requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) build 2007.07 or higher.
Traditionally STAAD.Pro performed code checks based on single analytical members (i.e.,
single members between two nodes). This implementation remains in place as shown in the
example in Section 1B.8. Physical Member (PMEMBER) Design on the other hand allows you to
group single or multiple analytical members into a single physical design member for the
purposes of design to AS 4100.
PMEMBER Design also has additional features, including:
l
automated tensile stress (f ) and yield stress (f ) values based on plate thicknesses;
Thus, it is strongly recommended that PMEMBER Design be used, even for the design of
single analytical members.
STAAD.Pro Editor - Directly specify physical members in the input file. Refer to
Section 5.16.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.
Graphical Environment - Using the tools in the Steel Design toolbar, members can be
manually or automatically formed. Refer to Section 1.4 of the Graphical Environment
manual for additional information.
Note: When creating PMEMBERs for AS 4100, this must be performed in STAAD.Pros
Modeling mode. Do not use the Steel Design mode.
40 STAAD.Pro
to see if they are effective (i.e., if they are placed on the critical flange as per AS 4100 5.5).
Restraints not applied to the critical flange are ineffective and hence are completely ignored.
Refer to Section 1B.7 for further information on how user-defined restraints are applied using
the PBRACE design parameter, including available restraint types, and restraint layout rules.
Note: Segment and sub-segment layouts for PMEMBERs may change for different load
cases considered for design. Some restraints may be effective for one particular load
case as they are found to apply to the critical flange, however for another load case
may be found not to act on the critical flange, and found to be ineffective. In other
words the critical flange can change for each load case considered.
Typically the critical flange will be the compression flange, except for segments with a U
restraint at one end, in which case it will be the tension flange (as is the case for a cantilever).
The PMEMBER Design uses the following routine to determine effective cross-section
restraints for each load case considered:
i. first all user-defined restraints are checked to see if they are applied to the compression
flange, with those that arent ignored;
ii. next a check is made to see if a U type restraint is found at either end of the
PMEMBER. If this is the case then any adjacent L restraints up to the next F, FR,
P or PR restraint are also ignored, regardless of whether they are placed on the
critical or non-critical flange. Refer AS 4100 5.4.2.4.
The compression flange in step 1 of the routine above is calculated based on the bending
moments at the locations of the restraints being considered. If the bending moment is zero at
the same location as a restraint then the following method is used to determine which flange
is critical at the zero moment location:
a. If the zero moment is at the end of the PMEMBER, then the compression flange is
based on the bending moment at a small increment from then end;
b. If the zero moment is along the PMEMBER and is a peak value, then the compression
flange is based on the bending moment at a small increment from that location;
c. If neither 1 or 2 above is valid, then the stiffer of the restraints at that location is taken.
The stiffness of different restraint types from the most stiff to least stiff are taken as
outlined in Table 1B.9-3.
Table 1B.6-Assumed Order of
Restraint Stiffness for Zero Moment
Critical Flange
Stiffness
Restraint Type
Most Stiff
FR
PR
Stiffness
Restraint Type
Least Stiff
None
Once the effective restraints have been determined, the PMEMBER is divided into segments
bounded by F, P, FR, PR or U effective restraints. These segments are then further
divided into sub-segments by effective L restraints.
Note: Sub-segment lengths are not automatically checked to determine if they provide
full lateral restraint as per AS 4100 5.3.2.4.
For design of cantilevers, the free tip should have user-defined U restraints applied to both
top and bottom flanges.
Note: If the effective restraints for any load case consist of U or L restraints only, an
error will be reported.
General Format
PBRACE { TOP | BOTTOM } f1 r1 f2 r2 f52 r52 (PMEMB pmember-list)
Where:
f is a fraction of the PMEMBER length where restraint condition is being
n
specified. This value is any ratio between 0.0 and 1.0.
r is one of the possible restraint condition as in the following:
n
42 STAAD.Pro
Restraint
Type
Fully
restrained
Partially
restrained
Description
Designation,
r
1
Restraint
Type
Description
Laterally
restrained
Unrestrained
Fully and
rotationally
restrained
PR
Partially and
rotationally
restrained
Example
PBRACE TOP 0.85 FR 0.33 PR 0.33 PR 0.25 F 0.75 L 0.5 PR 1.0 U 0.0
U
PBRACE BOTTOM 0.75 L 0.0 U 0.25 P 0.5 L 1.0 U PMEMB 3 7
Description
Refer to AS 4100 Section 5.5 for a full definition of the critical flange. Typically this will be the
compression flange, except for segments with U restraint at one end, then it will be the
tension flange (as is the case for cantilever portion at the end).
l
when gravity loads are dominant (i.e., negative local y-axis direction), the critical
flange of a segment shall be the top flange (i.e., tension).
when upward wind loads are dominant (i.e., positive local y-axis direction), the critical
flange shall be the bottom flange (i.e., tension).
If UNL is not specified, segment length is used as UNL and used as L in effective
length calculation as per 5.6.3.
Notes
a. If PMEMBER list is not provided, all the PMEMBERS are restrained by same
configuration.
b. It is not necessary to provide the restraint locations in sequence as the program sorts
them automatically.
c. Unless specified, PMEMBER ends are assumed to be Fully Restrained (F).
44 STAAD.Pro
d. While designing any section of the member, effective restraints are searched on each
side of the section along the critical flange.
e. The types of restraints applied to the top and bottom flanges at each location
determines the effective section restraints. These are outlined in the table below:
Table 1B.8-Restraint Meanings in Critical and Noncritical Flanges
Case
Flange
Restraint
on a Critical
Flange
Restraint on
a NonCritical
Flange
Effective
Section
Restraint
Nothing
Nothing
None
P or F
Nothing or
U
Nothing or
U
P or F
PR or FR
Nothing or
U
FR
Nothing or
U
PR or FR
PR
L, P or F
L, P, F, FR or
PR
FR or PR
L, P, F, FR or
PR
FR
I
II
III
IV
Note: The critical flange can change for each load case considered.
PMEMBER
Design
Parameter
Comments
compression
b
member section
constant per AS 4100
6.3.3.
ALB
moment
m
modification factor per
AS 4100 5.6.1.1.
ALM
FU
FYLD
IST
KT
LHT
46 STAAD.Pro
PBRACE
SGR
Automated Design
Calculations
PMEMBER
Design
Parameter
Comments
SKT
SKL
k lateral rotation
r
restraint factor as per
AS 4100 Table 5.6.3(3).
SKR
Note: This may not literally be the top flange for say a column or beam with a beta angle.
The local member axes can be viewed in the GUI by selecting Beam Orientation in
the Diagrams Labels dialog (or Ctrl+O keyboard shortcut).
To automate kl using AS 4100 Table 5.6.3(2), the longitudinal position of the load also needs to
be considered, i.e., as either within segment or at segment end.
To determine which of these applies, the shear forces at the ends of each design segment /
sub-segment is considered. If the shear force is found to have the same direction and
magnitude at both ends, it is assumed that loads act at the segment end.
If on the other hand the shear force at each end is found to have different directions or
magnitudes, loads are assumed to act within the segment.
Note: The above method includes an allowance for the self-weight of the member to be
considered, as the self-weight always acts through the shear center.
The net sum of the end shears is also used to determine if the load is acting in the positive or
negative local member y-axis direction. If LHT is set to 1.0 for top flange loading, the net sum
is used to determine whether the top flange loading is acting to stabilise or destabilise the
member for lateral torsional buckling. Negative local y-axis net loads act to destabilise the
segments / sub-segments, whereas positive local y-axis net loads act to stabilise segments / subsegments.
1B.12.6 Example
PARAMETER 1
CODE AUSTRALIAN
DMAX 0.4 PMEMBER ALL
DMIN 0.25 PMEMBER ALL
KX 0.75 PMEMBER ALL
KY 1.0 PMEMBER ALL
LX 4.5 PMEMBER ALL
LY 6.0 PMEMBER ALL
LHT 0.0 PMEMBER ALL
NSC 0.9 PMEMBER ALL
NSF 1.0 PMEMBER ALL
PBRACE BOTTOM 0.0 F 1.0 F PMEMBER ALL
PBRACE TOP 0.0 P 0.5 L 1.0 P PMEMBER ALL
SGR 0.0 PMEMBER ALL
TRACK 2.0 PMEMBER ALL
CHECK CODE PMEMBER ALL
48 STAAD.Pro
Section 2
British Codes
50 STAAD.Pro
Note: It is strongly recommended that you perform new concrete design using the RC
Designer Module. The following is provided to allow old STAAD files to be run.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 2A.1-British Concrete Design BS 8110 Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default
Value
-
Description
BRACE
0.0
CLEAR
20 mm
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0
52 STAAD.Pro
ELY
1.0
ELZ
1.0
FC
30 N/mm 2
FYMAIN
460
N/mm 2
FYSEC
460
N/mm 2
MAX
MAIN
50mm
MINMAIN 8mm
MINSEC
8mm
MMAG
1.0
NSE
CTION
10
Parameter
Name
SERV
Default
Value
0.0
Description
Serviceability checks:
0.0 = No serviceability check
performed.
1.0 = Perform serviceability check
for beams as if they were
continuous.
2.0 = Perform serviceability
check for beams as if they were
simply supported.
3.0 = Perform serviceability
check for beams as if they were
cantilever beams.
SFACE
0.0
SRA
0.0
TRACK
0.0
WIDTH
ZD
STAAD provides the user with two methods of accounting for the slenderness effects in the
analysis and design of concrete members. The first method is equivalent to the procedure
presented in BS8110 Part 1 1985 Section 3.8.2.2 In this section, the code recognizes that
additional moments induced by deflection are present and states that these 'secondary'
moments are accounted for by the design formula in Section 3.8.3. This is the method used
in the design for concrete in STAAD.
Alternatively STAAD houses a PDELTA ANALYSIS facility, which allows the effects of these
second order moments to be considered in the analysis rather than the design. In a PDELTA
analysis, after solving the joint displacements of the structure, the additional moments
induced in the structure are calculated. These can be compared to those calculated using the
formulation of BS8110.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth x 300mm width)
and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to
be circular with 300mm diameter. Note that area (AX) is not provided for these members. If
shear area areas (AY & AZ ) are to be considered in analysis, the user may provide them along
with YD and ZD. Also note that if moments of inertias are not provided, the program will
calculate them from YD and ZD. Finally a T section can be considered by using the third
definition above.
54 STAAD.Pro
proper spacing. The program will scan from each end of the member and provide a total of two
shear regions at each, depending on the change of shear distribution along the beam. If
torsion is present, the program will also consider the provisions of BS8110 - Part 2 -section 2.4.
A table of shear and/or combined torsion is then provided with critical shear.
Stirrups not bent up bars are assumed in the design. The example output below shows a
sample output of an actual reinforcement pattern developed by STAAD. The following
annotations apply:
l
LEVEL - Serial number of the bar center which may contain one or more bar
groups.
HEIGHT - Height of bar level from the soffit of the beam in relation to its local y
axis.
BAR INFO - Reinforcement bar information specifying number of bars and their size.
FROM - Distance from the start of the beam to the start of the reinforcing bar.
TO - Distance from the start of the beam to the end of the reinforcing bar.
(STA,END)
N O.
13 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - SHEAR
PROVIDE SHEAR LINKS AS FOLLOWS
|----------------------------------------------------------------|
| FROM - TO
| MAX. SHEAR | LOAD | LINKS | NO. | SPACING C/C |
|----------------|------------|------|-------|-----|-------------|
| END 1
749 mm |
24.8 kN |
1 | 8 mm | 5 | 187
mm
|
|
749
END 2 |
24.8 kN |
1 | 8 mm | 5 | 187
mm
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------|
___
7J____________________ 1500.X 300.X 300_____________________
8J____
|
|
||=========================================================
|
| 4No8 H 264.
0.TO 1158
|
|
|
|
| 5*8 c/c187
|
|
|
5*8 c/c187
|
|
4No8 H |29. 467.TO 1500
|
|
|
====================================================||
|
|
|___________________________________________________________________________|
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
oooo
|
|
oooo
|
|
oooo
|
|
|
| 4T8
|
| 4T8
|
| 4T8
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 4T8
|
| 4T8
|
| 4T8
|
|
|
|
oooo
|
|
oooo
|
|
oooo
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_______________|
|_______________|
|_______________|
|_______________|
56 STAAD.Pro
FC - Concrete grade
CLEAR - Distance from the outer surface to the edge of the bar. This is considered the
same on both surfaces.
SRA - Parameter which denotes the angle of the required transverse reinforcement
relative to the longitudinal reinforcement for the calculation of Wood & Armer design
moments.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
58 STAAD.Pro
Default
Value
460
Mpa
Description
30 Mpa
36
36
36
LMIN
LMAX
16
CLEAR
25 mm
FC
HMIN
HMAX
VMIN
VMAX
EMIN
EMAX
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
Reinforcement placement mode:
TWOLAYERED
KSLENDER
1.5
60 STAAD.Pro
Design for in-plane shear (denoted by Fxy in the shear wall force
output)
Limit on the nominal shear strength, v is calculated as per clause no. 3.4.5.2.
Nominal shear strength of concrete is computed as per table 3.8.
The design shear stress is computed as per clause no. 3.4.5.12 taking into consideration the
effect of axial load. The area of reinforcement is calculated and checked against the minimum
area as per clause no. 3.12.7.4.
2A.7.3 Example
The following example starts from the definition of shear wall and ends at the shear wall
design.
.
.
SET DIVISION 12
SURFACE INCIDENCES
2 5 37 34 SUR 1
19 16 65 68 SUR 2
11 15 186 165 SUR 3
10 6 138 159 SUR 4
.
.
.
SURFACE PROPERTY
1 TO 4 THI 18
SUPPORTS
1 7 14 20 PINNED
2 TO 5 GEN PIN
6 TO 10 GEN PIN
11 TO 15 GEN PIN
19 TO 16 GEN PIN
.
.
SURFACE CONSTANTS
E 3150
POISSON 0.17
DENSITY 8.68E-005
ALPHA 5.5E-006
.
62 STAAD.Pro
.
START SHEARWALL DES
CODE BRITISH
UNIT NEW MMS
FC 25
FYMAIN 460
TWO 1
VMIN 12
HMIN 12
EMIN 12
DESIGN SHEA LIST 1 TO 4
END
Note: If the sd1, ..., sdj or the od1, ..., odk list does not include all node-tonode segments, or if any of the numbers listed equals zero, then the
Note: xd and yd represent default numbers of divisions for each edge of the surface
where output is requested. The output is provided for sections located between
division segments. For example, if the number of divisions = 2, then the output
will be produced for only one section (at the center of the edge).
64 STAAD.Pro
Design is performed for all panels, for the cross-section located at a distance c from the
start of the panel.
66 STAAD.Pro
2B.1 General
The design philosophy embodied in BS5950:2000 is built around the concept of limit state
design, used today in most modern steel design codes. Structures are designed and
proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they become unfit for their
intended use. Two major categories of limit state are recognized - serviceability and ultimate.
The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability while that
in serviceability limit state is deflection. Appropriate safety factors are used so that the chances
of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation of BS5950:2000, members are proportioned to resist the design
loads without exceeding the limit states of strength and stability. Accordingly, the most
economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. This procedure is
controlled by the designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type or
other such parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks that code
requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria.
The complete B.S.C. steel tables for both hot rolled and hollow sections are built into the
program for use in specifying member properties as well as for the actual design process. See
section 2B.4 for information regarding the referencing of these sections. In addition to
universal beams, columns, joists, piles, channels, tees, composite sections, beams with cover
plates, pipes, tubes, and angles, there is a provision for user provided tables.
STAAD.Pro 2006 and later have the additional option to design tapered I shaped (wide flange)
beams according to Annex G of BS5950. See Section 2B.13 for a complete description.
ST angle and
USER table angles
RAangle
2B.4.3 Channels
All rolled steel channel sections from the BSI table have been incorporated in STAAD. The
designation is similar to that of the joists. The same designation scheme as in BSI tables may
be used with the weight omitted.
10 TO 15 TA ST CH305X102
55 57 59 61 TA ST CH178X76
Note: Face-to-face double channels can not be used in a CHECK CODE command.
2B.4.6 Angles
All equal and unequal angles are available for analysis. Two types of specifications may be used
to describe an angle section, either a standard, ST specification or reversed angle, RA
specification. Note, however, that only angles specified with an RA specification can be
designed.
The standard angle section is specified as follows:
15 20 25 TA ST UA200X150X18
This specification may be used when the local STAAD z-axis corresponds to the V-V axis
specified in the steel tables. If the local STAAD y-axis corresponds to the V-V axis in the
tables, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
35 TO 45 TA RA UA200X150X18
Note: If the section is defined from a Double Angle User Table, then the section
properties must be defined with an 11th value which defines the radius of gyration
about an individual sections principal v-v axis (See Technical Reference Manual,
5.19 User Steel Table Specification)
70 STAAD.Pro
(specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units)
Only code checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is
used.
Example:
15 TO 25 TA ST TUB160808.0
Tubes, like pipes, can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and Thickness) and
not by any table designations.
6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
(A TUBE THAT HAS A HEIGHT OF 8, A WIDTH OF 6, AND A WALL THICKNESS
OF 0.5 LENGTH UNITS)
Note: Only code checking and no member selection is performed for TUBE sections
specified this way.
reduce the design strength. This factor is again a function of the geometry of the section and
is automatically determined by STAAD for use in the design process.
2B.5.2 Compression
Compression members must be designed so that the compression resistance of the member is
greater than the axial compressive load. Compression resistance is determined according to
the compressive strength, which is a function of the slenderness of the gross section, the
appropriate design strength and the relevant strut characteristics. Strut characteristics take
into account the considerable influence residual rolling and welding stresses have on column
behavior. Based on data collected from extensive research, it has been determined that
sections such as tubes with low residual stresses and Universal Beams and Columns are of
intermediate performance. It has been found that I-shaped sections are less sensitive to
imperfections when constrained to fail about an axis parallel to the flanges. These research
observations are incorporated in BS5950 through the use of four strut curves together with a
selection of tables to indicate which curve to use for a particular case. Compression strength
for a particular section is calculated in STAAD according to the procedure outlined in Annex
C of BS5950 where compression strength is seen to be a function of the appropriate Robertson
constant (representing Strut Curve) corresponding Perry factor, limiting slenderness of the
member and appropriate design strength.
A departure from BS5950:1990, generally compression members are no longer required to be
checked for slenderness limitations, however, this option can be included by specifying a
MAIN parameter. Note, a slenderness limit of 50 is still applied on double angles checked as
battened struts as per clause 4.7.9.
72 STAAD.Pro
For members with axial tension and moment, the interaction formula as outlined in section
4.8.2 is applied based on effective tension capacity.
For members with axial compression and moment, two principal interaction formulae must be
satisfied Cross Section Capacity check (4.8.3.2) and the Member Buckling Resistance check
(4.8.3.3 ). Three types of approach for the member buckling resistance check have been
outlined in BS5950:2000 - the simplified approach (4.8.3.3.1), the more exact approach (4.8.3.3.2)
and Annex I1 for stocky members. As noted in the code, in cases where neither the major axis
nor the minor axis moment approaches zero, the more exact approach may be more
conservative than the simplified approach. It has been found, however, that this is not always
the case and STAAD therefore performs both checks, comparing the results in order that the
more appropriate criteria can be used.
Additionally the equivalent moment factors, m m and m , can be specified by the user or
x y
yx
calculated by the program.
Members subject to biaxial moments in the absence of both tensile and compressive axial
forces are checked using the appropriate method described above with all axial forces set to
zero. STAAD also carries out cross checks for compression only, which for compact/plastic
sections may be more critical. If this is the case, COMPRESSION will be the critical condition
reported despite the presence of moments.
2B.5.4 Shear
A member subjected to shear is considered adequate if the shear capacity of the section is
greater than the shear load on the member. Shear capacity is calculated in STAAD using the
procedure outlined in section 4.2.3, also 4.4.5 and Annex H3 if appropriate, considering the
appropriate shear area for the section specified.
2D (B t )
1 n
4(B t )
A
2
+ n 1
For n 2t(B-2t)/A
S ry =
2B (D t )
1 n
4(D t )
A
2
+ n 1
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number till it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 2B.1-British Steel Design BS5950:2000 Parameters
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
Must be specified as BS5950
CODE
AD
74 STAAD.Pro
Depth at end/2
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
Beam divisions
0. Design only for end
moments or those locations
specified by the SECTION
command.
BEAM
3.0
CAN
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
Moment calculation:
CB
1.0
DFF
DJ1
None
(Mandatory for
deflection check,
TRACK 4.0)
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
DMAX *
100.0cm
DMIN *
0.0 cm
ESTIFF
0.0
76 STAAD.Pro
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
Parameter
Name
LEG
Default Value
Description
0.0
Maximum of Lyy
LVV *
and Lzz
(Lyy is a term
used
by BS5950)
LY *
Member Length
LZ *
Member Length
MLT
1.0
MX
1.0
MY
1.0
MYX
1.0
NSF
1.0
PNL *
0.0
0.0 = Infinity
Any other value used in the
calculations.
Parameter
Name
PY *
Default Value
Set according to
steel grade (SGR)
Description
MAIN
0.0
RATIO
1.0
SAME**
78 STAAD.Pro
0.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
Identify Section type for section
classification
0.0 = Rolled Section
SBLT
0.0
1.0 = Built up
Section
2.0 = Cold formed
section
SWAY
none
SGR
0.0
TB
0.0
0 = Mc limit 1.5pyZ
1= Mc limit 1.2 pyZ
Output details
0.0 = Suppress all
member capacity
info.
TRACK
0.0
Parameter
Name
UNF
UNL *
Default Value
1.0
Member Length
Description
Factor applied to unsupported
length for Lateral Torsional
Buckling effective length per
section 4.3.6.7 of BS5950.
Unsupported Length for
calculating Lateral Torsional
Buckling resistance moment
section 4.3.6.7 of BS5950.
Weld Type, see AISC steel design
1.0 closed
WELD
2.0 open
1.0 = Closed
sections. Welding on
one side only (except
for webs of wide
flange and tee
sections)
2.0 = Open
sections. Welding on
both sides (except
pipes and tubes)
Note: There was an NT parameter in STAAD.Pro 2005 build 1003 which is now
automatically calculated during the design as it is load case dependant.
2B.6.1 Notes
1. CAN, DJ1, and DJ2 Deflection
a. When performing the deflection check, you can choose between two methods.
The first method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter, is based on the
local displacement. Local displacement is described in Section 5.44 of the
Technical Reference Manual.
If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever style
deflection. Let (DX1, DY1, DZ1) represent the nodal displacements (in global
axes) at the node defined by DJ1 (or in the absence of DJ1, the start node of the
member). Similarly, (DX2, DY2, DZ2) represent the deflection values at DJ2 or
the end node of the member.
80 STAAD.Pro
c. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member
length and local deflections will be measured from original member line.
d. It is important to note that unless a DFF value is specified, STAAD will not
perform a deflection check. This is in accordance with the fact that there is no
default value for DFF.
e. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available
parameters for steel design.
2. LEG follows the requirements of BS5950 table 28. This table concerns the fastener
restraint conditions for angles, double angles, tee sections and channels for slenderness.
The following values are available:
Bold
Configuration
Leg
LEG
Parameter
short leg
1.0
long leg
3.0
short leg
0.0
long leg
2.0
short leg
3.0
long leg
7.0
short leg
2.0
long leg
6.0
long leg
1.0
short leg
5.0
long leg
0.0
short leg
4.0
1.0
0.0
1.0
0.0
(a) - 2 bolts
4.7.10.2
Single Angle
(b) - 1 bolts
(a) - 2 bolts
(b) - 1 bolts
4.7.10.3 Double
Angles
(c) - 2 bolts
(d) - 1 bolts
4.7.10.4 Channels
4.7.10.5 Tee
Sections
The slenderness of single and double angle, channel and tee sections are specified in
BS 5950 table 25 depending on the connection provided at the end of the member. To
define the appropriate connection, a LEG parameter should be assigned to the member.
The following list indicates the value of the LEG parameter required to match the
BS5950 connection definition:
Clause 4.7.10.2 Single Angle:
a. 2 Bolts: Short leg = 1.0, Long Leg = 3.0
b. 1 Bolt: Short Leg = 0.0, Long Leg = 2.0
For single angles, the slenderness is calculated for the geometric axes, a-a and b-b as
well as the weak v-v axis. The effective lengths of the geometric axes are defined as:
La = KY * KY
Lb = KZ * LZ
82 STAAD.Pro
The slenderness calculated for the v-v axis is then used to calculate the compression
strength p for the weaker principal axis (z-z for ST angles or y-y for RA specified
c
angles). The maximum slenderness of the a-a and b-b axes is used to calculate the
compression strength p for the stronger principal axis.
c
Alternatively for single angles where the connection is not known or Table 25 is not
appropriate, by setting the LEG parameter to 10, slenderness is calculated for the two
principal axes y-y and z-z only. The LVV parameter is not used.
For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply with note 5 in table 25. In
addition, if using double angles from user tables, (Technical Reference Manual section
5.19) an eleventh value, r , should be supplied at the end of the ten existing values
vv
corresponding to the radius of gyration of the single angle making up the pair.
3. PY Steel Design Strength
The design parameter PY should only be used when a uniform design strength for an
entire structure or a portion thereof is required. Otherwise the value of PY will be set
according to the stipulations of BS5950 table 9 in which the design strength is seen as a
function of cross sectional thickness for a particular steel grade (SGR parameter) and
particular element considered. Generally speaking this option is not required and the
program should be allowed to ascertain the appropriate value.
4. UNL, LY, and LZ Relevant Effective Length
The values supplied for UNL, LY and LZ should be real numbers greater than zero in
current units of length. They are supplied along with or instead of UNF, KY and KZ
(which are factors, not lengths) to define lateral torsional buckling and compression
effective lengths respectively. Please note that both UNL or UNF and LY or KY values
are required even though they are often the same values. The former relates to
compression flange restraint for lateral torsional buckling while the latter is the
unrestrained buckling length for compression checks.
5. TRACK Control of Output Formats
When the TRACK parameter is set to 0.0, 1.0, or 2.0, member capacities will be printed in
design related output (code check or member selection) in kilonewtons per square
meter.
TRACK 4.0 causes the design to carry out a deflection check, usually with a different
load list to the main code check. The members that are to be checked must have the
parameters DFF, DJ1, and DJ2 set.
The program can be used to calculate the values for the equivalent moment factors by
defining the design member with a GROUP command (see the Technical Reference
Manual section 5.16 Listing of Members/Elements/Joints by Specification of GROUPS).
The nodes along the beam can then be defined as the location of restraint points with
J settings.
Additionally for the MLT parameter, the joint can be defined as having the upper
flange restrained (positive local Y) with the a U setting or the lower flange restrained
(negative local Y) with a L setting.
For example, consider a series of 5 beam elements as a single continuous member as
shown below:
To enable the steel design, the beam needs to be defined as a group, called MainBeam:
START GROUP DEFINITION
MEMBER
_MAINBEAM 11 2 38 12 3
END GROUP DEFINITION
Note: This can be done in the User Interface by selecting Tools > Create New
Group.
Therefore, this 5 beam member has 6 joints such that:
Joint 1 = Node 3
Joint 2 = Node 1
Joint 3 = Node 33
84 STAAD.Pro
Joint 4 = Node 14
Joint 5 = Node 7
Joint 6 = Node 2
a. Consider MX, MY and MYX
Say that this member has been restrained in its major axis (local Y) only at the
ends. In the minor axis (local Z) it has been restrained at the ends and also at
node number 33 (joint 3). For local flexural buckling, it has only been restrained
at its ends. Hence:
For the major axis, local Y axis:
MX _MainBeam J1 J6
For the minor axis, local Z axis:
MY _ MainBeam J1 J3 J6
For the lateral flexural buckling, local X axis:
MYX _ MainBeam J1 J6
b. Consider MLT
Say that this member has been restrained at its ends against lateral torsional buckling
and the top flange has been restrained at node number 33 (joint 3) and only the lower
flange at node number 7, (joint 5). Hence:
MLT _MainBeam J1 T3 L5 J6
To split the beam into two buckling lengths for L at joint 14:
y
MY _groupname J1 J4 J6
7. SWAY Sway Loadcase
This parameter is used to specify a load case that is to be treated as a sway load case in
the context of clause 4.8.3.3.4. This load case would be set up to represent the k
M
amp s
mentioned in this clause and the steel design module would add the forces from this
load case to the forces of the other load case it is designed for.
Note that the load case specified with this parameter will not be designed as a separate
load case. The following is the correct syntax for the parameter:
Parameter
Default Value
Description
Name
SWAY
(load case
number)
ALL
MEMBER (member list)
_(group name)
Example
SWAY 5 MEM 1 TO 10
SWAY 6 _MAINBEAMS
Specify the load cases to be considered in the design; the default is all load cases.
Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection along with the list of
members.
These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times depending upon the
design requirements.
Note: PRISMATIC sections are also not acceptable steel sections for design per BS5950 in
STAAD.Pro.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
86 STAAD.Pro
LOCATION
specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where
design forces govern.
TRACK
If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block out part of the table
and will print the allowable bending capacities in compression (MCY & MCZ) and
reduced moment capacities (MRY & MRZ), allowable axial capacity in compression
(PC) and tension (PT) and shear capacity (PV). TRACK 2.0 will produce the design
results as shown in section 2B.9.
An example of each TRACK setting follows:
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST UC305X305X118 PASS
BS-4.3.6
0.769
3
179.66 C
0.00
334.46
0.00
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST UC305X305X118 PASS
BS-4.3.6
0.769
3
179.66 C
0.00
334.46
0.00
|---------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB
1 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 1 |
|MCZ= 519.4 MCY= 234.3 PC= 2455.9 PT=
0.0 MB= 435.0 PV= 600.1|
| BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT = 1.00, mx = 1.00, my = 1.00, myx = 1.00 |
| PZ= 3975.00
FX/PZ =
0.05
MRZ= 516.9
MRY= 234.3
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------|
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST UC305X305X118 PASS
BS-4.3.6
0.769
3
179.66 C
0.00
334.46
0.00
=======================================================================
MATERIAL DATA
Grade of steel
= S 275
Modulus of elasticity
= 210 kN/mm2
Design Strength (py)
= 265 N/mm2
SECTION PROPERTIES (units - cm)
Member Length =
600.00
Gross Area = 150.00 Net Area = 127.50 Eff. Area = 150.00
z-z axis
y-y axis
Moment of inertia
:
27700.004
9060.001
Plastic modulus
:
1960.000
895.000
88 STAAD.Pro
TABLE
Elastic modulus
Effective modulus
Shear Area
DESIGN DATA (units - kN,m)
Section Class
Squash Load
Axial force/Squash load
:
1761.526
589.460
:
1960.000
895.000
:
103.471
37.740
BS5950-1/2000
:
PLASTIC
:
3975.00
:
0.045
z-z axis
y-y axis
Compression Capacity
:
3551.7
2455.9
Moment Capacity
:
519.4
234.3
Reduced Moment Capacity :
516.9
234.3
Shear Capacity
:
1645.2
600.1
BUCKLING CALCULATIONS (units - kN,m)
(axis nomenclature as per design code)
x-x axis
y-y axis
Slenderness
:
44.153
77.203
Radius of gyration (cm) :
13.589
7.772
Effective Length
:
6.000
6.000
LTB Moment Capacity (kNm) and LTB Length (m):
435.00,
6.000
LTB Coefficients & Associated Moments (kNm):
mLT =
1.00 :
mx =
1.00
: my =
1.00
: myx =
1.00
Mlt = 334.46 :
Mx = 334.46 : My =
0.00
:
My =
0.00
CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (units- kN,m):
CLAUSE
RATIO LOAD
FX
VY
VZ
MZ
MY
BS-4.2.3-(Y)
0.143
3
85.6
BS-4.3.6
0.769
3
85.6
334.5
BS-4.7
(C)
0.098
1
239.7
BS-4.8.3.2
0.647
3
179.7
85.6
0.0
334.5
0.0
BS-4.8.3.3.1
0.842
3
179.7
334.5
0.0
BS-4.8.3.3.2
0.842
3
179.7
334.5
0.0
ANNEX I.1
0.714
3
179.7
334.5
0.0
Torsion and deflections have not been considered in the design.
The section is then checked for shear buckling resistance using clause 4.4.5.2 - Simplified
method and the result is included in the ratio checks.
You must specify the effective length of unrestrained compression flange using the parameter
UNL.
The program compares the resistance of members with the applied load effects, in accordance
with BS 5950-1:2000. Code checking is carried out for locations specified by the user via the
SECTION command or the BEAM parameter. The results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL
identifier and a RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. The user may
choose the degree of detail in the output data by setting the TRACK parameter.
The beam is designed as other wide flange beams apart from the Lateral Torsional Buckling
check which is replaced by the Annex G.2.2. check.
90 STAAD.Pro
1 + (2a / h s)
y=
2
2
1
+
2
a
/
h
+
0.05(
/
x
)
(
)
s
0.5
= Ly /ry
Where:
a is the distance between the reference axis and the axis of restraint,
h is the distance between the shear centers of the flanges;
s
4a / h s
vt =
2
2
1 + (2a / h s) + 0.05( / x )
0.5
Where:
3 D max
x 9 D m in
2/3
Where:
D
is the maximum depth of cross-section within the length Ly, see Figure
max
G.3;
D
is the minimum depth of cross-section within the length Ly, see Figure
min
G.3;
x is the torsional index of the minimum depth cross-section, see 4.3.6.8
Otherwise, c is taken as 1.0 (unity).
92 STAAD.Pro
determine the limiting shear strength of the web panel. The shear capacity is then calculated
based on the formula given under clause 9.9.2.2.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 2C.1-BS5400 Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
ESTIFF
Default
Value
0
Description
94 STAAD.Pro
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
Parameter
Name
MAIN
Default
Value
1.0
Description
Grade of concrete:
1. 30 N/mm2
2. 40 N/mm2
3. 50 N/mm2
NSF
1.0
PY
RATIO
SBLT
1
0.0
SGR
0.0
TRACK
1.0
UNL
Member
Length
WET
0.0
2C.7.2 I Section
The same is true for ISECTION definition in user table.
2C.7.3 Example
UNIT CM
WIDE FLANGE
C45752
-66.5 44.98 .76 15.24 1.09 21345 645 21.3 34.185 33.223
150 150 30 10
ISECTION
PG9144
-92.05 2.15 92.05 42.05 3.66 42.05 3.66 197.9 153.9 1730
40 40 12 1
The larger British sections have been coded as USER TABLES under wide flange and are
available on request to any existing user. Please note however that composite design is not
available in this portion of STAAD.
96 STAAD.Pro
Maximum bar spacing to limit crack widths to the user's limit is also printed under each bar
size.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 2D.1-BS8007 Design Parameters
Parameter Default
Name
Value
Description
FC
30
N/mm 2
CLEAR
20 mm
SRA
0.0
SCON
TEMP
CRACK *
30C
0.2 mm
98 STAAD.Pro
100 STAAD.Pro
Z with Lips
Pipe
Tube
Shape assignment may be done using the General |Property page of the graphical user
interface (GUI) or by specifying the section designation symbol in the input file.
The properties listed in the tables are gross section properties. STAAD.Pro uses unreduced
section properties in the structure analysis stage. Both unreduced and effective section
properties are used in the design stage, as applicable.
2E. British Codes - Design per British Cold Formed Steel Code
Pt = Aepy
Where:
A is the net area An determined in accordance with cl.3.5.4
e
102 STAAD.Pro
P is the tensile capacity determined in accordance with clause 7.2.1 of the subject
t
code
M ,M ,M ,M
z
cz
cy
PEPcs
+ 2 PEPcs
For Sections symmetrical about a single axis and which are not subject to torsional flexural
buckling, the buckling resistance under axial load, Pc, may be obtained from the following
equation as per clause 6.2.4 of the subject code
P c =
M c Pc
(M c +Pc e s)
Where the meanings of the symbols used are indicated in the subject clauses.
Where:
= (PE/PTF) when PE >PTF
= 1, otherwise
Where the meanings of the symbols used are indicated in the subject clause.
2E. British Codes - Design per British Cold Formed Steel Code
Mz
F
C bx M cz1 c
P Ez
My
F
C by M cy 1 c
P Ey
For Beams subjected to lateral buckling, the following relationship should be satisfied
Fc
Pc
Mz
Mb
My
F
C by M cy 1 c
P Ey
M is the moment capacity in bending about the local Z axis in the absence of
cz
F and M , as per clause 5.2.2 and 5.6
c
M is the moment capacity in bending about the local Y axis, in the absence of
cy
F and M ,as per clause 5.2.2 and 5.6
c
P is the flexural buckling load in compression for bending about the local Z
Ez
axis
P is the flexural buckling load in compression for bending about the local Y
Ey
axis
C ,C
bz
by
are taken as unity unless their values are specified by the user
M , M , and M are calculated from clause numbers 5.2.2 and 5.6 in the manner described
cz
cy
b
herein below.
Mcz = Szz x po
Mcy = Syy x po
D
po = 1.13 0.0019 w
t
Where
104 STAAD.Pro
Ys
280
p y
p is the limiting stress for bending elements under stress gradient and should
o
not greater then design strength p
y
For unrestrained beams the applied moment based on factored loads should not be greater
than the smaller of the bending moment resistance of the section , M , and the buckling
c
resistance moment of the beam, M
b
Mb =
M EM y
B + B2 M EM y
Mc
The average shear stress should not exceed the lesser of the shear yield strength, p or the shear
v
buckling strength, q as stipulated in clause 5.4.3 of the subject code.
cr
2E. British Codes - Design per British Cold Formed Steel Code
to satisfy the following relationship as per the stipulations of clause 5.5.2 of the subject code
(Fv /Pv )2 + (M/Mc)2 1
Where:
F is the shear force
v
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 2E.1-British Cold Formed Steel Design Parameters
Parameter Name
CODE
Default Value
BS5950 COLD
Description
Design Code to follow.
See section 5.48.1 of the
Technical Reference
Manual.
106 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description
BEAM
1.0
CMZ
1.0
Coefficient of equivalent
uniform bending C . See
b
BS:5950-5:1998,5.6. Used
for Combined axial load
and bending design.
CMY
1.0
Coefficient of equivalent
uniform bending C . See
b
BS:5950-5:1998,5.6. Used
for Combined axial load
and bending design.
CWY
1.0
2E. British Codes - Design per British Cold Formed Steel Code
Parameter Name
FLX
Default Value
Description
Specifies whether
torsional-flexural buckling
restraint is provided or is
not necessary for the
member. See BS:59505:1998, 5.6
Values:
0 Section
subject to
torsional
flexural
buckling
1 Section
not subject
to torsional
flexural
buckling
FU
430 MPa
FYLD
250 MPa
KX
108 STAAD.Pro
1.0
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LX
Member length
2E. British Codes - Design per British Cold Formed Steel Code
Parameter Name
110 STAAD.Pro
Default Value
Description
LY
Member length
LZ
Member length
Parameter Name
MAIN
Default Value
0
Description
Specify the design for
slenderness against the
maximum slenderness as
per Clause 6.2.2:
0 Do not
check
slenderness
ratio
1 Check
members
resisting
normal loads
(180)
2 - Check
members
resisting selfweight and
wind loads
(250)
3 - Check
members
resisting
reversal of
stress (350)
NSF
DMAX
1.0
2540.0
cm.
RATIO
1.0
2E. British Codes - Design per British Cold Formed Steel Code
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description
TRACK
0 - Prints
only the
member
number,
section
name, ratio,
and
PASS/FAIL
status.
1 - Prints the
design
summary in
addition to
that printed
by TRACK 1
2 - Prints
member and
material
properties in
addition to
that printed
by TRACK 2.
112 STAAD.Pro
2E.5.1 Solution
A. Bending Check
As per Clause 5.2.2.2 of BS 5950 Part 5 the limiting compressive
stress, p , for stiffened webs is given by the minimum of
o
po = 1.13 0.0019 w
t
p y
Ys
280
M EM y
B + B2 M EM y
Mc
Where:
The Yield moment of section is given by
MY = Szz po = 9.19(10)6 Nmm
The elastic buckling resistance moment as per clause 5.6.2.2 is calculated to be
ME = 4.649(10)6 Nmm
And
B = [My +(1 +)ME]/2
So that
B = [9.19(10)6 + (1 +0.0)4.649(10)6 ]/2 = 2.325(10)10
Which yields
2E. British Codes - Design per British Cold Formed Steel Code
4.649(10) 9.19(10)
Mb =
= 9.98(10)6N mm
B. Compression Check
The Axial force induced in member# 1 is 3,436.75 N
The elastic flexural buckling load P = 1.185(10)6 N
E
PEPcs
+ 2 PEPcs
= 153, 782N
For Channel section (being singly symmetric), Buckling Resistance as per clause 6.2.4 is
P c =
M c Pc
(M c +Pc e s)
Where:
The limiting compressive moment, M , in the relevant directionis equal to 9.19(10)6
c
Nmm,as calculated above
And the distance, e , of the geometric neutral axis of the gross cross section and that of
s
the effective cross section is equal to 38.24 m
So that,
P c =
= 93, 788.7N
Mz
Mb
My
F
C by M cy 1 c
P
Ey
114 STAAD.Pro
Mz
M cz
My
M cy
3, 436.75
457.698(379.212)
2.15(10)6
6
9.19(10)
19, 755.3
6
1.81(10)
= 0.2647
Mz
F
C bx M cz1 c
P Ez
My
F
C by M cy 1 c
P
Ey
= 0.2773
D. Shear Check as per clause 5.4.2 and 5.4.3
pv = 0.6py = 0.6(379.212) = 227.52 N/mm2
qcr = (1000t/D)2 = (10001.8/170)2 = 112.11 N/mm2
Pv = Amin(pv , qcr)
Shear resistance Y = 33,579.4 N
Shear resistance Z = 21,148.6 N
Shear Ratio Y = 5,627.72/33,579.4 = 0.1675
Shear Ratio Z = 5,627.72/21,148.6 = 0.0031
E. Shear Check with Bending as per clause 5.5.2
Shear with bending on Z
(Fv /Pv )2 + (Mz/Mcz)2 = (5,627.72/33,579.4)2 +[2.15106 /(9.19106 )]2 = 0.08327
Shear with bending on Y
(Fv /Pv )2 + (My /Mcy )2 = (67.114/21,148.6)2 +[19,755.3/(3.46106 )]2 = 0.000043
2E.5.2 Comparison
Table 2E.2-Comparison for verification problem
Criteria
STAAD.ProResult
Hand
Difference
Calculation
0.037
0.0366
none
0.278
0.2773
none
Bending Z ratio
0.236
0.235
none
Bending Y ratio
0.006
0.0057
none
0.2407
0.241
none
Shear Z ratio
0.168
0.1675
none
Shear Y ratio
0.003
0.0031
none
2E. British Codes - Design per British Cold Formed Steel Code
Criteria
STAAD.ProResult
Hand
Difference
Calculation
0.084
0.08327
none
0.000
0.000043
none
116 STAAD.Pro
2E. British Codes - Design per British Cold Formed Steel Code
2E.5.4 Output
The excerpts from the design output for member number 1 are as follows:
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (BS5950-5-v1.1)
***********************
UNITS : MM, KN, KNM, MPA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------| MEMBER#
1 SECTION: 170CLHS56X18
LEN:
609.60 LOCATION:
609.60
|
| STATUS: PASS RATIO = 0.278 GOV.MODE: 6.4-Bend + Compress GOV.LOAD:
1
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
MATERIAL DATA:
Yield strength of steel
:
Ultimate tensile strength
:
SECTION PROPERTIES:(units - cm)
Section Name
:
Member Length
:
Gross Area(Ag)
:
Moment of inertia (I)
Moment of inertia (Ie)
Elastic modulus (Zet)
Elastic modulus (Zec)
:
:
:
:
379.21 N/mm2
430.00 N/mm2
170CLHS56X18
60.96
5.45
Net Area (Ae):
z-z axis
y-y axis
237.27
21.93
235.46
19.42
27.85
5.20
27.55
10.42
DESIGN DATA:
z-z axis
y-y axis
Compression Capacity (Pc) :
93.70
Moment Capacity (Mc)
:
9.17
3.47
Shear Capacity (Pv)
:
21.00
33.50
LTB Capacity (Mb)
:
9.17
EACH CLAUSE CHECK UNDER CRITICAL LOAD :
CLAUSE
COMBINATION
RATIO
BS-6.3
Compression ratio - Axial
0.037
BS-6.4
Bend-Compression ratio
0.278
BS-5.1
Bending Ratio - Z
0.236
BS-5.1
Bending Ratio - Y
0.006
BS-5.1
Biaxial Bending Ratio
0.241
BS-5.4
Shear Ratio - Z
0.168
BS-5.4
Shear Ratio - Y
0.003
BS-5.5.2
Bending -Z & Shear - Y Ratio
0.084
BS-5.5.2
Bending -Y & Shear - Z Ratio
0.000
Torsion and deflections have not been considered in the design.
118 STAAD.Pro
4.58
Section 3
Canadian Codes
120 STAAD.Pro
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth and 300mm width)
and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be
circular with a 300mm diameter
will be multiplied before beginning member design. This second procedure allows
slenderness to be considered in accordance with Clause 10.14 of the code.
Note: STAAD does not factor loads automatically for concrete design. All the proper
factored loads must be provided by the user before the ANALYSIS specification.
While performing a P-Delta analysis, all load cases must be defined as primary load cases. If
the effects of separate load cases are to be combined, it should be done either by using the
REPEAT LOAD command or by specifying the load information of these individual loading
cases under one single load case. Usage of the LOAD COMBINATION command will yield
incorrect results for P-Delta Analysis in STAAD.Pro.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 3A.1-Canadian Concrete Design CSA-A23.3-94 Parameters
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
CLB
40mm
CLS
40mm
CLT
40mm
YD
DEPTH
122 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
EFACE
Default
Value
0.0 Face
of
Support
Description
30
N/mm 2
FYMAIN
FYSEC
400
N/mm 2
MAX
MAIN
Number
55 bar
MINM
AIN
Number
10 bar
MINSEC
Number
10 bar
MMAG
1.0
NSE
CTION
12
REINF
0.0
SFACE
0.0
0.0
Parameter
Name
WIDTH
Default
Value
ZD
Description
124 STAAD.Pro
TO
Distance from the start of the beam to the end of the rebar.
ANCHOR
(STA,END)
States whether anchorage, either a hook or continuation, is needed at start (STA) or
at the end (END) of the bar.
126 STAAD.Pro
128 STAAD.Pro
3B.4.3 S, M, HP shapes
In addition to welded wide flanges and regular wide flanges, other I shaped sections like S, M
and HP shapes are also available. The designation scheme is identical to that listed in the
CSA tables. While specifying the sections, it should be remembered that the portion after the
decimal point should be omitted. Thus, M310X17.6 should be specified as M310X17 and
S180X22.8 should be specified as S180X22. Examples illustrating specifications of these shapes
are provided below.
10 TO 20 BY 2 TA ST S510X98
45 TO 55 TA ST M150X6
88 90 96 TA ST HP310X79
130 STAAD.Pro
55 TO 90 TA ST C250X30
30 TO 45 TA ST MC200X33
Note that the specification SP after the section designation is used for providing the spacing.
The spacing should always be provided in the current length unit.
3B.4.6 Angles
To specify angles, the angle name is preceded by the letter L. Thus, a 200X200 angle with a
25mm thickness is designated as L200X200X25. The following examples illustrate angle
specifications.
75 TO 95 TA ST L100X100X8
33 34 35 TA ST L200X100X20
Note that the above specification is for standard angles. In this specification, the local z-axis
(see Fig. 2.6 in the Technical Reference Manual) corresponds to the Y-Y axis shown in the
CSA table. Another common practice of specifying angles assumes the local y-axis to
correspond to the Y-Y axis. To specify angles in accordance with this convention, the reverse
angle designation facility has been provided. A reverse angle may be specified by substituting
the word ST with the word RA. Refer to the following example for details.
10 TO 15 TA RA L55X35X4
The local axis systems for STANDARD and REVERSE angles is shown in Fig. 2.6 of the STAAD
Technical Reference manual.
80 TO 90 TA SD L125X75X6 SP 2.5
The second example above describes a double angle section consisting of 125X75X6 angles
with a spacing of 2.5 length units.
3B.4.8 Tees
Tee sections obtained by cutting W sections may be specified by using the T specification
instead of ST before the name of the W shape. For example:
100 TO 120 TA T W200X42
In addition, any tube section may be specified by using the DT(for depth), WT(for width),
and TH(for thickness) specifications.
For example:
100 TO 200 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
will describe a tube with a depth of 8 in., width of 6 in. and a wall thickness of 0.5 inches.
Note that the values of depth, width and thickness must be provided in current length unit.
132 STAAD.Pro
In addition to sections listed in the CSA tables, circular hollow sections may be specified by
using the OD (outside diameter) and ID (inside diameter) specifications. For example:
70 TO 90 TA ST PIPE OD 10.0 ID 9.0
will describe a pipe with an outside diameter of 10 length units and inside diameter of 9.0
length units. Note that the values of outside and inside diameters must be provided in terms
of current length unit.
Sample input file to demonstrate usage of Canadian shapes
STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KNS
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 17 160 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2 16
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES CANADIAN
* W SHAPES
1 TA ST W250X18
* WW SHAPES
2 TA ST WW700X185
* S SHAPES
3 TA ST S200X27
* M SHAPES
4 TA ST M130X28
* HP SHAPES
5 TA ST HP310X132
* MC CHANNELS
6 TA ST MC150X17
* C CHANNELS
7 TA ST C180X18
* DOUBLE CHANNELS
8 TA D C250X37 SP 1.0
* ANGLES
9 TA ST L55X35X5
* REVERSE ANGLES
10 TA RA L90X75X5
* DOUBLE ANGLES, LONG LEG BACK TO BACK
11 TA LD L100X90X6 SP 2.0
* DOUBLE ANGLES, SHORT LEG BACK TO BACK
12 TA SD L125X75X6 SP 2.5
* TUBES
13 TA ST TUB120807
* TUBES
14 TA ST TUBE DT 16.0 WT 8.0 TH 0.8
* PIPES
15 TA ST PIP273X6.3
* PIPES
16 TA ST PIPE OD 16.0 ID 13.0
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES
FINISH
Note: The design of Class 4 sections requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) build
2007.07 or higher. Otherwise, design is performed for sections that fall into the
category of Class 1,2 or 3 sections only.
134 STAAD.Pro
Note: The design of Class 4 sections requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) build
2007.07 or higher.
3B.6.1 Nomenclature
A = Area.
A = Effective area.
e
A = Area of flange.
f
A = Area of web.
w
F = Yield strength.
y
ye
= Effective yield stress of section in compression to account for elastic local buckling.
W = Web thickness.
= Non-dimensional slenderness parameter in column formula.
= Effective non-dimensional slenderness parameter in column formula considering
ye
effective yield stress.
= Resistance factor
Axial Compression
The compressive resistance of columns is determined based on Clause 13.3 of the code. The
equations presented in this section of the code assume that the compressive resistance is a
function of the compressive strength of the gross section (Gross section Area times the Yield
Strength) as well as the slenderness factor (KL/r ratios). The effective length for the
calculation of compression resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KT,
KY, KZ, LT, LY, and LZ (see Table 3B.1). Some of the aspects of the axial compression capacity
calculations are :
1. For frame members not subjected to any bending, and for truss members, the axial
compression capacity in general column flexural buckling is calculated from Cl.13.3.1
using the slenderness ratios for the local Y-Y and Z-Z axis. The parameters KY, LY, KZ
and LZ are applicable for this.
2. For single angles, which are frame members not subjected to any bending or truss
members, the axial compression capacity in general column flexural buckling and local
buckling of thin legs is calculated using the rules of the AISC - LRFD code, 2nd ed.,
1994. The reason for this is that the Canadian code doesnt provide any clear guidelines
for calculating this value. The parameters KY, LY, KZ, and LZ are applicable for this.
3. The axial compression capacity is also calculated by taking flexural-torsional buckling
into account. The rules of Appendix D, page 1-109 of CAN/CSA-S16-01are used for this
purpose. Parameters KT and LT may be used to provide the effective length factor and
effective length value for flexural-torsional buckling. Flexural-torsional buckling
capacity is computed for single channels, single angles, Tees and Double angles.
4. The variable n in Cl.13.3.1 is assumed as 2.24 for WWF shapes and 1.34 for all other
shapes.
5. While computing the general column flexural buckling capacity of sections with axial
compression + bending, the special provisions of 13.8.1(a), 13.8.1(b) and 13.8.1(c) are
applied. For example, Lambda = 0 for 13.8.1(a), K=1 for 13.8.1(b), etc.)
For Class 4 members subjected to axial compression, factored compressive resistance should
be determined by either of the following equations.
136 STAAD.Pro
a.
Where:
n = 1.34
= (Fy /Fe )
Fe=(2 E)/(KL/r)2
Ae is calculated using reduced element widths meeting the maximum width to
thickness ratio specified in Table 1.
Effective width required for the calculation of effective area Ae, for different section
shapes are as follows.
l
For flanges of I-section, T-section and channel section and legs of angle section
be= 200t/(Fy )
b.
Where:
n = 1.34
ye = (Fye/F_e )
Fe=(2 E)/(KL/r)2
With an effective yield stress, F , determined from the maximum width (or diameter)ye
to-thickness ratio meeting the limit specified in Table 1.
Following are the expressions for effective yield stress for different shaped section.
l
2. For single angles, the bending capacities are calculated for the principal axes. The
specifications of Section 5, page 6-283 of AISC-LRFD 1994, 2nd ed., are used for this
purpose because the Canadian code doesnt provide any clear guidelines for calculating
this value.
3. For calculating the bending capacity about the Z-Z axis of singly symmetric shapes
such as Tees and Double angles, CAN/CSA-S16-01 stipulates in Clause 13.6(d), page 1-31,
that a rational method, such as that given in SSRCs Guide to Stability Design Criteria
of Metal Structures, be used. Instead, STAAD uses the rules of Section 2c, page 6-55 of
AISC-LRFD 1994, 2nd ed.
A h
M r = M r1 0.0005 w
Af w
138 STAAD.Pro
1, 900
Mf/ s
Where Mr = factored moment resistance as determined by Clause 13.5 or 13.6 but not to
exceed My = factored moment resistance for Class 3 sections = My
If axial compressive force is present in addition to the moment, modified moment
resistance should be as follows.
1 0.65C f / (Cy )
A h
M r = M r1 0.0005 w 1, 900
Af w
Mf/s
Cy = A Fy
S = Elastic section modulus of steel section.
iii. For sections whose webs meet the requirements of Class 3 and whose flanges exceed the
limit of Class 3, the moment resistance shall be calculated as
Mr = Se Fy
Where:
S = effective section modulus determined using effective flange width.
e
For I-section, T-section, Channel section, effective flange width and for Angle
section, effective length width
be= 200 t/(Fy )
But shall not exceed 60 t
0.28M y
Mu
When bending moment at any point within the unbraced length is larger than the larger
end moment or when there is no effective lateral support for the compression flange at one of
the ends of unsupported length2 = 1.0
k = Ratio of the smaller factored moment to the larger moment at opposite ends of the
unbraced length, positive for double curvature and negative for single curvature.
Se = effective section modulus determined using effective flange width.
l
For I-section, T-section, Channel section, effective flange width and for Angle section,
effective length width
be= 200t/(Fy )
But shall not exceed 60t.
This clause is applicable only for I shaped and Channel shaped section as there is no guide
line in the code for other sections.
3B.6.5 Shear
The shear resistance of the cross section is determined using the equations of Clause 13.4 of
the code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross section to the
shear resistance of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z axes)
exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the
section is considered to have failed under shear. The code also requires that the slenderness
ratio of the web be within a certain limit (See Cl.13.4.1.3, page 1-29 of CAN/CSA-S16-01).
140 STAAD.Pro
Checks for safety in shear are performed only if this value is within the allowable limit. Users
may by-pass this limitation by specifying a value of 2.0 for the MAIN parameter.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 3B.1-Canadian Steel Design CSA-S16-01 Parameters
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description
1.0
0.0 = design
only for end
moments and
those at locations
specified by
SECTION
command.
CODE
BEAM
1.0 = Perform
design for
moments at
twelfth points
along the beam.
CB
1.0
Parameter Name
CMY
Default Value
Description
1.0
1.0 = Do not
calculate Omega1 for local Y axis.
2.0 = Calculate
Omega-1 for local
Y axis.
Used in Cl.13.8.4
of code
CMZ
1.0
1.0 = Do not
calculate Omega1 for local Z axis.
2.0 = Calculate
Omega-1 for local
Z axis.
Used in Cl.13.8.4
of code
DFF
None(Mandatory for
deflection check)
Deflection
Length/Maxm.
Allowable local
deflection.
DJ1
Joint No.
denoting start
point for
calculation of
deflection
length
DJ2
Joint No.
denoting end
point for
calculation of
deflection
length
DMAX
142 STAAD.Pro
45.0 in.
Maximum
allowable depth
(Applicable for
member
selection)
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description
DMIN
0.0 in.
Minimum
required depth
(Applicable for
member
selection)
FYLD
300.0 MPa
Yield strength of
steel.
FU
345.0 MPa
Ultimate
strength of steel.
KT
1.0
K value for
flexural torsional
buckling.
KY
1.0
K value for
general column
flexural buckling
about the local Yaxis. Used to
calculate
slenderness ratio.
KZ
1.0
K value for
general column
flexural buckling
about the local Zaxis. Used to
calculate
slenderness ratio.
LT
Member Length
Length for
flexural torsional
buckling.
LY
Member Length
Length for
general column
flexural buckling
about the local Yaxis. Used to
calculate
slenderness ratio.
Parameter Name
LZ
MAIN
Default Value
Description
Member Length
Length for
general column
flexural buckling
about the local Zaxis. Used to
calculate
slenderness ratio.
0.0
0.0 = Check
slenderness ratio
against the
limits.
1.0= Suppress the
slenderness ratio
check.
2.0 = Check
slenderness ratio
only for column
buckling, not for
web (See Section
3B.6, Shear)
NSF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
Permissible ratio
of actual load
effect to the
design strength.
TRACK
0.0
144 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description
UNB
Member Length
Unsupported
length in
bending
compression of
the bottom
flange for
calculating
moment
resistance.
UNT
Member Length
Unsupported
length in
bending
compression of
the top flange for
calculating
moment
resistance.
CR2
CAPACITY (C ) PER 13.8.2(b)
r
146 STAAD.Pro
CRZ
SEE 13.8.2(b) for uniaxial bending (called C
RX
in that Clause)
CTORFLX
Capacity in accordance with 13.8.2(c)
Reference
CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, National Standard of Canada, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. The
Canadian Standards Association, 1994 with CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel Construction)
handbook. CISC Example 1 page 5-91.
Problem
Find the interaction ratio, beam resistance and beam deflection.
Given
E = 200000 MPa (STEEL)
F = 300 Mpa CSA G40.21-M
y
Simply supported beam has a 8.0 m span; Ky is 1.0, Kz 1.0, unsupported length 1.0 m
Allowable Live Load deflection, L/300 = 8000/300 = 27 mm
Factored Uniform Load IS 7 kN/m DEAD, 15 kN/m LIVE.
Steel section is W410X54
Comparison
Table 3B.2-CAN/CSA-S16 Verification Problem 1
comparison
Critera
Interaction
Ratio
0.88
0.883
none
Beam
Resistance
(kNm)
284
283.20
none
Beam
Deflection
(mm)
21
20.81
none
STAAD Output
1.
3.
4.
5.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
13.
14.
16.
17.
18.
20.
21.
22.
24.
25.
26.
27.
148 STAAD.Pro
****************************************************
*
*
*
STAAD.Pro
*
*
Version
Bld
*
*
Proprietary Program of
*
*
Research Engineers, Intl.
*
*
Date=
*
*
Time=
*
*
*
*
USER ID:
*
****************************************************
STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 5-91
* CISC EXAMPLE 1 PAGE 5-91, LIMIT STATES DESIGN, CSA-S16.1-94
* SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAM WITH UNIFORM LOAD
* LIVE LOAD DEFLECTION OF L/300
UNIT MMS KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 8000 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2
MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN
1 TABLE ST W410X54
CONSTANTS
E STEEL ALL
POISSON 0.3 ALL
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
2 FIXED BUT MY MZ
UNIT METER KN
LOAD 1 DEAD
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -7
29.
30.
31.
33.
34.
36.
LOAD 2 LIVE
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -15
LOAD COMB 3 1.25DL + 1.5 LL
1 1.25 2 1.5
PERFORM ANALYSIS
P R O B L E M
S T A T I S T I C S
----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS =
2/
1/
2
ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH=
1/
1/
5 DOF
TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES =
2, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM =
5
SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX =
1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS
REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE =
12.0/ 19641.6 MB
37. LOAD LIST 2
38. PRINT SECTION DISPLACEMENTS
MEMBER SECTION DISPLACEMENTS
---------------------------UNIT =INCHES FOR FPS AND CM FOR METRICS/SI SYSTEM
MEMB LOAD
GLOBAL X,Y,Z DISPL FROM START TO END JOINTS AT 1/12TH PTS
1
2
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
-0.5471
0.0000
0.0000
-1.0528
0.0000
0.0000
-1.4824
0.0000
0.0000
-1.8086
0.0000
0.0000
-2.0120
0.0000
0.0000
-2.0812
0.0000
0.0000
-2.0120
0.0000
0.0000
-1.8086
0.0000
0.0000
-1.4824
0.0000
0.0000
-1.0528
0.0000
0.0000
-0.5471
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
MAX LOCAL DISP =
2.08115
AT
400.00 LOAD
2
L/DISP=
384
************ END OF SECT DISPL RESULTS ***********
40. LOAD LIST 3
41. PARAMETER
42. CODE CANADIAN
43. TRACK 2 ALL
44. UNL 1 ALL
45. FYLD 300000 ALL
46. BEAM 1 ALL
47. CHECK CODE ALL
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (CAN/CSA-S16-01)
******************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST
W410X54
(CANADIAN SECTIONS)
PASS
CSA-13.8.2+
0.883
3
0.00 C
0.00
-250.00
4.00
MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM)
----------------------------CROSS SECTION AREA = 6.84E+01
MEMBER LENGTH = 8.00E+02
IZ = 1.86E+04
SZ = 9.26E+02
PZ = 1.05E+03
IY = 1.02E+03
SY = 1.15E+02
PY = 1.77E+02
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA)
-------------------------------FYLD = 300.0
FU = 345.0
SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M)
--------------------------------CR1 = 1.846E+03
CR2 = 2.732E+02
CRZ = 1.570E+03
CTORFLX = 2.732E+02
TENSILE CAPACITY
= 1.805E+03
COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 2.732E+02
FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 4.778E+01
MRZ = 2.832E+02
FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 5.379E+02
VRZ = 4.604E+02
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
-------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000
KL/RY = 207.170
KL/RZ =
48.447
ALLOWABLE KL/R = 300.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 1.000
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-2 = 1.00
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 0.000E+00
Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 5.08E+01
48. STEEL TAKE OFF ALL
STEEL TAKE-OFF
-------------PROFILE
LENGTH(METE)
WEIGHT(KN )
In Steel Takeoff the density of steel is assumed for members with no
density.
ST W410X54
8.00
4.203
PRISMATIC STEEL
0.00
0.000
---------------TOTAL =
4.203
************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************
49. FINISH
Reference
CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, National Standard of Canada, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. The
Canadian Standards Association, 1994 with CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel Construction)
handbook. CISC Handbook Example, Page 4_106.
Problem
Find the interaction ratio, beam and column resistance.
Given
E = 200000 MPa (STEEL).
F = 300 MPa CSA G40.21-M
y
150 STAAD.Pro
Comparison
Table 3B.3-CAN/CSA-S16 Verification Problem2
comparison
Critera
Interaction
Ratio
0.96
0.98
2%
Beam
Resistance
(kNm)
583
584
none
Column
Resistance
(kN)
3,800
3,820
none
STAAD Output
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
****************************************************
*
*
*
STAAD.Pro
*
*
Version
Bld
*
*
Proprietary Program of
*
*
Research Engineers, Intl.
*
*
Date=
*
*
Time=
*
*
*
*
USER ID:
*
****************************************************
STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 4-106
*
* COMPRESSION + MAJOR AXIS BENDING
*
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 3.7 0
*
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2
*
MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN
1 TABLE ST W310X129
*
CONSTANTS
E STEEL ALL
POISSON STEEL ALL
*
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED BUT MX MZ
2 FIXED BUT FY MY MZ
*
LOAD 1 FACTORED LOAD
JOINT LOAD
2 FY -2000
2 MZ 200
1 MZ 300
*
PDELTA 3 ANALYSIS
P R O B L E M
S T A T I S T I C S
----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS =
2/
1/
2
ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH=
1/
1/
5 DOF
TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES =
1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM =
5
SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX =
1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS
REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE =
12.0/ 19641.2 MB
++ Adjusting Displacements
8:54:35
++ Adjusting Displacements
8:54:35
++ Adjusting Displacements
8:54:35
31. PRINT MEMBER FORCES
MEMBER END FORCES
STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE
----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KN
METE
MEMBER LOAD JT
AXIAL
SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z
TORSION
MOM-Y
MOM-Z
1
1
1
2000.00
135.14
0.00
0.00
0.00
300.00
2 -2000.00
-135.14
0.00
0.00
0.00
200.00
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT **************
33. PARAMETER
34. CODE CANADIAN
35. TRACK 2 ALL
36. FYLD 300000 ALL
37. LY 3.7 ALL
38. LZ 3.7 ALL
39. CHECK CODE ALL
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (CAN/CSA-S16-01)
******************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST
W310X129
(CANADIAN SECTIONS)
PASS
CSA-13.8.2C
0.980
1
2000.00 C
0.00
300.00
0.00
MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM)
----------------------------CROSS SECTION AREA = 1.65E+02
MEMBER LENGTH = 3.70E+02
IZ = 3.08E+04
SZ = 1.94E+03
PZ = 2.16E+03
IY = 1.00E+04
SY = 6.51E+02
PY = 9.90E+02
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA)
-------------------------------FYLD = 300.0
FU = 345.0
SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M)
152 STAAD.Pro
--------------------------------CR1 = 4.459E+03
CR2 = 3.820E+03
CRZ = 4.296E+03
CTORFLX = 3.820E+03
TENSILE CAPACITY
= 4.359E+03
COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 3.820E+03
FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 2.672E+02
MRZ = 5.840E+02
FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 7.419E+02
VRZ = 1.505E+03
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
-------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000
KL/RY =
47.477
KL/RZ =
27.094
ALLOWABLE KL/R = 200.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 3.700
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-2 = 1.00
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 1.351E+02
Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 2.12E+01
40. STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF ALL
STEEL TAKE-OFF
-------------PROFILE
LENGTH(METE)
WEIGHT(KN )
In Steel Takeoff the density of steel is assumed for members with no
density.
ST W310X129
3.70
4.694
PRISMATIC STEEL
0.00
0.000
---------------TOTAL =
4.694
MEMBER
PROFILE
LENGTH
WEIGHT
(METE)
(KN )
1
ST W310X129
3.70
4.694
************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************
42. FINISH
Reference
CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, National Standard of Canada, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. The
Canadian Standards Association, 1994 with CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel Construction)
handbook. CISC Handbook Example, Page 4-108.
Problem
Find the interaction ratio, beam and column resistance.
Given
E = 200000 MPa (STEEL).
F = 300 MPa CSA G40.21-M
y
Comparison
Table 3B.4-CAN/CSA-S16 Verification Problem 3
comparison
Criteria
Interaction
Ratio
0.998
1.00
none
Beam
Resistance,
Weak axis
(kNm)
300
299
none
Beam
Resistance,
Strong axis
(kNm)
630
650
3.2%
Column
Resistance
(kN)
4,200
4,222
none
STAAD Output
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
154 STAAD.Pro
****************************************************
*
*
*
STAAD.Pro
*
*
Version
Bld
*
*
Proprietary Program of
*
*
Research Engineers, Intl.
*
*
Date=
*
*
Time=
*
*
*
*
USER ID:
*
****************************************************
STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 4-108
*
* ( COMPRESSION + BIAXIAL BENDING )
*
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 3.7 0
*
MEMBER INCIDENCES
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
1 1 2
*
MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN
1 TABLE ST W310X143
*
CONSTANTS
E STEEL ALL
POISSON STEEL ALL
*
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED BUT MX MZ
2 FIXED BUT FY MX MY MZ
*
LOAD 1 FACTORED LOAD
JOINT LOAD
2 FY -2000
2 MZ 200
2 MX 100
1 MZ 300
1 MX 100
*
PERFORM ANALYSIS
P R O B L E M
S T A T I S T I C S
----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS =
2/
1/
2
ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH=
1/
1/
6 DOF
TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES =
1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM =
6
SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX =
1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS
REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE =
12.0/ 19641.2 MB
33. PARAMETER
34. CODE CANADIAN
35. CMY 2 ALL
36. CMZ 2 ALL
37. CB 1 ALL
38. TRACK 2 ALL
39. FYLD 300000 ALL
40. CHECK CODE ALL
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (CAN/CSA-S16-01)
******************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
*
1 ST
W310X143
(CANADIAN SECTIONS)
FAIL
CSA-13.8.2A
1.000
1
2000.00 C
-100.00
300.00
0.00
MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM)
----------------------------CROSS SECTION AREA = 1.82E+02
MEMBER LENGTH = 3.70E+02
IZ = 3.47E+04
SZ = 2.15E+03
PZ = 2.41E+03
IY = 1.12E+04
SY = 7.28E+02
PY = 1.11E+03
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA)
-------------------------------FYLD = 300.0
FU = 345.0
Reference
CISC Example 1, page 5-91, Limit State Design, CSA-S16.1-94
Problem
A cantilever beam of length 4 meter is subjected to uniformly distributed load of 3 KN/Meter
in both major and minor axis. Axial compression of 8 KN is also applied to the member. User
defined steel section Sect_Class-4 from is assigned to the member.
Given
Design forces
8.0 KN (Compression)
6.0 KNm (Bending-Y)
156 STAAD.Pro
Solution
Slenderness Ratio
Effective Length factor along Local Y-Axis = KY = 1
Effective Length factor along Local Z-Axis = KZ = 1
Slenderness ratio about Z axis, L/Rz = 31.9
Slenderness ratio about Y axis, L/Ry = 57.22
Maximum Slenderness Ratio, L/Rmax = 57.22
Section Classification
Bf/Tf = 150*0.5/6 = 12.5 > 200/sqrt(Fy) = 11.54
Flange is Class 4.
d/Tw = (150-2.0*6)/7 = 19.714
(1100/sqrt(Fy))*(1-0.39*Cf/ *Cy)=(1100/sqrt(300))*(1-0.39*8000/(0.9*2766*300)) =
63.24
Web is Class 1.
Overall section is Class 4 section.
Check against axial compression (Clause 13.3.3)
Effective width, Beff = 200*Tf/sqrt(300) = 69.24
Effective area, Aeff = 69.24*6*4+(150-2*6)*7 = 2627.76 mm 4.
Effective yield stress, FYLDeff =40000/(0.5*Bf/Tf)4 =256 MPa.
As per Clause 13.3.3(a),
Elastic critical buckling, Fe = 4*E/ L_Rmax4 = 617.956 MPa.
Non-dimensional slenderness ratio, = sqrt(FYLD/Fe) =0.697
Axial compressive resistance, Cr = *Aeff*FYLD*(1+0.697^(2*1.34))^(-1/1.34) = 557886.104 N.
As per Clause 13.3.3(b),
Elastic critical buckling, Fe = 4*E/ L_Rmax4 = 617.956 MPa.
Effective non-dimensional slenderness ratio, eff = sqrt(FYLDeff/Fe) = 0.644
Axial compressive resistance, Cr = *Area*FYLDeff*(1+0.644^(2*1.34))^(-1/1.34) = 521726.94 N.
Axial compressive resistance Min(557886.104, 521726.94) = 521726.94 N.
Check against bending (Clause 13.5(c))
As the web of the section meets the requirement of Class 3 and flange exceeds Class 3 limit,
flexural resistance should be calculated as per clause 13.5(c).iii.
Effective moment of inertia about Z axis,
Izeff =2*(2*69.24*63)/12 + 2*(2*69.24*6)*(150-6)*(150-6)/4 + (7*(150-2*6)3)/12
=10152591.12 mm 4.
Effective section modulus about Z axis,
Szeff = 10152591.12*2/150 = 135367.88 mm 3.
Effective moment of inertia about Y axis,
Iyeff =(2*6*(2*69.24)3)/12 +(0.5*(150-6)*73)/12 =2657648.856 mm 4.
Effective section modulus about Y axis,
Syeff = 2657648.856/69.24 = 38383.144 mm 3.
Major axis bending resistance if member is laterally supported,
158 STAAD.Pro
Comparison
Table 3B.5-CAN/CSA-S16 Verification Problem 4 comparison
Criteria
Hand
Calculation
STAAD.Pro Result
Comments
Axial
compressive
resistance
521.73 KN
5.219X102 KN
none
Major axis
bending
resistance
36.549 KNm
36.57 KN-m
none
Minor axis
bending
resistance
10.363 KNm
10.38 KN-m
none
STAAD Output
****************************************************
*
*
*
STAAD.Pro V8i SELECTseries2
*
*
Version 20.07.07.XX
*
*
Proprietary Program of
*
*
Bentley Systems, Inc.
*
*
Date=
AUG 17, 2010
*
*
Time=
17: 6:23
*
*
*
*
USER ID: Bentley
*
****************************************************
160 STAAD.Pro
P R O B L E M
S T A T I S T I C S
----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS =
2/
1/
-- PAGE NO.
(LOCAL )
LOAD
JT
AXIAL
SHEAR-Y
SHEAR-Z
TORSION
MOM-Y
MOM-Z
1
2
8.00
-8.00
6.00
0.00
6.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
-6.00
0.00
6.00
0.00
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
PARAMETER 1
CODE CANADIAN
CB 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
MET
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST
SECT_CLASS-4
(UPT)
CSA-13.8.3B
-6.00
PASS
8.00 C
0.760
6.00
1
0.00
MEMBER LENGTH =
PZ = 1.63E+02
PY = 6.92E+01
2.00E+02
1.35E+02
3.85E+01
MPA
5.582E+02
CRZ =
6.705E+02
CRZ =
6.084E+02
FU = 345.0
E =
2.05E+05
G =
7.88E+04
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
--------------------------
162 STAAD.Pro
************************************************************
*
For questions on STAAD.Pro, please contact
*
*
Bentley Systems Offices at the following locations
*
*
*
*
Telephone
Web / Email
*
*
*
* USA:
+1 (714)974-2500
*
* UK
+44(1454)207-000
*
* SINGAPORE +65 6225-6158
*
* EUROPE
+31 23 5560560
*
* INDIA
+91(033)4006-2021
*
* JAPAN
+81(03)5952-6500
http://www.ctc-g.co.jp
*
* CHINA
+86 10 5929 7000
*
* THAILAND +66(0)2645-1018/19 partha.p@reisoftwareth.com *
*
*
* Worldwide
http://selectservices.bentley.com/en-US/
*
*
*
************************************************************
164 STAAD.Pro
Z with Lips
Z without Lips
Hat
Shape selection may be done using the member property pages of the graphical user interface
(GUI) or by specifying the section designation symbol in the input file.
The properties listed in the tables are gross section properties. STAAD.Pro uses unreduced
section properties in the structure analysis stage. Both unreduced and effective section
properties are used in the design stage, as applicable.
3C. Canadian Codes - Design Per Canadian Cold Formed Steel Code S136-94
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
The program will check member strength in accordance with Clause 6 of the Standard as
follows:
l
Resistance factors listed in Clauses 6.2 (a), (b), and (e) are used, as applicable.
6.4.1 General,
6.4.2 and 6.4.2.1 Laterally Supported Members, compressive limit stress based on
Initiation of Yielding,
166 STAAD.Pro
Members in compression
Resistance calculations are based on Clauses:
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 3C.1-Canadian Cold Formed Steel Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default Value
Description
3C. Canadian Codes - Design Per Canadian Cold Formed Steel Code S136-94
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
BEAM
1.0
CMZ
1.0
CMY
0.0
CWY
168 STAAD.Pro
DMAX
1000.0
DMIN
0.0
Parameter
Name
FLX
Default Value
Description
FU
450 MPa
FYLD
350 MPa
KT
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
3C. Canadian Codes - Design Per Canadian Cold Formed Steel Code S136-94
Parameter
Name
170 STAAD.Pro
Default Value
Description
LT
Member
length
LY
Member
length
LZ
Member
length
NSF
1.0
STIFF
Member
length
Parameter
Name
TRACK
Default Value
Description
TSA
172 STAAD.Pro
Following are the description of the different types of species combination available:
3D.4.2 Hem-Fir
Designation of Hem-Fir species combination in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST HEM-FIR_SELSTR_2X10_BM
3D.4.4 Spruce-Pine-Fir
Designation of Spruce-Pine-Fir species combination in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST SPF_SELSTR_3X8_BM
174 STAAD.Pro
ALPHA 1.2E-011
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY TIMBER CANADIAN
1 PRIS YD 12 ZD 6
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL GLT_D.FIR-L-24F-EX MEMB 1
3D.4.6 Example
Sample input file to demonstrate usage of Canadian timber
STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR DIMENSIONAL LUMBER
UNIT FEET POUND
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 6 0 0; 3 12 0 0; 4 18 0 0;
5 24 0 0; 6 6 3 0; 7 12 6 0; 8 18 3 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2; 2 2 3; 3 3 4; 4 4 5; 5 1 6; 6 6 7; 7 7 8; 8 8 5;
9 2 6; 10 3 7; 11 4 8; 12 6 3; 13 3 8;
UNIT FEET POUND
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC SPF_SELSTR_4X10_BM
E 1224
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 25
ALPHA 5.5E-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY TIM CAN
1 TO 4 9 TO 11 TABLE ST SPF_SELSTR_4X10_BM
5 TO 8 12 13 TABLE ST SPF_SELSTR_4X10_BM
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL SPF_SELSTR_4X10_BM MEMB 1 TO 4 9 TO 11
MATERIAL SPF_SELSTR_4X10_BM MEMB 5 TO 8 12 13
176 STAAD.Pro
K_ZC
size factor applicable to compression parallel to grain (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 CSA086-01)
CHIX
Curvature factor (Clause 6.5.6.5.2-CSA086-01)
CV
shear load coefficient (Table 6.5.7.4A- CSA086-01)
KN
Notch factor(Clause 5.5.5.4-CSA086-01)
All of these factors must be specified as input according to the classification of timber and
stress grade.
Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating the member resistances.
3D.5.3 Bending
The bending resistance of Sawn members are determined based on Clause 5.5.4 of CSA086-01
and for glulam members are determined based on Clause 6.5.6.5 of CSA086-01. The allowable
3D.5.6 Shear
The shear resistance of the cross section is determined using the equations of Clause 5.5.5 and
6.5.7.2 of the code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross
section to the shear resistance of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y
& Z axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table
3B.1), the section is considered to have failed under shear.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
178 STAAD.Pro
Default Value
Description
CHIX
1.0
CV
1.0
KD
1.0
KH
1.0
KN
1.0
KSB
1.0
KSC
1.0
KSE
1.0
KST
1.0
KSV
1.0
KX
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
KZB
1.0
KZCP
1.0
KZT
1.0
KZV
1.0
K_SCP
1.0
K_T
1.0
K_ZC
1.0
LX
Member
length
LY
Member
length
LZ
Member
length
NSF
180 STAAD.Pro
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
RATIO
1.0
Description
182 STAAD.Pro
Reference
Example 4, page 116, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001
Given
Length = 9000 mm
Comparison
Table 3D.2-CAN/CSA-086-01 Verification Problem 1
Criteria
Design
Strength (kN)
295
293.793
none
MY
RATIO/
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1
175.00X228.00 CANADIAN GLULAM GRADE:GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-12C-E
PASS
CL.5.5.10/6.5
0.728
1
214.00 C
0.00
0.00
0.0000
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ =
4500.000 LEY =
4500.000 LUZ =
9000.000 LUY =
9000.000mm
|
|
|
| KD = 1.000
KH
= 1.000
KT
= 1.000
KSB = 1.000
KSV
= 1.000 |
| KSC = 1.000
K_SCP = 1.000
KSE = 1.000
KST = 1.000
KZB
= 1.000 |
| KZV = 1.000
KZT
= 1.000
KZCP = 1.000
K_ZC = 1.000
CHIX = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000
KN
= 1.000
|
|
|
| ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m)
|
Pu
214.000
Tu
0.000
Muy =
0.000
Muz =
0.000
0.000
SLENDERNESS_Y =
19.737
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
SLENDERNESS_Z =
25.714
|
| ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m)
|
|
PY =
413.943
|
|
PZ =
293.793
|
|
T
=
0.000
|
|
MY =
0.000
|
|
MZ =
0.000
|
|
V
=
0.000
|
|
SLENDERNESS =
50.000
|
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Reference
Example 2, page 59, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001
Given
Length = 7,500 mm, Beam Spacing = 5,000 mm, Standard load condition, Dry service
condition, Untreated
184 STAAD.Pro
Comparison
Table 3D.3-CAN/CSA-086-01 Verification Problem 2
Criteria
Design
Strength in
Bending
(kNm)
208
208.323
none
Design
Strength in
Shear (kN)
101
100.776
none
Reference
Example 3, page 158, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001
Given
Dry service condition, Untreated
Comparison
Table 3D.4-CAN/CSA-086-01 Verification Problem 3
Criteria
Design
Strength in
Tension (kN)
257
256.636
none
186 STAAD.Pro
|
PY =
0.000
|
|
PZ =
0.000
|
|
T
=
256.636
|
|
MY =
0.000
|
|
MZ =
0.000
|
|
V
=
0.000
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Reference
Example 2, page 113, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001
Given
Unbraced Length = 5,000 mm
Comparison
Table 3D.5-CAN/CSA-086-01 Verification Problem 4
Criteria
Design
Strength (kN)
130
129.223
none
|
Pu =
114.000
|
Tu =
0.000
|
Muy =
0.000
|
Muz =
0.000
|
V
=
0.000
|
SLENDERNESS_Y =
26.178
|
SLENDERNESS_Z =
26.178
| ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m)
|
PY =
129.223
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
PZ
129.223
|
|
T
=
0.000
|
|
MY =
0.000
|
|
MZ =
0.000
|
|
V
=
0.000
|
|
SLENDERNESS =
50.000
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Reference
Example 1, page 58, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001
Given
Length =6000mm, Beam Spacing = 3000mm, Standard load condition, Dry service condition,
Untreated
Comparison
Table 3D.6-CAN/CSA-086-01 Verification Problem 5
Criteria
188 STAAD.Pro
Design
Strength in
Bending
(kNm)
79.8
79.732
none
Design
Strength in
Shear (kN)
46.1
46.170
none
Reference
Example 2, page 158, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001
Given
Dry service condition, Untreated
Comparison
Table 3D.7-CAN/CSA-086-01 Verification Problem 6
Criteria
Design
Strength in
Tension (kN)
185
184.338
none
190 STAAD.Pro
Section 4
Cypriot Codes
192 STAAD.Pro
194 STAAD.Pro
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 4B.1-Cypriot Concrete Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default
Value
-
Description
BRACE
0.0
CLEAR
20 mm
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
ELZ
1.0
FC
4.0 ksi
FYMAIN
60 ksi
FYSEC
60 ksi
MAX
MAIN
50 mm
MINMAIN
8 mm
MINSEC
8 mm
MMAG
1.0
NSE
CTION
12
SERV
0.0
Serviceability checks:
0. No serviceability check performed.
1. Perform serviceability check for beams
as if they were continuous.
2. Perform serviceability check for beams
as if they were simply supported.
3. Perform serviceability check for beams
as if they were cantilever beams.
SFACE
196 STAAD.Pro
0.0
Parameter
Name
SRA
Default
Value
0.0
Description
TRACK
0.0
WIDTH
ZD
198 STAAD.Pro
Section 5
Danish Codes
200 STAAD.Pro
202 STAAD.Pro
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 5B.1-Danish Steel Design DS412 Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default
Value
-
Description
BEAM
1.0
BY
1.0
BZ
1.0
CB
1.0
CMY
1.0
CMZ
0.21
CY
CZ
DMAX
1,000
mm
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
DMIN
0.0 mm
FYLD
235
N/mm 2
MF
1.15
RATIO
1.0
SSY
SSZ
TRACK
0.0
UNL
204 STAAD.Pro
Member
Length
Section 6
Dutch Codes
206 STAAD.Pro
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number till it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 6A.1-Dutch Steel Design NEN 6770 Parameters
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
Must be specified as DUTCH
CODE
BEAM
3.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
Loading type per Tables F.1.1 and F.1.2
1. Pin ended member with uniform
loading
2. Fix ended member with uniform
loading
CMM
1.0
CMN
1.0
DFF
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint
of member
DMAX
10,000 cm
DMIN
0.0 cm
KY
208 STAAD.Pro
None
(Mandatory "Deflection Length" / Maximum allowable
for
local deflection
deflection
See Note 1d in Section 2B.6.
check,
TRACK 4.0)
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
K factor value in local z - axis. Usually, this is
the major axis.
KZ
1.0
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
NSF
PY
RATIO
1.0
Set
according
to steel
grade (SGR)
1.0
SAME
0.0
SBLT
0.0
0. Rolled Section
1. Built up Section
Steel Grade
SGR
0.0
0. Grade Fe 360
1. Grade Fe 430
2. Grade Fe 510
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
Used to control the level output detail:
0. Output summary of results.
TRACK
0.0
UNL
210 STAAD.Pro
Member
Length
Section 7
European Codes
212 STAAD.Pro
7A.5 Columns
Columns are designed for axial compressive loads and possible moments at the ends of the
member. If a particular load case causes tension in the column being designed that load case
is ignored, the design proceeds with a warning message given to that affect.
All active load cases will be considered in the design and reinforcements are assumed
symmetrically arranged in the cross section.
The maximum reinforcement calculated after all design load cases have been considered is
then reported as the critical required area of reinforcement.
Slender columns are also covered in the design process, the program will make due allowance
for the additional moment that has to be considered in the design.
Note: Sway type structures are not directly covered in the current implementation of
EC2. This effect, however, can be accounted for by the P-DELTA analysis option.
7A.6 Beams
Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these actions active load cases are
scanned to create appropriate envelopes for the design process. Maximum torsional moment is
also identified and incorporated in the design.
214 STAAD.Pro
7A.7 Slabs
Slabs can only be designed for if finite elements are used to represent them in the model of
the structure. In the main the design follows the same procedure as for flexure except that
shear forces are assumed to be resisted without the provision of shear reinforcements. In cases
where this may not be the case users must ensure that necessary checks are carried out. The
output for the slab design refers to longitudinal reinforcements, which coincides with the
local x direction of the element, and, transverse reinforcement, which coincides with the local
y direction of the element.
Also, reference is made to 'TOP' and BOTT' reinforcement which relates to the element's
'TOP' and 'BOTTOM' as determined from the connectivity of the element. This may not
coincide with the slab's actual top and bottom and, if desired, you must ensure this through
the numbering scheme of the elements. The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of
16mm in both directions with the longitudinal bar being the layer closest to the slab exterior
faces. Refer to Figure 1.21 in Section 1.61. of the Technical Reference Manual for additional
information.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 7A.1-Concrete Design EC2 Parameters
Parameter
Name
BRACE
Default Value
0.0
Description
CLEAR
* 20mm
Clearance of reinforcement
measured from concrete surface to
closest bar perimeter.
DEPTH
*YD
EFACE
*0.0
1.0
ELZ
1.0
FC
* 30N/mm 2
FYMAIN
216 STAAD.Pro
*460 N/mm 2
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
*460N/mm 2
MINMAIN
8mm
MINSEC
8mm
MAXMAIN
50mm
FYSEC
MMAG
1.0
NSECTION
10
SERV
0.0
SFACE
*0.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
0.0
0.0 = Orthogonal
reinforcement layout without
considering torsional moment Mxy
-slabs only
SRA
0.0
WIDTH
218 STAAD.Pro
*ZD
Note: The DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code has now been officially superseded by EN 1993-11:2005. Hence releases of STAAD.Pro subsequent to version SS3 (20.07.08.xx) will not
support this design code. The SS3 build will perform member design to this code
for legacy files but has this code removed from the design codes list in the GUI.
Users are advised to use the EN 1993-1-1:2005 version for Eurocode 3 design.
Hint: Design per EC3 DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 is also available in the Steel Design mode in
the Graphical User Interface.
Note: National Annex documents are available for EC3 BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. See
"European Codes - Steel Design to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005]" on page 235
220 STAAD.Pro
material partial safety factor m. The magnitude of min STAAD is 1.1 which is applicable to
all section types. A separate safety factor parameter named GB1 is used to check the resistance
of a member to buckling and also has a default value of 1.1.
Material coefficients for steel in STAAD take the following default values unless replaced by
users numerical values provided in the input file.
Modulus of Elasticity, E = 205000 N/mm2
Shear Modulus, G = E/2(1+ )
Poissons Ratio, = 0.3
Unit weight, = 76.8 KN/m3
The magnitude of design loads is dependent on , the partial safety factor for the action
f
under consideration. In STAAD the user is allowed total control in providing applicable values
for the factors and their use in various load combinations.
There are four classes of cross-sections defined in EC3. Class 1 and 2 sections can both attain
full capacity with the exception that the class 2 sections cannot sustain sufficient rotation
required for plastic analysis of the model. Hence the full plastic section modulus is used in
the design calculations. Class 3 sections, due to local buckling, cannot develop plastic
moment capacity and the yield stress is limited to the extreme compression fibre of the
section. The elastic section modulus is used to determine the moment capacity for class 3
sections. Class 4 sections do suffer from local buckling and explicit allowance must be made
for the reduction in section properties before the moment capacity can be determined.
Further, because of interaction between shear force and bending moment, the moment
resistance of the cross-section may be reduced. This, however, does not occur unless the value
of applied shear forces exceeds 50% of the plastic shear capacity of the section. In such cases
the web is assumed to resist the applied shear force as well as contributing towards the
moment resistance of the cross-section.
As mentioned in the previous section, the design of class 4 sections is limited to WIDE
FLANGE, TEE, SINGLE CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE, and RECTANGULAR HOLLOW
SECTIONS. The effective section properties are worked out as described in Cl. 5.3.5 of the
code.
Beams are also checked for lateral-torsional buckling according to section 5.5.2 of the code.
The buckling capacity is dependent on the section type as well as the unrestrained length,
restraint conditions and type of applied loading. The lateral torsional buckling checks
involves the calculation of the Elastic critical moment, Mcr, which is calculated in STAAD as
per the method given in Annex F of the code.
In the presence of a shear force, beams are also checked for shear as per section 5.4.6 of the
code. In cases where the members are subject to combined bending and shear, the combined
bending and shear checks are done in STAAD as per clause 5.4.7 of the code.
222 STAAD.Pro
by a number of factors including the section type and the unbraced length of the member.
The buckling capacity is calculated as per Cl. 5.5 of the code.
DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 does not specifically deal with single angle, double angles, double
channels or Tee sections and does give a method to work out the slenderness of such
members. In these cases, the EC3 DD design module of STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified
in BS 5950-1:2000 to calculate the slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 and table 25 of BS
5950-1:2000 are used in the current version of the EC3 DD design module
RAangle
necessary checks as per Cl. 5.4.8 of the code. Class 1 and class 2 sections are checked as per cl.
5.4.8.1 and Class 3 and Class 4 sections are checked as per clauses 5.4.8.2 and 5.4.8.3
respectively. The effective section properties for class 4 sections are worked out as given in Cl.
5.3.5 of the code.
Generally, EC3 requires checking cross-section resistance for local capacity and also checking
the overall buckling capacity of the member. In the case of members subject to axial tension
and bending, there is provision to take the stabilizing effect of the tension load into
consideration. This is achieved by modifying the extreme compression fibre stress and
calculating an effective applied moment for the section. The checks are done as per Cl. 5.5.3 of
the code. In case of a combined axial compressive load and bending moment, the member
will be checked as per the rules in section 5.5.4 of the code.
The presence of large shear force can also reduce the bending resistance of the section under
consideration. If the shear load is large enough to cause a reduction in bending resistance,
then the reduction due to shear has to be taken into account before calculating the effect of
the axial load on the bending resistance of the section. If the member is subject to a
combined shear, axial load and bending moment then the section capacity checks will be
done as per Cl. 5.4.9 of the code.
As stated in the previous section, DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 does not specifically deal with single
angle, double angles, double channels or Tee sections and does give a method to work out
the slenderness of such members. In these cases, the EC3 DD design module of STAAD.Pro
uses the methods specified in BS 5950-1:2000 to calculate the slenderness of these members.
Cl. 4.7.10 of BS 5950-1:2000 is used in the current version of the EC3 DD design module.
Please refer to the note in section 5B.5.2 for St and RA angle specifications.
Please note that laced or battened compression members are not dealt within the current
version of EC3 DD design module in STAAD.Pro.
224 STAAD.Pro
Default Value
Description
Name
CODE
Undefined
BEAM
CAN
CMM
1.0
Parameter
Default Value
Description
1.0
Name
CMN
1.0 = No fixity
0.5 = Full fixity
0.7 = One end free and
other end fixed
DMAX
100.0 cm
DMIN
DFF
None (Mandatory
Deflection limit
for deflection
check)
DJ1
Start Joint of
member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
FU
GB1
1.1
GM0
1.1
Corresponds to the
m0
factor in DD
ENV 1993-1-1:1992
GM1
1.1
Corresponds to the
m1
factor in DD
ENV 1993-1-1:1992
GM2
1.1
Corresponds to the
m2
ENV 1993-1-1:1992
226 STAAD.Pro
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
factor in DD
Parameter
Default Value
Description
Name
LEG
0.0
Connection type
Refer to Note 1 below.
LVV
Maximum of Lyy
principle axis
term used by
BS5950)
LY
Member Length
LZ
Member Length
PLG
PY
Yield Strength
NSF
1.0
RATIO
SBLT
0.0
Parameter
Default Value
Description
Name
SGR
0.0
TRACK
UNF
1.0
UNL
Member Length
ZIV
0.8
7B.6.1 Notes
1. LEG (Ref: Table 25 BS5950)
The slenderness of single and double angle, channel and tee sections are specified in
BS 5950 table 25 depending on the connection provided at the end of the member
(Refer to section 5B.5(A).2). To define the appropriate connection, a LEG parameter
should be assigned to the member.
The following table indicates the value of the LEG parameter required to match the
BS5950 connection definition:
228 STAAD.Pro
4.7.10.2
Leg
LEG
Parameter
short
leg
1.0
long
leg
3.0
short
leg
0.0
long
leg
2.0
short
leg
3.0
long
leg
7.0
short
leg
2.0
long
leg
6.0
long
leg
1.0
short
leg
5.0
long
leg
0.0
short
leg
4.0
1.0
0.0
1.0
0.0
Bold
Configuration
(a) - 2 bolts
Single
Angle
(b) - 1 bolts
4.7.10.3
Double
Angles
(a) - 2 bolts
(b) - 1 bolts
(c) - 2 bolts
(d) - 1 bolts
4.7.10.4
Channels
4.7.10.5 Tee
Sections
For single angles, the slenderness is calculated for the geometric axes, a-a and b-b as
well as the weak v-v axis. The effective lengths of the geometric axes are defined as:
La = KY * KY
Lb = KZ * LZ
The slenderness calculated for the v-v axis is then used to calculate the compression
strength pc for the weaker principal axis (z-z for ST angles or y-y for RA specified
angles). The maximum slenderness of the a-a and b-b axes is used to calculate the
compression strength pc for the stronger principal axis.
Alternatively for single angles where the connection is not known or Table 25 is not
appropriate, by setting the LEG parameter to 10, slenderness is calculated for the two
principal axes y-y and z-z only. The LVV parameter is not used.
For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply with note 5 in table 25. In
addition, if using double angles from user tables, (Refer to Section 1.7.3 of the
Technical Reference Manual) an eleventh value, rvv, should be supplied at the end of
the ten existing values corresponding to the radius of gyration of the single angle
making up the pair.
2. BEAM
Ensure that this parameter is set to either 1 or 2 while performing code checking for
members susceptible to Lateral - Torsional Buckling.
Table 7B.3-Values for the CMM Parameter
CMM
Value
1
230 STAAD.Pro
CMM
Value
Note: While both sets of code checks will be reported in the output file, only the
last code check results are reported in the GUI.
7B.7 CodeChecking
The purpose of code checking is to ascertain whether the provided section properties of the
members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992. Code checking is
done using the forces and moments at specific sections of the members.
When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the members
have passed or failed the checks; the critical condition ; the value of the ratio of the critical
condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value); the
governing load case, and the location (distance from the start of the member of forces in the
member where the critical condition occurs).
Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2B.4 or any of the
user defined sections as described in Section 1.7.3 of the Technical Reference Manual, with
two exceptions; GENERAL and ISECTION. The EC3 DD design module does not consider these
sections or PRISMATIC sections in its design process.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
7B.8 MemberSelection
STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once an analysis
has been performed, the program can select the most economical section, i.e., the lightest
section, which fulfills the code requirements for the specified member. The section selected
will be of the same type section as originally designated for the member being designed.
Member selection can also be constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN, which limits
the maximum and minimum depth of the members.
Member selection can be performed with all the types of steel sections with the same
limitations as defined in section 5B.7(A) Code Checking.
Selection of members, whose properties are originally input from a user created table, will be
limited to sections in the user table.
Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section properties are input as
prismatic or as the limitations specified in section 5.B.7(A).
7B.9 TabulatedResultsofSteelDesign
For code checking or member selection, the program produces the results in a tabulated
fashion. The items in the output table are explained as follows:
MEMBER
refers to the member number for which the design is performed.
TABLE
refers to steel section name, which has been checked against the steel code or has
been selected.
RESULTS
prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILED. If the RESULT is FAIL, there
will be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member.
CRITICAL COND
refers to the clause in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code which governs the design.
232 STAAD.Pro
RATIO
prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition.
Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed.
LOADING
provides the load case number, which governed the design.
FX, MY, and MZ
provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis and the moment in local z-axis
respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments
(except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY and MZ are printed since they are
the ones which are of interest, in most cases.
LOCATION
specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where
design forces govern.
Note: For a TRACK 2 output, the module will also report all the relevant clause checks
that have been performed and will also indicate the critical ratio and the load case
that caused the critical ratio as well as the corresponding forces that were used for
the respective checks. A TRACK 2 output will also include the various design data
used for the calculations such as the section modulii, section class, section capacity
etc.
234 STAAD.Pro
The current version of EC3 (EN 1993)implemented in STAAD adheres to the factors and rules
provided in EN 1993-1-1:2005. The current version of STAAD.Pro includes the following
National Annexes viz.
a. British National Annex [NA to BS EN 1993-1-1:2005]
b. The Dutch National Annex [NEN-EN 1993-1-1/NB] and
c. Norwegian National Annex [NS-EN 1993-1-1:2005/NA2008]
d. French National Annex [Annexe Nationale a la NF EN 1993-1-1:2005]
e. Finnish National Annex [SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005]
f. Polish National Annex [PN EN 1993-1-1:2005]
g. Singaporean National Annex [SS EN 1993-1-1:2005]
h. Belgian National Annex [NBN EN 1993-1-1:2005]
The choice of a particular National Annex is based on the value of a new NA parameter that is
set by the user when specifying the EN 1993 version of Eurocode 3. See "European Codes National Annexes to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005]" on page 281 for a description of the NA
parameter.
See "Example of a TRACK 2 output" on page 278 for an example of how this appears when Y is
up (default).
7C.2 AnalysisMethodology
236 STAAD.Pro
Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done
for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed
complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors to
create necessary loading situations.
wide flange
tee
single channel
single angle
Also built-up user sections that are class 4 sections are not dealt with in the current version of
EC3 design in STAAD.Pro, unless they are defined as any of the section types given above.
The design of laced and battened members is not considered in the current version of EC3
(EN 1993) design module in STAAD.Pro. The current version also does not support the design
of tapered section profiles or I-Sections with top and/or bottom plates.
failure by overstressing
The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach. Members are
proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the characteristic stresses or
capacities. Member selection is done on the basis of selecting the most economic section on
the basis of the least weight criteria. It is generally assumed that you (the engineer) will take
care of the detailing requirements, such as the provision of stiffeners, and check the local
effects like flange buckling, web crippling, etc.
Note: The design of class 4 (slender) sections is limited to WIDE FLANGE, TEE, SINGLE
CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE, and RECTANGULAR & CIRCULAR HOLLOW
SECTIONS. The effective section properties are evaluated as described in Cl. 6.2.2.5
of the code.
You are allowed complete control over the design process through the use of the parameters
listed in Table 7C.4. Default values of parameters will yield reasonable results in most
circumstances. However, you should control the design and verify results through the use of
the design parameters.
Where N
238 STAAD.Pro
1.0
b,Rd
Nb, Rd =
A f y
Nb, Rd =
A efff y
M1
M1
Where:
is the reduction factor as given in section 6.3.12 of the code. The buckling curves used to
evaluate the reduction factor are selected from Table 6.2 of the code based on the cross section
type and the steel grade.
Note: Only the five grades of steel given in table 6.2 will be used when selecting the
buckling curve. The steel grade used for this selection is based on the SGR design
input parameter (See "Design Parameters" on page 261). Even if you have specified a
custom yield strength (using the PY parameter), the choice of a buckling curve will
be based on the value of SGR parameter.
Compression members that are susceptible to torsional or torsional flexural buckling are
checked for these modes of failure as well. The non-dimensional slenderness for these
T
members is evaluated per Cl. 6.3.1.4 of the EN 1993 code. The maximum slenderness among the
flexural buckling slenderness, torsional slenderness, and torsional-flexural slenderness is used
to evaluate the reduction factor, , for such members. The elastic torsional buckling load, N
cr,
, and the elastic torsional-flexural buckling load, N
, are evaluated based on the method
T
cr,TF
given in the NCCI SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional
buckling modes (unless otherwise specified by a particular National Annex). The effective
length for the members can be controlled using the KZ, KY, LZ and LY parameters. If these
parameters are specified, the effective length will be calculated as KZ*LZ for length about the
Z-Z axis and KY*LY for length about the Y-Y axis. By default, the effective length will be taken
as the member length.
EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not specifically deal with single angle, double angles, double channels, or
Tee sections and does not provide a method to evaluate the slenderness of such members. In
these cases, the EC3 (EN 1993) design module of STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified in BS
5950-1:2000 to calculate the slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 and Table 25 of BS 59501:2000 are used in the current version of the Eurocode 3 design module.
ST angle and
USER table angles
RAangle
Where M
1.0
c,Rd
M c, Rd = M pl, Rd =
W plf y
M c, Rd = M el, Rd =
W el ,minf y
M c, Rd =
M0
M0
W eff ,m inf y
M0
Cross sectional bending capacity checks will be done for both major and minor axis bending
moments.
Members subject to major axis bending will also be checked for Lateral Torsional Buckling
resistance as per Section 6.3.2 of the code. The design buckling resistance moment M
will
b,Rd
be calculated as:
M b, Rd = LT Wy
fy
M1
Where:
240 STAAD.Pro
LT
is the reduction factor for lateral torsional buckling. This reduction factor is
evaluated per Cl. 6.3.2.2 or Cl 6.3.2.3 of the EN 1993 code depending on the
section type. For I sections, the program will by default use Cl. 6.3.2.3 to evalute
and for all other sections the program will resort to Cl 6.3.2.2. However, if a
LT
particular National Annex has been specified, the program will check if the
National Annex expands on Cl.6.3.2.3 (Table 6.5) to include sections other than I
sections. If so, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 for the cross-section(s) included in
Cl. 6.2.2.3 (or Table 6.5). For all other cases the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2.
Note: You have the option to choose the clause to be used to calculate LT
When using Cl. 6.3.2.3 to calculate , the program will consider the correction
LT
factor kc (Table 6.6 of EN 1993-1-1:2006) based on the value of the KC parameter
in the design input. By default the value of KC will be taken as 1.0. If you want
the program to calculate kc, you must explicitly set the value of the KC parameter
to zero.
W yf y
M cr
Where:
M is the elastic critical moment for lateral torsional buckling. EN 1993-1-1 does
cr
not however specify a method to evaluate M . Hence, the program will make use
cr
of the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1 to evaluate M by
cr
default.
Note: The method specified in Annex F will be used only when the raw EN
1993-1-1:2005 code is used without any National Annex. If a National
Annex has been specified, the calculation of M (and ) will be
cr
LT
done based on the specific National Annex. (See "European Codes National Annexes to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005]" on page 281 for
1.0
Where:
V
c,Rd
Av fy /
M0
A is the shear area and is worked out for the various section types as given in
v
Cl. 6.2.6(3) of the code.
Shear Buckling
For sections that are susceptible to shear buckling, the program will perform the shear
buckling checks as given in Section 5 of EN 1993-1-5. The shear buckling checks will be done
only for I Sections and Channel sections. Shear stresses induced from torsional loads are
taken into account while performing torsion checks.
242 STAAD.Pro
f yw wt
3 M1
Vbw , Rd =
wf ywh wt
3 M1
Where:
h = distance between flanges of an I Section (i.e., depth - 2x flange
w
thickness).
t = thickness of the web
= (235/fy ), where fy is the yield stress
= 1.2 for steel grades up to and including S 460 and = 1.0 for other steel
grades
k as defined in sections below
is the web contribution factor obtained from Table 5.1 of the EC3 code
w
and is evaluated per the following table:
Table 7C.1-Evaluate of
w =
Slenderness
Parameter
Rigid End
Post
Non-rigid End
Post
w < 0.83/
0.83/w
0.83/w
w > 1.08
1.37/(0.7
+w)
0.83/w
hw
86.4 t
b. For stiffened webs, if hw/t > 31Ek/, the section must be checked for shear buckling.
The design resistances considers tension field action of the web and flanges acting as
struts in a truss model. This is calculated as:
Vb, Rd = Vbw, Rd + Vbf , Rd
f yw wt
3 M1
Where:
V
is the flange resistance per Cl.5.4 for a flange not completely
bf,Rd
utilized by bending moment.
Vbf , Rd =
h ft f2f yf
c M 1
M
1 Ed
M f ,Rd
b is the width of the flange which provides the least axial resistance, not
f
to be taken greater than 15tf on each side of the web.
t is the thickness of the flange which provides the least axial resistance.
f
N Ed
A + A f
f 1 f 2 yf
M0
A and A are the areas of the top and bottom flanges, respectively.
f1
f2
c = a 0.25 +
1.6b ft f f yf
2
t h w2f yw
VEd
Vb ,Rd
1.0
Where:
V
Ed
Note: The shear forces due to any applied torsion will not be accounted for if the TOR
parameter has been specifically set to a value of 0 (i.e., ignore torsion option).
If the stiffener spacing has not been provided (using the STIFFparameter), then the program
assumes that the member end forms a non-rigid post (case c) and proceeds to evaluate the
minimum stiffener spacing required.
244 STAAD.Pro
The method used by STAAD.Pro is therefore based on the SCI publication P057: Design of
members subject to combined bending and torsion. Though this publication is based on the
British standard BS 5950-1, the principles from this document are applied in the context of
Eurocode 3.
Note: At the time this feature has been implemented in STAAD.Pro, SCI are in the
process of updating document P057 to be in accordance with Eurocode 3. Hence
this method might be subject to modifications subject to the publication of a newer
version of P057. The NCCI document SN007b-EN-EU: Torsion will also be
referenced where appropriate.
Code Basis
Torsion design in EC3 is given in Cl. 6.2.7 of EN 1993-1-1:2005. Therefore, this clause is used
primarily for this implementation.
EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not deal with members subject to the combined effects of torsion and
lateral torsional buckling. However, EN 1993-1-6 considers such a condition in Appendix A.
Therefore, STAAD.pro uses Appendix A of EN 1993-1-6 to check for members subject to
combined torsion and LTB.
The following clauses from EC3 are then considered:
l
Cl. 6.2.7(1)
Cl. 6.2.7(9)
Cl. 6.2.7(5)
EC-3 -6 App A
Note: STAAD.Pro does, however, use this clause (6.2.7) to report the output for all torsion
checks. Also any distortional deformations and any amplification in the torsional or
shear stresses due to distortions will be neglected by the program.
l
Clause 6.2.7(1)
States that for members subject to torsion, the design torsional moment T at each
Ed
cross section should satisfy:
TEd / RRd 1.0
Where:
T
Rd
This is the primary condition that will need to be satisfied for members subject to
torsion. The method for working out the torsional resistance T , for the various cases
Rd
is dealt in the following sections.
l
Cl. 6.2.7(9)
States that:
For combined shear force and torsional moment, the plastic shear
resistance accounting for torsional effects should be reduced from V
pl,Rd
to V
and the design shear force should satisfy:
pl,T,Rd
Cl 6.2.7(5)
States that the yield criteria given in Cl. 6.2.1(5) of EN 1993-1-1:2005 may be used for
elastic verification. STAAD.Pro evaluates the stresses due to the various actions on the
cross section and applies this yield criterion.
The program allows for two types of checks for members subject to torsion for EC3 design:
I. Basic Stress Check: This method is intended to be a simplified stress check for
torsional effects. This method will produce the output corresponding to Cl. 6.2.7(5) of
EN 1993-1-1.
II. Detailed Checks: This method will perform a full torsional analysis of the member. All
four of the clause checks mentioned earlier will be performed.
The details of these checks are as described below.
You have the option to choose the method to be used for a specific member or group of
members. This will be facilitated by setting the value of the TORSION. The TORSION parameter
set to zero by default, which results in torsion checks only being performed if the member is
subject to torsional moments (i.e., for this default setting, the program will ignore torsion
checks if there is no torsional moment in the member). Setting the value of the TORSION
parameter to three (3) will cause the program to ignore all torsional moments. The detailed
output (i.e., TRACK 2) will indicate that torsion has been ignored for that particular member.
The details of setting the values to one (1) or two (2) and the corresponding checks performed
are as described below. See "Design Parameters" on page 261 for additional details.
Note: If the TORSION parameter is set to 1 or 2, the program will perform the appropriate
checks even if the member is not subject to torsional moments. In such cases, the
program will perform the checks with a value of zero for the torsional moment.
246 STAAD.Pro
length of the member and for each section, will calculate the resultant stress (Von Mieses) at
various points on the cross section. The location and number of points checked for a cross
section will depend on the cross section type and will be as described below.
The stress check will be performed using equation 6.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005 as given below:
2
2
2
x ,Ed z,Ed x ,Ed z,Ed Ed
f y / M0 + f y / M 0 f y / M0 f y / M 0 + 3 f y / M 0 1
Where:
x,Ed
z,Ed
Ed
Note: Since transverse stresses are very small under normal loading conditions (excluding
hydrostatic forces), the term will be negligible and hence is taken as zero.
x,Ed = x + bz + by = Fx /Ax + Mz/Zz + My /Zy
Ed = T/J t + Vy Q/(Izt) + VzQ/(Iy *t)
Where:
T is the torsion at the particular section along the length of the member
J is the torsion constant
t is the thickness of the web/flange
V is the shear force
Q is the statical moment about the relevant axis
I is the second moment of area about the relevant axis
The stress check as per equation 6.1 is performed at various stress points of a cross section as
shown in figures below:
Shape
Doubly
symmetric
wide flange
profile
Pipe
profiles
=
tan-1
(M
z
/My )
Tube
profiles
248 STAAD.Pro
Section Sketch
Shape
Section Sketch
Channel
profiles
The resultant ratio will be reported under Cl. 6.2.7(5) in the detailed design output.
Ed
) and
t,Ed
w,Ed
Therefore,
Note: Although the equation given the NCCI document SN007b-EN-EU can be used to
evaluate T , the NCCI does not give the eqn. to evaluate . Therefore, Annex B
wrd
of P057 is used.
The torsional resistance of the section is also considered as the sum of the pure torsion
resistance and the warping torsion resistance. The pure torsion resistance (T ) and the
t,Rd
warping torsional resistance (T
) are evaluated as:
w,Rd
max
250 STAAD.Pro
Av f y /
Vpl, Rd =
M0
Where:
A is as pre Cl.6.2.6 (3) for the various sections
v
When torsion is present, along with the shear force, the design shear resistance will be
reduced to V
, where V
is evaluated as follows:
pl,T,Rd
pl,T,Rd
i. For I or H Sections:
Vpl, T , Rd = 1
,Ed
3 / M0
1.25 f y /
Vpl, Rd
Vpl, T , Rd = 1
,Ed
1.25 f y / 3 / M0
Vpl, Rd
3 ) / M0
w ,Ed
(f y /
Vpl, T , Rd = 1
,Ed
V
f y / 3 / M 0 pl, Rd
Where
t,Ed
w,Ed
t,Ed
and
w,Ed
Ed
w,Ed
For I and H sections, the web will not be subject to warping stresses and therefore
warping shear can be ignored (
=0).
w,Ed
Note: Although the maximum stress is at the thickest section of the profile, the
program uses the web thickness for this clause (since the shear capacity is
based on the web area) unless the load is parallel to the flanges, in which
case the flange thickness is used.
For channel sections that are free to warp at the supports and, thus, are not subject to
warping stresses:
The warping shear stress is evaluated as:
w,Ed = ESw / t
[Ref SCI pub. P057]
Where:
E is the elastic modulus,
S is the warping statistical moment and
w
252 STAAD.Pro
is the differential function based on twist (ref P057 Annex B. & Table 6)
W
ns
+
3
f y / M0 f y / M 0 f y / M0 f y / M 0 f y / M 0 1
Clause EC-3:6 App A Check for combined Torsion and Lateral Torsional
buckling
The interaction check due to the combined effects of bending (including lateral torsional
buckling) and torsion will be checked using Annex A of EN 1993-6: 2007. Note that this
interaction equation does not include the effects of any axial load.
Warning: At present, SCI advises that no significant work has been published for this case
and work is still ongoing. So at present is advisable not to allow for torsion in a
member with large axial load.
Members subject to combined bending and torsion will be checked to satisfy:
M y ,ED
LTM y ,RK / M1
C MZM z,Ed
M z,RK / M1
k wk zwk T w ,Ed
T w ,Rk / M1
Where:
C is the equivalent uniform moment factor for bending about the z-z axis,
mz
according to EN 1993-1-1 Table B.3.
k w = 0.7
k zw = 1
0.2T w ,Ed
T w ,Rk / M 1
M z,Ed
M z,Rk / M1
k =
1
1 M y ,Ed / M y ,cr
M
and M
are the design values of the maximum moment about the y-y
y,Ed
z,Ed
and z-z axis, respectively.
M
and M
are the characteristic values of the resistance moment of the
y,Rk
z,Rk
cross-section about it y-y and z-z axis, respectively, from EN 1993-1-1, Table 6.7.
M
is the elastic critical lateral-torsional buckling moment about the y-y axis.
y,cr
w,Ed
w,Rk
Note: For all of the above checks the effective length of the member to be used for
torsion can be set by using the EFT design parameter.
Note: By default, the program will use the values of the constants and as given in
the code for the different sections types. However, you can override these values
using the ALPHA and BETA design parameters (See "Design Parameters" on page
261).
Note: The program uses the parameter ELB (See "Design Parameters" on page 261) to
override the Cl.6.2.9 checks for combined axial load and bending case. When
specfied as 1, the program uses the more general equation 6.2 of EN 1993-1-1,
instead.
254 STAAD.Pro
Note: EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not specifically deal with single angle, double angles, double
channels or Tee sections and does give a method to evaluate the slenderness of such
members. In these cases, the Eurocode 3 (EN 1993-1-1) design module of STAAD.Pro
uses the methods specified in BS 5950-1:2000 to calculate the slenderness of these
members. Cl. 4.7.10 of BS 5950-1:2000 is used in the current version of the EC3
design module. See "Single Angel Sections"for ST and RA angle specifications.
Note: Laced or battened compression members are not dealt within the current version of
EC3 (EN 1993) design module in STAAD.Pro.
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters.
EC3-6 deals with four types of ultimate limits states: plastic limit state, cyclic capacity limit
state, buckling limit state, and fatigue. The following are considered by STAAD.Pro:
LS1 Plastic limit state: Deals with the condition when the capacity of the structure is
exhausted by yielding of the material.
LS3 Buckling Limit state: Deals with the condition in which the structure (or shell)
develops large displacements normal to the shell surface, caused by loss of stability
under compressive and/or shear membrane stresses.
The limit state verification is made based on the Stress design method described in EC3-6.
The stress design approach takes into account three categories of stresses:
l
Primary stresses: Stresses that are generated for the member to be in equilibrium with
the direct imposed loads.
Secondary stresses: Those that are generated for internal compatibility or for
compatibility at supports due to imposed loads or displacements (e.g., temperature,
settlement etc.)
Local stresses: Local stresses generated due to cyclic loading (or fatigue).
Only the primary stresses are considered the program. The primary stresses considered are
those generated due to axial loads, bending, shear and /or a combination of these conditions.
Note: In the context of slender pipe section design for the Eurocode 3 module, the
secondary and local stresses can be neglected since the loads and corresponding
stresses dealt with in the design engine are largely direct and shear stresses.
The local axis coordinate system for a CHS is defined as:
circumferential
around the circumference of the circular cross
section ()
meridional
along the length of the member (x)
normal
perpendicular to the tangential plane formed by
the circumferential and meridional directions
(n)
and the corresponding membrane stresses will follow the convention given below:
Figure 7C.3 - Nomenclature for membrane and transverse stresses in Slender CHS sections
Membrane stresses
256 STAAD.Pro
Transverse stresses
Stress Design
Stress checks are made based on the Stress design method as per Section 8.5 of the code. This
section deals with the buckling strength of the member (LS3). The principle is to evaluate the
membrane stresses due to the applied loads and then compare that to the buckling strength,
which is evaluated giving due consideration for local buckling effects.
The membrane stresses are evaluated as given in Annex A of the code. The pipe section is
considered as an unstiffened cylindrical shell.
i. Meridional Stresses:
1. Axial load
Fx = 2rPx
x = -Fx /(2rt)
2. Axial stress from bending
M = r2 Px,max
x = M/(2 rt)
ii. Shear Stress:
1. Transverse force, V
V = rP,max
max = V/(rt)
2. Shear from torsional moment, M
Mt = 2r2 P
= Mt/(22 r2 t)
Where:
r is the radius of the middle surface of the shell wall.
t is the wall thickness of the cylinder
Figure 7C.4 - Naming convention and coordinate system used for the buckling stress of a slender CSH
section
x,Rk
Where:
is the meridional buckling reduction factor. is evaluated per Section 8.5.2
x
x
(4) of EC3-6 and is determined as a function of the relative shell slenderness
given by:
x =
f yk
x ,cr
Where:
x,cr
Once the relative slenderness is evaluated, the reduction factor is calculated as follows:
= 1 when
0
= 1
/2
when
P
Where:
is the plastic limit for slenderness given by:
p
P =
258 STAAD.Pro
The meridional buckling parameters the factors and are evaluated per section D.1.2.2 of
EC3-6.
Note: A Normal fabrication quality will be assumed when evaluating the fabrication
quality parameter as given in table D.2 of the code, unless the fabrication quality is
set using the FAB design parameter. See "Design Parameters" on page 261
The elastic critical buckling stress,
and the factors and are evaluated per Annex D of
x,cr
EC3-6. The details are as given below:
The CHS section is classified based on the following criteria:
CHS Length Classification
Criteria
Short
1.7
Medium
Long
Where:
=
l
rt
Note: For a long cylinder, there are two separate methods that can be used
to evaluate the C factor: Eqns D.9/10 and Eqn D.12. Initially the
x
program evaluates C based on the maximum from equations D.9 and
x
D.10. However, for long cylinders that satisfy the conditions in
equation D.11, the program will also work out Cx based on equation
D.12 and then choose the minimum obtained from D.12 and D.9/10.
x,Rk
x,Rk = fyk
Where:
is the shear buckling reduction factor. will be worked out as given in
x ,cr
Where:
x,Rk
The reduction factor, , is then evaluated as described for the axial buckling stress, based on
Criteria
Short
10
Medium
Long
Where:
=
l
rt
Where:
C is a factor dependant upon whether the CHS length classification as
Note: A Normal fabrication quality will be assumed when working out the
fabrication quality parameter as given in table D.6 of the code, unless
the fabrication quality is set using the FAB design parameter.
260 STAAD.Pro
kx
+ x ,Ed
x ,Rd
Where:
k and k are the interaction factors as given in section D.1.6 of EN 1993-1-6:
x
kx = 1.25 + 0.75 x
k = 1.75 +0.25
Default
Name
Value
CODE
Description
ALH
0.5
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
ALPHA
1.0
Description
BEAM
BETA
1.0
C1
1.132
C2
0.459
C3
262 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
CAN
Description
CMM
1.0
1.0
CMT
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
DFF
0
(Mandatory
for
deflection
Description
check,
TRACK 4.0)
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
DMAX
100.0 cm
DMIN
EFT
Member
Length
ELB
264 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
ESTIFF
Description
FAB
FU
GM0
1.0
Corresponds to the
m0
factor in EN
1993-1-1:2005
GM1
1.0
Corresponds to the
m1
factor in EN
1993-1-1:2005
GM2
1.25
Corresponds to the
m2
factor in EN
1993-1-1:2005
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
GST
Description
1.0
1.0
266 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
KZ
1.0
Description
LEG
LVV
LY
LZ
Member
Length
Member
Length
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
MTH
Description
LT
268 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
NSF
1.0
Description
PLG
Yield
Strength
RATIO
SBLT
0.0
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
SGR
Description
Member
Length or
depth of
beam,
whichever is
lesser
TOM
270 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
TORSION
Description
UNF
UNL
Member
Length
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
ZG
Description
+Section
Depth/2
Notes:
1. CAN, DJ1, and DJ2 Deflection
a. When performing the deflection check, you can choose between two methods.
The first method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter, is based on the
local displacement. Local displacement is described in Section 5.44 of the
Technical Reference Manual.
If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever style
deflection. Let (DX1, DY1, DZ1) represent the nodal displacements (in global
axes) at the node defined by DJ1 (or in the absence of DJ1, the start node of the
member). Similarly, (DX2, DY2, DZ2) represent the deflection values at DJ2 or
the end node of the member.
Compute Delta = SQRT((DX2 - DX1)2 + (DY2 - DY1)2 + (DZ2 - DZ1)2)
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 & DJ2 or, between start node and end
node, as the case may be.
Then, if CAN is specified a value 1, dff = L/Delta
Ratio due to deflection = DFF/dff
b. If CAN = 0, deflection length is defined as the length that is used for calculation
of local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the
Deflection Length will be equal to the length of the member. However, in
some situations, the Deflection Length may be different. A straight line
joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections
are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using
four joints and three members. The Deflection Length for all three members
will be equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1
and DJ2 should be used to model this situation. Thus, for all three members
here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2 should be 4.
272 STAAD.Pro
c. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member
length and local deflections will be measured from original member line.
d. It is important to note that unless a DFF value is specified, STAAD will not
perform a deflection check. This is in accordance with the fact that there is no
default value for DFF (see Table 2B.1).
e. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available
parameters for steel design.
2. CMM Parameter
The values of CMM for various loading and support conditions are as given below:
Table 7C.3-Values for the CMM Parameter
CMM
Value
CMM
Value
274 STAAD.Pro
DJ1 1 MEMB 1
DJ2 4 MEMB 1
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
Note: While both sets of code checks will be reported in the output file, only the
last code check results are reported in the STAAD.Pro graphical interface.
4. CMT Parameter
The values of CMM for various loading and support conditions are as given below:
Table 7C.4-Loading and Support Conditions represented by CMT
Parameter Values
CMT
Value
Description
Concentrated Torque in
cantilever. End Torsion fixed and
Warping fixed
Diagram
CMT
Value
7
Description
Diagram
Note: For CMT = 2 and CMT = 3, you have the option of specifying the distance at
which the concentrated torque acts, measured from the start of the
member. This can be done by using the ALH design parameter. The ALH
parameter indicates the ratio of the distance of the point torque (from the
start of the member) to the length of the member. This parameter will have
a default value of 0.5 (i.e., the torque acts at the center of the span) and will
accept values ranging from 0 to 1.
Note: The GB1 parameter that is being used for compression checks in builds preceding
this release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as this parameter is no
longer required in EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence any legacy files that use GB1 parameter
will indicate an error message and you will be required to substitute GB1 with GM1,
in accordance with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
7C.7 CodeChecking
The purpose of code checking is to ascertain whether the provided section properties of the
members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per EN 1993-1-1:2005 and a corresponding
National Annex (if specified). Code checking is done using the forces and moments at specific
sections of the members.
When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the members
have passed or failed the checks; the critical condition; the value of the ratio of the critical
condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value); the
governing load case, and the location (distance from the start of the member of forces in the
member where the critical condition occurs).
Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2B.4 or any of the
user defined sections as described in Section 1.7.3 of the Technical Reference Manual, with the
exception of ISECTION. ISECTION has been currently excluded since the option of Tapered
section design is currently not supported in the EC3 module. The EC3 (EN 1993) design
module does not consider these sections or PRISMATIC sections in its design process.
Note: Checks for slender sections to EN 1993-1-1 are limited to I-SECTIONS, TEE,
SINGLE CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE and CIRCULAR & RECTANGULAR HOLLOW
SECTIONS.
276 STAAD.Pro
Code checking for GENERAL sections can be also done using the EN1993 module. The program
will design GENERAL sections as I sections by default. However, you are given the option to
choose a section type to be considered while designing the member. Refer to the description
of the GST design parameter in Section 7C.6 for details.
7C.9 TabulatedResultsofSteelDesign
For code checking or member selection, the program produces the results in a tabulated
fashion. The items in the output table are explained as follows:
MEMBER
refers to the member number for which the design is performed.
TABLE
refers to steel section name, which has been checked against the steel code or has
been selected.
RESULTS
prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILED. If the RESULT is FAIL, there
will be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member.
CRITICAL COND
refers to the clause in EN 1993-1-1:2005 code which governs the design.
RATIO
prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition.
Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed.
LOADING
provides the load case number, which governed the design.
FX, MY, and MZ
provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis and the moment in local z-axis
respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments
(except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY and MZ are printed since they are
the ones which are of interest, in most cases.
LOCATION
specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where
design forces govern.
Note: For a TRACK 2 output, the module will also report all the relevant clause checks
that have been performed and will also indicate the critical ratio and the load case
that caused the critical ratio as well as the corresponding forces that were used for
the respective checks. A TRACK 2 output will also include the various design data
used for the calculations such as the section modulii, section class, section capacity
etc.
If an NA parameter (other than 0) has been specified and if the particular National Annex
requires additional checks outside those specified in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (e.g., The Dutch
National Annex), the respective NA clauses and any associated code clauses will be listed
along with the critical ratios and the forces that were used for these clause checks.
Note: The results and output follow the axis convention as described in Section 7C.1.3
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - BS EN 1993- Code title & version
1-1:2005
********************************************
NATIONAL ANNEX - NA to BS EN
National Annex used, if any
1993-1-1:2005
PROGRAM CODE REVISION V1.9 BS_EC3_2005/1
HD320X127
0.045
25.00 C
5.00
Section forces & critical section location
-10.00
0.00
=======================================================================
MATERIAL DATA
Grade of steel
= USER
Modulus of elasticity
= 205 kN/mm2
Design Strength (py)
= 275 N/mm2
SECTION PROPERTIES (units - cm)
Member Length =
500.00
Gross Area = 161.30
Net Area = 161.30
"z-axis" here refers to bending about Z-Z (when Y is Up), where as EC3 uses the Y-Y axis convention.
z-axis
278 STAAD.Pro
y-axis
Moment of inertia
Plastic modulus
Elastic modulus
Shear Area
Radius of gyration
Effective Length
DESIGN DATA (units - kN,m)
Section Class
:
30820.004
:
2149.000
:
1926.250
:
81.998
:
13.823
:
500.000
EUROCODE NO.3 /2005
:
CLASS 1
Squash Load
:
Axial force/Squash load :
GM0 : 1.00
GM1 :
4435.75
0.006
1.00
9239.001
939.100
615.933
51.728
7.568
500.000
GM2 :
1.10
Slenderness ratio (KL/r)
Compression Capacity
Tension Capacity
Moment Capacity
Reduced Moment Capacity
Shear Capacity
:
:
:
:
:
:
z-axis
36.2
4078.2
4435.8
591.0
591.0
1301.9
y-axis
66.1
3045.5
4435.8
258.3
258.3
821.3
280 STAAD.Pro
Country
United Kingdom (British NA) Uses the BS EN 19931-1:2005 version of Eurocode 3 along with the UK
National Annex.
Netherlands (Dutch NA) Uses the NEN EN 1993-11:2005 version of the code.
The Dutch National Annex [NEN-EN 1993-1-1/NB] has
been added in this module. Please note that the Dutch
National requires additional checks as per NEN 6770
and NEN 6771 which will also be performed during
design checks with this parameter value
NAValue
Country
Norway (Norwegian NA) Uses the NS-EN 1993-11:2005 version of the code. The Norwegian National
Annexe [NS-EN 1993-1-1:2005/Na 2008] has been added
to this implementation.
Singapore (Singaporean NA) - Uses the SS EN1993-11:2005 version of Eurocode 3 along with the
Singaporean National Annex.
Malaysian (Malaysian NA) - Uses the MS NE 1993-11:2005 version of Eurocode 3 along with the Malaysian
National Annex.
282 STAAD.Pro
CODE EN 1993-1-1:2005
NA n
Refer to EC3 steel design for additional information on steel design per EC3.
A design performed to the new Eurocode 3 National Annex is displayed in the outputfile
(*.ANL) with the following header, in addition to the base EC3 output.
Note: Clause 6.3.2.4 deals with a simplified assessment method for beams. STAAD.Pro only
uses the more accurate method (6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 in EC-3) and therefore this
section is ignored.
Resistance of cross-sections,
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0
M2
= 1.25
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the D-NA (NA 3
is specified)..
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See
"Design Parameters" on page 261
z;s;d
z;pl;d
=A f
w
y;d
285 STAAD.Pro
y;d
/ 3
= yield stress
Aw = A - 2 (bf - tw - 2r) tf
N
N
s;d
pl;d
y;d
y;s;d
y;pl;d
y;pl
y;d
y;pl
v;y;ud
;v;u;d
Table 11: Provides interaction formulae for bending about the minor axis
1. If Vy;s;d 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d 1.0 a1 Npl;d check equation 11.3-5
2. If Vy;s;d 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 a1 Npl;d check equation 11.3-6
3. IfVy;s;d > 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d 1.0 a1 Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-7
4. If Vy;s;d > 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 a1 Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-8
Where:
V
V
y;s;d
y;pl;d
Vy ; pl ; d = 2btf
f y ;d
3
pl;z;d
= plastic section modulus about minor axis) & q as per eqn 11.3-14
z;s;d
z;pl;d
b = breadth of section
h = height of section
A = area of section
Vz ; pl ; d = Vz ; cl ; d =
f y ;d
h
A
b +h
3
287 STAAD.Pro
See "Clause 6.2.8 Bending and shear" on page 285 of this document for equations to derive
Vz;s;d
Vz;pl;d = Shear capacity of CHS sections
Vpl ; d = 2
A f y ;d
3
M y ;s ;d
0
M N ;V ;y ;u ;d
M z;s ;d
+ 1
M N ;V ;z;u ;d
a2
289 STAAD.Pro
Where
V
V
z;s;d
z;u;d
For an I section,
2
3
Vz ; u ; d = A w; et
f y ;d
3
Where
Aw,ef = effective web area as given in section 10.2.4.2.3.
MN;y;f;u;d is the moment capacity about the Y axis for the effective
section. = (fyW,eff)
2. If M;y;s;d / MN;y;f;u;d > 1 and M;y;s;d / M;y;f;u;d 1 check equation 11.2-13 (given below):
M y ;s ;d
2
2Vz;s ;d
M N ;y ;f ;u ;d + M N ;y ;u ;d M N ;y ;f ;u ;d1
1
Vz;u ;d
N c ;u ;d
FE ;
Where:
Nc;u;d = Afy;d
A = area of section
f
y;d
E;
This value of slenderness is to be used to calculate the modification factors used in section 6.3
of EC-3.
N c ;u ;d
FE ;tk
Where
Nc;u;d = Afy;d
A = area of section
f
y;d
= yield stress
E;tk
Note: STAAD.Pro does not allow for these end conditions, specifically. The effective
length factors may be used to accommodate this requirement.
291 STAAD.Pro
Where:
N
N
c;s;d
C;u;d
;d
fu ;d
Where:
N
c;s;d
and N
c;u;d
Description
293 STAAD.Pro
y
120
Where:
N
N
c;s;d
pl;d
y;d
y
100
Where:
N
N
c;s;d
pl;d
y;d
2. For columns that are not part of buttressed frameworks the following additional checks
need to be done:
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d < 0.15, no additional checks are required
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d 0.15 and the steel grade is S235 or S 275 then
N c ;s ;d
N p ;d
y
100
Where:
N
N
c;s;d
pl;d
y;d
y
80
Resistance of cross-sections -
M0
= 1.05
M1
= 1.05
M2
= 1.25
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the NorwegianNA (NA 3 is specified).
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See
"Design Parameters" on page 261
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user
specified value (i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below refer to the
corresponding clauses in the Norwegian -NA.
Note: Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below
refer to the corresponding clauses in the UK-NA.
The following clauses are not implemented in STAAD.Pro:
Clause 6.3.2.4(1) B Slenderness for flexural buckling
The UK NA specifies the value of c0 for I, H channel or box section to be used in
equation 6.59 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 as 0.4. However, STAAD.Pro does not use this
clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is ignored for the UK National
Annex.
Clause 6.3.2.4(2)B Modification factor kfl
The value of the modification factor kfl to be used in equation 6.60 of BS EN 1993-11. However, STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this
clause is ignored for the UK National Annex.
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 that have been dealt with in the UK National Annex
(hereafter referred to as the UK-NA) are:
Resistance of cross-sections,
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0
M2
= 1.1
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the UK-NA (NA 1
is specified).
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See
"Design Parameters" on page 261
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user
specified value (i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
Warning: The GB1 parameter that is being used for compression checks in builds
preceding this release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as this
parameter is no longer required in EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence, any legacy files that
use GB1 parameter will indicate an error message and the user will need to
substitute GB1 with GM1 in line with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
M cr = C1
EI s
(kL ) 2
k
k
w
Iw
Is
(kL ) GI t
2EI s
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of the
1
2
member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in the tables
1
2
below:
297 STAAD.Pro
The implementation of EC3 in STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the
bending moment diagram through the CMM parameter. The first two loading conditions
mentioned above and its variants can be dealt with by using the existing values of the CMM
parameter (i.e., 1 to 6). Hence the appropriate values from this NCCI will be used for C1 and
C2 coefficients depending on the value of CMM specified. The default value of CMM is 1, which
considers the member as a pin ended member with UDL along its span. The user will also
have the option to specify specific values for C and C using the C1 and C2 parameters in the
1
2
design input mode. See "Design Parameters" on page 261
However, for cases with end moments and transverse loading, the NCCI provides graphs to
evaluate the C1 and C2 coefficients. It does not however, provide a set of equations for these
graphs. However the end moments and transverse loading condition cannot be currently
specified in the design input. Hence this implementation will introduce two new values for
the CMM parameter viz.
CMM 7:Member with varying end moments and uniform loading.
CMM 8: Member with varying end moments and central point load.
For these two conditions, the UK National Annex (nor the NCCI) does not provide equations
to evaluate C1 and C2. Hence in STAAD.Pro the user will have to use the new C1 & C2
parameters to input the required values for C1 & C2 to be used in calculating Mcr. For values
of 7 or 8 for the CMM parameter, the program will issue a warning if C1 and C2 have not been
specified.
Note: If the NA parameter has not been specified, the program obtains the values of C1
and C2 from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
M cr = C1
299 STAAD.Pro
k 2I
2
x w + (k x L ) GI T + C z C z 2 C z C z
(
)
2 e
2 e
3 1
3 1
2EI x
(k x L )2 k w I s
EI s
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. This
1 2
3
implementation will consider C , C , and C as given in the tables below:
1
The CMM parameter (see section (i) above) specified during design input will determine the
values of C1, C2 and C3. The default value of CMM is 1, which considers the member as a pin
ended member with UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the end
moments and transverse loading condition. The user however can use the new C1, C2 and C3
parameters to input the required values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr. As
described in section (i) above, the user must use C1, C2 and C3 parameters along with CMM
values of 7 and 8.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is
free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member (k = kw = 1.0).
The current implementation of EC3 in STAAD takes into account of the end conditions using
the CMN parameter. A value of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design
input. Hence the above methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on
plan and which have no warping restraints, i.e., CMN = 1.0. For members with partial or end
fixities (ie, CMN = 0.5 or CMN = 0.7), the proposed implementation will fall back on to the
method and coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) the
proposed implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term zg in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of
application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section.
The value of zg is considered positive if the load acts towards the shear center and is
negative if it acts away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the
load acts towards the shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear
center. The user will be allowed to modify this value by using the new ZG parameter.
Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at
the shear center of the section so that the term zg in the equation will have a value of zero.
For rolled sections and hot-rolled & cold formed hollow sections:
LT,0 = 0.4
= 0.75
The current implementation of STAAD.Pro uses the buckling curves based on Table 6.5 of BS
EN 1993-1-1:2005. The UK-NA specifies different limits and buckling curves to be used in this
clause as given below:
Table 7D.1-Buckling curves to use with BS EN 1993-1-1:2005
Cross Section
Limits
Buckling
Curve
h/b 2
h/b 2
This table again does not specify which buckling curve is to be used in case of welded doubly
symmetric sections with h/b 3.1 and welded non-doubly symmetric sections. Hence for
301 STAAD.Pro
these cases the new implementation will still use the method specified in the base code as per
clause 6.3.2.2(2).
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005), both give equations to evaluate the LTB reduction
factor to be used in eqn. 6.55 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the imperfection factors to
be used for calculating . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of buckling curves for Rolled I
LT
Sections, Welded I Sections and Any other sections. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses
tables 6.5 and 6.3 to choose the buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however
only deals with Rolled I Sections and Welded I Sections.
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of should be determined from.... Hence in the implementation of EC3
LT
(and the UK Annex) in STAAD.Pro, by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to
evaluate . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl.
LT
6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the UK National Annex states that Table 6.5 in BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 should be
replaced with the table given in the NA (See section 4.3 of this document). Hence for all cases
dealt with by the table in the UK NA, this implementation will choose the buckling curves
from the UK National Annex. For any case that is not dealt with by the table in the UK NA,
the program will use the method given in Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Hence for the following cross sections the program will use the Table in the UK NA for
choosing a buckling curve for LTB checks (when the UK NA has been specified):
l
Angle Sections
For the following cross sections, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to
evaluate LT
l
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3,
the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate LT .
In any case the Elastic critical moment Mcr (used to evaluate the non dimensional
slenderness) will be worked out as given in section 4.2 of this document. Since the UK
National Annex uses the NCCIs mentioned in the sections above, this implementation will
only consider end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0 (See section
4.2 above). For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this implementation will use the
method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input
= 0), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H
Sections. For all other cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Also, I sections with plates will be treated as built-up sections only if the section
has been explicitly specified as a built-up section (i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in
design input).
303 STAAD.Pro
These values are for an end restraint factor of k=1 (ie CMN=1.0). Hence for all other values of
CMN (ie 0.7 or 0.5) this implementation will use the values of C1 from DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992
Annex F.
The program will use a default value of 1.0 for kc. However the user can also input a custom
value of kc by setting the design parameter KC to the desired value. The user can also get
the program to calculate the value of kc automatically by setting the value of the KC
parameter in the design input to 0. This will cause the program to evaluate a value of C1
corresponding to the end conditions and the Bending moment of the member and in turn
calculate kc as given in the NA. To evaluate C1, the program will use the NCCI documents
mentioned in section 4.2 of this document.
T =
A fy
N cr
Where:
N = min (N
cr
CrT
,N
crTF
).
The UK NA or EC3 does not however specify a method to evaluate NCrT or NcrTF. Hence this
implementation will use the method specified in the NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU:
Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes to calculate these. See
section 4.9 below for details.
Note: The UK National Annex or EC3 does not deal with angle sections in specific and
hence this implementation will use the method used in the current EC3
The NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional
buckling modes provides methods to calculate the N
and N
factors and therefore
cr,TF
cr,T
these methods are used to evaluate the elastic critical loads for the UK NA.
The critical axial load for Torsional buckling is evaluated as:
Ncr, T =
2 GI t +
io
1
EI w
I T2
2
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong
y
z
axis) respectively.
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is evaluated as:
Ncr, TF =
i o2
2
2
2 iy +iz
Ncr, y + Ncr, T
(Ncr, y + Ncr, T)
4Ncr, yN cr, T
i y2 + i z2
2
io
305 STAAD.Pro
STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is
ignored for the French National Annex.
Clause 6.3.2.4(2)B Modification factor kfl
STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is
ignored for the French National Annex.
Note: Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below
refer to the corresponding clauses in the French-NA.
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that have been dealt
with in the French National Annex (hereafter referred to as FR-NA) and that are relevant to
the proposed implementation are:
EN 100252
40 mm < t <= 80
mm
t 40 mm
f
y
(N/mm
2)
f
u
(N/mm
2)
f
y
(N/mm
2)
f
u
(N/mm2)
S 235
235
360
215
360
S 275
275
430
255
410
S 355
355
490
335
470
S 450
440
550
410
550
t 40 mm
40 mm < t <= 80
mm
f
y
(N/mm
2)
f
u
(N/mm
2)
f
y
(N/mm
2)
f
u
(N/mm2)
S 275 N/NL
275
390
255
370
S 355 N/NL
355
490
335
470
S 420 N/NL
420
520
390
520
S 460 N/NL
460
540
430
540
S 275 M/ML
275
370
255
360
S 355 M/ML
355
470
335
450
S 420 M/ML
420
520
390
500
S 460 M/ML
460
540
430
530
EN 100255
S 235 W
235
360
215
340
S 355 W
355
490
335
490
EN 100256
S 460
Q/QL/QL 1
460
570
440
550
EN 100253
EN 100254
If you specify a steel grade that is not given in the Annex Table 3.1 (NF) but is present in
Table 3.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005, the program uses the values from Table 3.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005.
The appropriate yield strength (f ) used is shown in the design output file.
y
Resistance of cross-sections,
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0
M2
= 1.25
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the NF-NA (NA
4 is specified).
307 STAAD.Pro
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See
"Design Parameters" on page 261
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user
specified value (i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
Warning: The GB1 parameter that is being used for compression checks in builds
preceding this release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as this
parameter is no longer required in EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence, any legacy files that
use GB1 parameter will indicate an error message and the user will need to
substitute GB1 with GM1 in line with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Annex MCR
This document provides a method to calculate M specifically for doubly symmetric sections
cr
only. Hence only doubly symmetric sections will be considered for this method in this
implementation.
The equation to evaluate M is given as:
cr
M cr = C1
EI s
(kL ) 2
k
k
w
Iw
Is
(kL ) GI t
2EI s
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions. The
1
2
NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in Table1 and Table 2 of the
1
2
Annex. Table 1 deals with the condition of a simply supported member with end moments and
the value of C is determined by the end moment ratio (Refer to the NA for details). Clause 3.2
1
of the National Annex however gives a formula to evaluate C as:
1
C1 =
1
0.325 + 0.423 + 0.252
This formula however does not match the values given in Table 1 of the NA. Hence this
implementation will use the values of C1 from Table 1 if the end moment ration () is exactly
equal to the values of in the table. For all other cases this implementation will calculate the
value of C1 from equation (6) in the Annex.
The value of C2 will be determined from Table 2 of the Annex based on the loading and end
conditions (i.e the CMM parameter in STAAD).
The user will also have the option to specify specific values for C and C using the C1 and C2
1
2
parameters in the design input mode. See "Design Parameters" on page 261
The French NA considers three separate loading conditions:
l
The first two cases and its variants can be defined using with the existing CMM parameter
values in STAAD.Pro. However the third condition cannot be currently specified in the
design input. Hence this implementation will introduce two new values for CMM viz.
CMM 7:Member with varying end moments and uniform loading.
CMM 8: Member with varying end moments and central point load.
The load to moment ratio () will then be used in the calculations will then be used to
calculate C1 and C2 as given in section 3.5 of Annex MCR (See Annex MCR in the NA for
details).
This implementation will also introduce a new parameter MU to be specified when using
CMM = 7 or 8. The load to moment ratio () to be used in the calculations is to be input
using the new MU parameter. This implementation will require that for the French National
Annex if CMM = 7 or 8 has been specified, the user should also either specify a value for MU
or input the values for C1 and C2 using the C1 and/or C2 parameters directly.
Note: The new parameter MU will currently be applicable only in the context of the
French NA.
309 STAAD.Pro
Note: Though this method could also be applicable to mono-symmetric built-up sections,
STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to specify/identify a mono-symmetric
built-up section. Hence this implementation will use this method only for TeeSections.
The equation to evaluate M for mono symmetric sections is given as:
cr
M cr = C1
EI s
(k x L )2
kx
k
w
Iw
Is
(k x L )2GI T
2EI x
2
+ (C 2z e C3z 1) C2z e C 3z 1
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. This
1 2
3
implementation will consider C , C , and C as given in the tables below:
1
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C1, C2 and C3.
The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with
UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the end moments and transverse
loading condition. The user however can use the new C1, C2 and C3 parameters to input
the required values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr.
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2 and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU
and use the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. The current implementation of EC3
in STAAD.Pro obtains these values from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-11:1992.
Also, the NCCI document and Annex MCR of the FR-NA assume that the member under
consideration is free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the
member(k = kw=1 .i.e., CMN parameter =1.0). Hence the above methods will be used only for
members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints. For members
with partial or end fixities (ie, CMN = 0.5 or CMN = 0.7), this implementation will fall back
on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term zg in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of
application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section.
The value of zg is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is
negative if it acts away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the
load acts towards the shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear
center. The use will be allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a
value of ZG = 0 in the design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear
center of the section so that the term zg in the equation will have a value of zero.
LT,0
and
LT
b
h
b 2
h
LT = 0.4 0.2 LT 0
Note: Since EN 1993-1-1:2005 limits the value of LT,0 to 0.4, STAAD.Pro limits LT,0 to a
maximum value of 0.4.
311 STAAD.Pro
b
h
b 2
h
LT = 0.5 0.25 LT 0
1
2
LT
The French Annex specifies that the modification factor is applicable only to members that are
free to rotate on plan (i.e., CMN 1.0). Hence for all other values of CMN, this implementation
will ignore f and hence will use
= .
LT,mod
LT
Note: The NA mentions that this method can be extended to singly symmetric ISections (symmetric about the minor axis) if the elastic properties are used instead
of the plastic properties. However, since STAAD does not have a provision to specify
such sections, this case will not be considered for this implementation.
The NA also mentions that torsional flexural buckling needs to be taken into account in case
of mono symmetric sections. This is taken into account based on the method given in the
NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional
buckling modes. See "Clause 6.3.1.4 - Slenderness for torsional and torsional-flexural
buckling" on page 313
The NA also recommends a lower limit as given below for the term C
in Table A.2 of
mi,0
Annex A:
Cmi, 0 1
N Ed
N cr ,i
The NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional
buckling modes provides methods to calculate the N
and N
factors and therefore
cr,TF
cr,T
these methods are used to evaluate the elastic critical loads for the French NA.
The critical axial load for Torsional buckling is evaluated as:
Ncr, T =
GI t +
i o2
1
EI w
I T2
2
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong
y
z
axis) respectively.
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is evaluated as:
Ncr, TF =
i o2
2
2
2 iy +iz
Ncr, y + Ncr, T
(Ncr, y + Ncr, T)
4Ncr, yN cr, T
i y2 + i z2
2
io
313 STAAD.Pro
Note: Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below
refer to the corresponding clauses in the Finnish-NA.
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that have been dealt
with in the Finnish National Annex (hereafter referred to as SFS-NA) and that are relevant to
the proposed implementation are:
Steel grades S315MC, S355MC, S420MC and S460MC according to SFS-EN 10149-2
Steel grades S260NC, S315NC, S355NC and S420NC according to SFS-EN 10149-3
These grades of steel can be specified by using the PY (Yield Strength) and FU (Ultimate
Strength)parameters in STAAD.Pro. Set these parameters to the respective values as given in
SFS-EN 10149-2/3 for the steel grades specified above. The choice of the buckling curve to be
used is based on the value of the SGR parameter specified. The output will include the
appropriate yield strength used for design.
Resistance of cross-sections,
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0
M2
= 1.25
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the SFS-NA (NA
5 is specified).
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See
"Design Parameters" on page 261
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user
specified value (i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
Warning: The GB1 parameter that is being used for compression checks in builds
preceding this release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as this
parameter is no longer required in EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence, any legacy files that
use GB1 parameter will indicate an error message and the user will need to
substitute GB1 with GM1 in line with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Buckling:
This document provides a method to calculate M specifically for doubly symmetric
cr
sections only. Hence only doubly symmetric sections will be considered for this
method. The equation to evaluate M is given in the NCCI as:
cr
M cr = C1
EI s
(kL ) 2
k
k
w
Iw
Is
(kL ) GI t
2EI s
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of
1
2
the member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in
1
2
the tables below:
315 STAAD.Pro
+1,00
1,00
+0,75
1,14
+0,50
1,31
+0,25
1,52
0,00
1,77
-0,25
2,05
-0,50
2,33
-0,75
2,57
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram
through the CMM parameter.
2. SN030a-EN-EU Mono-symmetrical uniform members under
M cr = C1
EI s
(k x L )2
kx
k
w
Iw
Is
(k x L )2GI T
2
EI x
2
+ (C 2z e C3z 1) C2z e C 3z 1
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria.
1 2
3
This implementation will consider C , C , and C as given in the tables below:
1
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C , C ,
1 2
and C . The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended
3
member with UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the end
moments and transverse loading condition. You can use the C1, C2, and C3
parameters to input the required values for C , C , and C to be used in calculating
1 2
3
M .
cr
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2, and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore
MU and use the user input values of C1, C2, and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these
values from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is
free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member (k = kw = 1.0).
STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A
value of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above
317 STAAD.Pro
methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no
warping restraints (i.e., CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5 or
CMN = 0.7), this implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV
1993-1-1:1992 Annex F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term zg in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of
application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The
value of zg is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it
acts away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts
towards the shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The
use will be allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG =
0 in the design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the
section so that the term zg in the equation will have a value of zero.
LT,0
LT,0
The Finnish NA specifies the following limits for choosing the buckling curves:
Limits
Buckling
Curve
h/b
2
b
c
2<
h/b
<3.1
Welded double symmetric I- section and H- sections
and cold-formed hollow sections
h/b
2
c
d
2<
h/b <
3.1
The NA says that for all other cases the rules given in Cl 6.3.2.2 should be used. Hence even
for rolled or welded doubly symmetric sections with h/b ratio 3.1, this implementation will
resort to checks as per clause 6.3.2.2.
These equations and factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of SFS-EN 1993-1-1 to evaluate
the Lateral Torsional Buckling reduction factor .
LT
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005), both give equations to evaluate the LTB
reduction factor to be used in eqn. 6.55 of SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the imperfection factors to
be used for calculating . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of buckling curves for Rolled I
LT
Sections, Welded I Sections and Any other sections. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses
tables 6.5 and 6.3 to choose the buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however
only deals with Rolled I Sections and Welded I Sections.
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of should be determined from.... Hence in the implementation of EC3
LT
(and the Finnish Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3
to evaluate . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl.
LT
6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Finnish National Annex gives equations to evaluate the imperfection factors
to be used for various section types (See "Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and
imperfection factors for LTB checks" on page 315 ). Hence for all cases dealt with by the
equations in the Finnish NA, this implementation will use Cl 6.3.2.3 to evaluate .
LT
319 STAAD.Pro
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3,
the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment, Mcr, (used to evaluate the non dimensional
slenderness) will be evaluated as previously given. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs
mentioned in the sections above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN
parameter=1.0 (See "Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB
checks" on page 315 ) will be considered. For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this
implementation will use the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input =
0), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H
Sections. For all other cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Also, I sections with plates will be treated as built-up sections only if the section has
been explicitly specified as a built-up section (i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design
input).
The NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional
buckling modes provides methods to calculate the N
and N
factors and therefore
cr,TF
cr,T
these methods are used to evaluate the elastic critical loads for the Finnish NA.
The critical axial load for Torsional buckling is evaluated as:
Ncr, T =
1
i o2
GI t +
EI w
2
I T2
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong
y
z
axis) respectively.
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is evaluated as:
Ncr, TF =
i o2
2
2
2 iy +iz
Ncr, y + Ncr, T
(Ncr, y + Ncr, T)
4Ncr, yN cr, T
i y2 + i z2
2
io
Note: Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below
refer to the corresponding clauses in the Polish-NA.
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that have been dealt
with in the Polish National Annex (hereafter referred to as PN-NA) and that are relevant to
the proposed implementation are:
Resistance of cross-sections,
321 STAAD.Pro
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0
M2
u y
Where:
f is the ultimate steel strength
u
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the PN-NA (NA 6
is specified).
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See
"Design Parameters" on page 261
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user
specified value (i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
Warning: The GB1 parameter that is being used for compression checks in builds
preceding this release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as this
parameter is no longer required in EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence, any legacy files that
use GB1 parameter will indicate an error message and the user will need to
substitute GB1 with GM1 in line with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
cr
Buckling:
This document provides a method to calculate M specifically for doubly symmetric
cr
sections only. Hence only doubly symmetric sections will be considered for this
method. The equation to evaluate M is given in the NCCI as:
cr
M cr = C1
k Iw +
(kL ) 2 k w I s
EI s
(kL ) GI t
2EI s
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of
1
2
the member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in
1
2
the tables below:
+1,00
1,00
+0,75
1,14
+0,50
1,31
+0,25
1,52
0,00
1,77
-0,25
2,05
-0,50
2,33
-0,75
2,57
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram
through the CMM parameter.
2. SN030a-EN-EU Mono-symmetrical uniform members under
323 STAAD.Pro
M cr = C1
EI s
(k x L )2
kx
k
w
Iw
Is
(k x L )2GI T
2
EI x
2
+ (C 2z e C3z 1) C2z e C 3z 1
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria.
1 2
3
This implementation will consider C , C , and C as given in the tables below:
1
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C , C ,
1 2
and C . The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended
3
member with UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the end
moments and transverse loading condition. You can use the C1, C2, and C3 parameters
to input the required values for C , C , and C to be used in calculating M .
1
cr
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2, and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU
and use the user input values of C1, C2, and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these
values from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is
free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member (k = kw = 1.0).
STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A value
of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above
methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no
warping restraints (i.e., CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5
or CMN = 0.7), this implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD
ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term zg in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of
application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section.
The value of zg is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is
negative if it acts away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the
load acts towards the shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear
center. The use will be allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a
value of ZG = 0 in the design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear
center of the section so that the term zg in the equation will have a value of zero.
LT,0
The Polish NA specifies the use of uses table 6.5 to work out the buckling curves for use in Cl.
6.3.2.3. Hence table 6.5 in PN-EN 1993-1-1 will be used for this.
These equations and factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of PN-EN 1993-1-1 to evaluate
the Lateral Torsional Buckling reduction factor .
LT
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005), both give equations to evaluate the LTB
reduction factor to be used in eqn. 6.55 of PN EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the imperfection factors to
be used for calculating . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of buckling curves for Rolled I
LT
Sections, Welded I Sections and Any other sections. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses
tables 6.5 and 6.3 to choose the buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however
only deals with Rolled I Sections and Welded I Sections.
325 STAAD.Pro
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of should be determined from.... Hence in the implementation of EC3
LT
(and the Finnish Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3
to evaluate . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl.
LT
6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Finnish National Annex gives equations to evaluate the imperfection factors to
be used for various section types (See "Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection
factors for LTB checks" on page 315 ). Hence for all cases dealt with by the equations in the
Finnish NA, this implementation will use Cl 6.3.2.3 to evaluate .
LT
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3,
the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment, M , (used to evaluate the non dimensional
cr
slenderness) will be evaluated as previously given. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs
mentioned in the sections above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN
parameter=1.0 (See "Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB
checks" on page 315 ) will be considered. For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this
implementation will use the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input =
0), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H
Sections. For all other cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Also, I sections with plates will be treated as built-up sections only if the section has
been explicitly specified as a built-up section (i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design
input).
Annex B by default. The proposed implementation of the Polish NA will also use Annex B for
Cl.6.3.3 checks.
The Polish NA also gives two additional simplified checks. This implementation will provide
for these additional checks as well. However as they are intended as optional checks, by
default, the program will not perform these checks. However, the user can invoke these
checks by using the PLG parameter. See "Design Parameters" on page 261
If the value of the PLG parameter is set to 1, the following two checks will be performed as per
Cl. NA.20.(2) and NA.20(3) respectively:
l
my
m /
y
LT
+ C mz m with 1- (I = y or z)
0
Where:
n = N /N
Ed
Rd
m = max M
y
y,Ed
(+ M
)/M
y, Ed
; m = max M
y, Rd
,Z Ed
(+ M
)/M
, Ed
Z Rd,
- LTB factor
LT
/W
pl,i
el,i
, or
Cl. NA.20.(3): This condition will only be checked for circular hollow sections.
n/ + [(k m )2 + (C
i
ii
mj
Where:
k - the interaction factor from table B.1 of PN-EN 1993-1-1
and n, m, Cmj are as above.
If the PLG parameter has been set to 1, the maximum among the following ratios will be
taken as being critical for Cl 6.3.3:
6.3.3: Eqn6.61
6.3.3: Eqn6.62
NA.20(2) and
NA.20(3)
If however PLG has been set to 0 (or not specified at all), the program will ignore the last two
checks in the list above.
327 STAAD.Pro
GI t +
1
i o2
EI w
I T2
2
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong
y
z
axis) respectively.
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is evaluated as:
Ncr, TF =
i o2
2 iy +iz
Ncr, y + Ncr, T
(Ncr, y + Ncr, T)
4Ncr, yN cr, T
i y2 + i z2
2
io
Note: Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below
refer to the corresponding clauses in the Singaporean-NA.
The following clauses are not implemented in STAAD.Pro:
Clause 6.3.2.4(1) B Slenderness for flexural buckling
The SINGAPORE NA specifies the value of c0 for I, H channel or box section to be
used in equation 6.59 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005 as 0.4. However, STAAD.Pro does not
use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is ignored for the
Singaporean National Annex.
Resistance of cross-sections,
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0
M2
= 1.1
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the SS-NA (NA 7
is specified)..
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See
"Design Parameters" on page 261
Note: If any of these parameters have been specified by the user as 0, STAAD.Pro will
ignore the specified value and use the default values as given above.
329 STAAD.Pro
k Iw +
(kL ) 2 k w I
EI
(kL ) GI t
2EI
2
+ (C 2Zg) C 2Zg
C1 and C2 are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of the
member. The NCCI provides values for C1 and C2 for the different cases as given in the tables
below:
+1,00
1,00
+0,75
1,14
+0,50
1,31
+0,25
1,52
0,00
1,77
-0,25
2,05
-0,50
2,33
-0,75
2,57
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through
the CMM parameter.
Note: Though this method could also be applicable to mono-symmetric built-up sections,
STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to specify/identify a mono-symmetric
built-up section. Hence this implementation will use this method only for TeeSections.
M cr = C1
EI z
(k x L )2
2
kx
k
w
Iw
I
(k x L )2GI T
2EI z
2
+ (C2zg C 3z 1) C2zg C 3z 1
The factors C1, C2 and C3 are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. This
implementation will consider C1, C2 and C3 as given in the tables below:
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C1, C2 and
C3. The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with
UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the end moments and transverse
loading condition. The user however can use the new C1, C2 and C3 parameters to input
the required values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr.
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2 and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU
and use the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these values
from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is
free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member (k = kw = 1.0).
STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A
331 STAAD.Pro
value of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above
methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no
warping restraints (i.e., CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5 or
CMN = 0.7), this implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV
1993-1-1:1992 Annex F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term zg in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of
application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The
value of zg is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it
acts away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts
towards the shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The
use will be allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG =
0 in the design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the
section so that the term zg in the equation will have a value of zero.
For rolled sections and hot-rolled & cold formed hollow sections:
LT,0 = 0.4
= 0.75
STAAD.Pro uses the buckling curves based on Table 6.5 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005. The
Singaporean-NA provides the values for the terms
and factors given in clause 6.3.2.3(1)
LT0
as follows:
Limits
Buckling
Curve
h/b 2
h/b 2
Note: This table does not specify which buckling curve is to be used in case of welded
doubly symmetric sections with h/b 3.1 and welded non-doubly symmetric
sections. Hence for these cases the new implementation will still use the method
specified in the base code as per clause 6.3.2.2(2).
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005) both give equations to evaluate the LTB reduction
factor to be used in eqn. 6.55 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the imperfection factors to
be used for calculating . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of buckling curves for Rolled I
LT
Sections, Welded I Sections and Any other sections. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses
tables 6.5 and 6.3 to choose the buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however
only deals with Rolled I Sections and Welded I Sections.
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of should be determined from.... Hence in the implementation of EC3
LT
(and the Singaporean Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl.
6.3.2.3 to evaluate . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will
LT
consider Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Singaporean National Annex states that Table 6.5 in SS EN 1993-1-1:2005
should be replaced with the table given in the NA (See section 4.3 of this document). Hence
for all cases dealt with by the table in the Singaporean NA, this implementation will choose
the buckling curves from the Singaporean National Annex. For any case that is not dealt with
by the table in the Singaporean NA, the program will use the method given in Cl. 6.3.2.2 of SS
EN 1993-1-1:2005.
For the following cross sections, the program will use the Table in the Singaporean NA for
choosing a buckling curve for LTB checks (when the SS EN has been specified):
333 STAAD.Pro
Angle Sections
For the following cross sections, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to
evaluate
LT
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3,
the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment, M , (used to evaluate the non dimensional
cr
slenderness) will be evaluated as given above. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs
mentioned in the sections above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN
parameter=1.0 (See section above) will be considered. For all other cases of the CMN parameter
values, this implementation will use the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input =
0), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H
Sections. For all other cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Also, I sections with plates will be treated as built-up sections only if the section has
been explicitly specified as a built-up section (i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design
input).
These values are for an end restraint factor of k = 1 (i.e., design parameter CMN = 1.0). Hence for
all other values of CMN (i.e., 0.7 or 0.5) this implementation will use the values of C from DD
1
ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F.
The program will use a default value of 1.0 for K . However, you can also input a custom value
c
of K by setting the design parameter KC to the desired value. If the KC parameter in the
c
design input is set to 0, then the program will automatically calculate its value. This will
cause the program to evaluate a value of C corresponding to the end conditions and the
1
Bending moment of the member and in turn calculate K as given in the NA. To evaluate C ,
c
1
the program will use the NCCI documents as previously described.
Where:
T =
A f y
N cr
Note: The Singaporean National Annex or EC3 does not deal with angle sections in
specific and hence this implementation will use the method used in the current
EC3 implementation to deal with slenderness of angle sections. In the current
implementation this is done as per cl 4.7.10 of BS 5950. This proposed
335 STAAD.Pro
implementation will still use the same method for single and double angle sections
to evaluate the slenderness.
Clause NA 3.2 of the Singaporean NA also requires that Where the section is not an I Section
or a hollow section and is a class1 or class 2 section, it will be treated as a class 3 section for the
purposes of this clause. Hence, for all Class 1 or Class 2 cross sections that are not I, H, SHS,
RHS or CHS sections, the elastic properties will be used for the purposes of 6.3.3 checks.
GI t +
1
i o2
EI w
2
I T2
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong
y
z
axis) respectively.
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is evaluated as:
Ncr, TF =
i o2
2
2
2 iy +iz
Ncr, y + Ncr, T
(Ncr, y + Ncr, T)
4Ncr, yN cr, T
i y2 + i z2
2
io
STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is
ignored for the Belgian National Annex.
Clause 6.3.2.4(2)B Modification factor kfl
STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is
ignored for the Belgian National Annex.
Note: Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below
refer to the corresponding clauses in the NBN-NA.
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that have been dealt
with in the Belgian National Annex (hereafter referred to as NBN-NA) and that are relevant
to the proposed implementation are:
Resistance of cross-sections,
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0
M2
= 1.25
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the PN-NA (NA
8 is specified).
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See
"Design Parameters" on page 261
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user
specified value (i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
337 STAAD.Pro
EI
(kL )
k I
k Iw +
w
(kL ) GI t
2EI
2
+ (C 2Zg) C 2Zg
C & C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions. The Annex
1
2
provides values for C & C for the different cases as given in Table1 and Table 2 of the Annex.
1
2
Table 1 deals with the condition of a simply supported member with end moments and the
value of C is determined by the end moment ratio (Refer to the NA for details). Clause 3.2 of
1
the National Annex however gives a formula to calculate C as:
1
C1 = 1.77 - 1.04
+0.272
2.60
The value of C2 is determined based on the Table 2 of the Annex, based on the loading and
end conditions as specified using the CMM parameter.
This NBN-NA considers three separate loading conditions:
l
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through
the CMM parameter.
Note: Though this method could also be applicable to mono-symmetric built-up sections,
STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to specify/identify a mono-symmetric
built-up section. Hence this implementation will use this method only for TeeSections.
The equation to evaluate M for mono symmetric sections is given as:
cr
M cr = C1
EI z
(k x L )2
2
kx
k
w
Iw
I
(k x L )2GI T
2EI z
2
+ (C2zg C 3z 1) C2zg C 3z 1
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. This
1 2
3
implementation will consider C1, C2 and C3 as given in the tables below:
Bend- k
z
ing
moment
diagram
= +1
339 STAAD.Pro
Value of
coefficients
C
1.- 1.00
0
f
0
f
>0
1.000
Bend- k
z
ing
moment
diagram
Value of
coefficients
C
0.- 1.05
5
f
0
f
>0
1.019
Bend- k
z
ing
moment
diagram
=
+3/4
341 STAAD.Pro
1.0
Value of
coefficients
C
f
0
1.14
f
>0
1.000
Bend- k
z
ing
moment
diagram
Value of
coefficients
C
0.- 1.15
9
f
0
f
>0
1.017
Bend- k
z
ing
moment
diagram
=
+1/2
343 STAAD.Pro
Value of
coefficients
C
1.- 1.31
0
f
0
f
>0
1.000
Bend- k
z
ing
moment
diagram
=
+1/4
=0
=1/4
Value of
coefficients
C
f
0
f
>0
0.- 1.35
7
1.000
1.- 1.50
2
1.000
0.- 1.65
0
1.000
1.- 1.70
7
1.000
0.- 1.85
6
1.000
=1/2
=3/4
= -1
1.- 2.6- -
f
0
0
Bending moment k
diagram
z
Value of
coefficients
C
345 STAAD.Pro
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2 and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU
and use the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these values
from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is
free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member (k = kw = 1.0).
STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A value
of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above
methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no
warping restraints (i.e., CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5 or
CMN = 0.7), this implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV
1993-1-1:1992 Annex F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term zg in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of
application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The
value of zg is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it
acts away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts
towards the shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The
use will be allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG =
0 in the design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the
section so that the term zg in the equation will have a value of zero.
LT0
2. If M is determined by ignoring the lateral restraints, the following values are used:
cr
LT0
The program evaluates which factors to use based on the CMN parameter. If CMN= 1.0
(default), then the program assumes the restraints are ignored and the second set of values is
used for
and . If CMN = 0.5, then the first set of
and values is used.
LT0
LT0
These factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of NBN-EN to evaluate the Lateral Torsional
Buckling reduction factor .
LT
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005) both give equations to evaluate the LTB reduction
factor to be used in eqn. 6.55 of NBN-EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the imperfection factors to
be used for calculating . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of buckling curves for Rolled I
LT
Sections, Welded I Sections and Any other sections. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses
tables 6.5 and 6.3 to choose the buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however
only deals with Rolled I Sections and Welded I Sections.
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of should be determined from.... Hence in the implementation of EC3
LT
(and the Belgian Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3
to evaluate . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl.
LT
6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Belgian National Annex gives equations to evaluate the imperfection factors
to be used for various section types. (See "Clause 6.3.2.3(1) LTB for rolled sections or
equivalent welded section" on page 346 ). Hence for all cases dealt with by the equations in
the NBN-NA, this implementation will use Cl 6.3.2.3 to evaluate .
LT
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3,
the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment,Mcr, (used to evaluate the non dimensional
slenderness) will be evaluated as given above. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs
mentioned in the sections above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN
parameter=1.0 (See "Clause 6.3.2.3(1) LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded section" on
page 346 ) will be considered. For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this
implementation will use the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
You can override the default behavior and specify the clause that is to be used for LTB checks.
This can be specified using the MTH design parameter (See "Design Parameters" on page 261).
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input
= 0), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H
Sections. For all other cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of NBN-EN 1993-11:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be treated as built-up sections only if the
section has been explicitly specified as a built-up section (i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0
in design input).
347 STAAD.Pro
functionality to work out the correction factor kc to be used in the modification factor f.
The program uses a default value of 1.0 for kc. However the user can also input a custom value
of kc by setting the design parameter KC to the desired value. The user can also get the
program to calculate the value of kc automatically by setting the value of the KC parameter
in the design input to 0. This will cause the program to work out kc from table 6.6 of NBN
EN 1993-1-1:2005. This will correspond to the end conditions and the bending moment of the
member (i.e the value of CMM parameter specified).
l
For CMM = 7 the program will choose the value of kc to be either 0.90 or 0.91 based on
the end moment ratio.
For CMM = 8 the program will choose the value of kc to be either 0.77 or 0.82 based on
the end moment ratio.
1
2
LT
N Ed
N cr ,i
1
i o2
GI t +
EI w
2
I T2
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong
y
z
axis) respectively.
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is evaluated as:
Ncr, TF =
i o2
2
2
2 iy +iz
Ncr, y + Ncr, T
(Ncr, y + Ncr, T)
4Ncr, yN cr, T
i y2 + i z2
2
io
Note: Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below
refer to the corresponding clauses in the MS-NA.
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that have been dealt
with in the Malaysian National Annex (hereafter referred to as MS-NA) and that are relevant
to the proposed implementation are:
Resistance of cross-sections,
349 STAAD.Pro
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0
M2
= 1.1
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the MS-NA (NA 9
is specified).
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See
"Design Parameters" on page 261
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user
specified value (i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
M cr = C1
k 2 I w
+
(kL ) 2 k w I S
EI
(kL ) GI t
2
EI S
2
+ (C 2Zg) C 2Zg
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of the
1
2
member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in Table 3.1
1
2
and Table 3.2.
The NCCI considers three separate loading conditions:
l
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through
the CMM parameter. The values of C and C may also be directly specified using the C1 and C2
1
2
parameters, respectively (required for CMM = 7 or CMM = 8).
implementation the elastic critical moment for Tee-Sections is evaluated using the method
in this Annex.
M cr = C1
EI z
(k x L )2
2
kx
k
w
Iw
I
(k x L )2GI T
2
EI z
2
+ (C2zg C 3z 1) C2zg C 3z 1
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. The
1 2
3
program considers C , C , and C as given in the tables 4.1 and 4.2 of the NCCI, based on the
1 2
3
CMMparameter.
The default value of CMM = 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with
uniformly distributed load (UDL)along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the
end moments and transverse loading condition. You use the C1, C2 and C3 parameters to
input the required values for C , C , and C , respectively, to be used in calculating M .
1
cr
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2 and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU
and use the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these values
from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: When CMM = 7 or CMM = 8, the values for C1, C2 and C3 parameters must be
manually specified.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is
free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member (k = kw = 1.0).
STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A
value of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above
methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no
warping restraints (i.e., CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5
or CMN = 0.7), this implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD
ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term zg in the equation to calculate M refers to the distance between the point of
cr
application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section.
The value of z is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative
g
if it acts away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts
towards the shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center.
351 STAAD.Pro
The use will be allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of
ZG = 0 in the design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the
section so that the term z in the equation will have a value of zero.
g
LT,0
LT,0
STAAD.Pro uses the buckling curves based on Table 6.5 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005, based on
different limits. This table again does not specify which buckling curve is to be used in case of
welded doubly symmetric sections with h/b 3.1 and welded non-doubly symmetric sections.
Hence for these cases the new implementation will still use the method specified in the base
code as per clause 6.3.2.2(2).
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005), both give equations to evaluate the LTB reduction
factor to be used in eqn. 6.55 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the imperfection factors to
be used for calculating . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of buckling curves for Rolled I
LT
Sections, Welded I Sections and Any other sections. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses
tables 6.5 and 6.3 to choose the buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however
only deals with Rolled I Sections and Welded I Sections.
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of should be determined from.... Hence in the implementation of EC3
LT
(and the MS NA) in STAAD.Pro, by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to
evaluate . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl.
LT
6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the MS NA states that Table 6.5 in MS EN 1993-1-1:2005 should be replaced with
the table given in the NA (See "Clause 6.3.2.3(1) LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded
section" on page 352). Hence for all cases dealt with by the table in the MS NA, this
implementation will choose the buckling curves from the MS NA. For any case that is not
dealt with by the table in the MS NA, the program will use the method given in Cl. 6.3.2.2 of
MS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Hence for the following cross sections the program will use the Table in the MS NA for
choosing a buckling curve for LTB checks (when the MS NA has been specified):
l
Angle Sections
For the following cross sections, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to
evaluate
LT
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3,
the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
In any case the Elastic critical moment Mcr (used to evaluate the non dimensional
slenderness) will be evaluated as described in "Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and
imperfection factors for LTB checks". Since the MS NA uses the NCCI documents
mentioned in the sections above, this implementation will only consider end restraint
conditions corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0. For all other cases of the CMN parameter
values, this implementation will use the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-11:1992.
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input
= 0), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H
Sections. For all other cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Also, I sections with plates will be treated as built-up sections only if the section
has been explicitly specified as a built-up section (i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in
design input).
353 STAAD.Pro
You can also manually specify a value for kc by setting the design parameter, KC, to the desired
value. The user can also get the program to calculate the value of kc automatically by setting
the value of the KC parameter in the design input to 0. This will cause the program to evaluate
a value of C corresponding to the end conditions and the Bending moment of the member
1
and in turn calculate k as given in the NA. To evaluate C , the program will use the NCCI
c
1
documents(See "Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB
checks" on page 350).
Note that for the MS NA, the program will attempt to evaluate k by default using the
c
equation in NA,
kc = 1 / C1
If k evaluates to be greater than 1.0, the program will then evaluate kc as per Table 6.6 of EN
c
1993-1-1:2005.
where
T =
A fy
N cr
for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes to calculate these. See "Clause 6.3.1.4 Slenderness for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling" on page 355 for details.
Note: The MSNAor EC3 does not deal with angle sections specifically and therefore
STAAD.Pro uses the method described in the EC3 implementation to deal with
slenderness of angle sections. This is done as per cl 4.7.10 of BS 5950.
Clause NA 3.2 of the MS NA also requires that Where the section is not an I Section or a
hollow section and is a class1 or class 2 section, it will be treated as a class 3 section for the
purposes of this clause. Hence for all Class 1 or Class 2 cross sections that are not I, H, SHS,
RHS or CHS sections, the elastic properties will be used for the purposes of 6.3.3 checks.
GI t +
1
i o2
EI w
2
I T2
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong
y
z
axis) respectively.
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is evaluated as:
Ncr, TF =
i o2
2
2
2 iy +iz
Ncr, y + Ncr, T
(Ncr, y + Ncr, T)
4Ncr, yN cr, T
i y2 + i z2
2
io
355 STAAD.Pro
STAAD
EC5
Partial factor for Material Property values. Reference Table 2.3 of EC-5-2004.
C. Kh Size Factor.
For members, subjected to tension, whose maximum c/s dimension is less than the
reference width in tension the characteristic strength in tension (ft0k) is to be
increased by the factor Kh.
For members, subjected to bending, whose depth is less than reference depth in
bending, the characteristic strength in bending (fmk) is to be increased by the factor
Kh.
As per clause 3.2(3) of EC 5- 2004, for rectangular solid timber with a characteristic
timber density 700 kg/m 3 the reference depth in bending or the reference width
k
(maximum cross-sectional dimension) is 150 mm.
The value of Kh = Minimum of {(150/h) 0.2 and 1.3) for such solid timber is
incorporated in the software. Please refer clause numbers 3.3 and 3.4 for the value of
Kh for Glued laminated timber and Laminated veneer lumber respectively.
D. KC90 Factor taking into account the load configuration, possibility of splitting and
degree of compressive deformation.
For members, subjected to compression, perpendicular to the direction of grain
alignment, this factor should be taken into account. Default value of 1 is used in
STAAD.Pro. User may override the value. Please refer clause 6.1.5 of EC-5-2004 in this
regard.
E. Km Factor considering re-distribution of bending stress in cross section.
357 STAAD.Pro
For members, subjected to bending, this factor is taken into account for stress checking.
For rectangular section the value of Km is 0.7, and this value is incorporated in
STAAD.Pro. User may override the value. Please refer clause 6.1.6 of EC-5-2004 in this
regard.
F. Kshape Factor depending on shape of cross section.
For members, subjected to torsional force, design torsional stress should be less than
equal design shear strength multiplied by the factor Kshape. This factor is determined
by STAAD.Pro internally using the guidelines of clause 6.1.8 of EC-5-2004.
t0d
Description
Design tensile stress parallel (at zero degree) to grain
alignment.
t90d
S
S
c0d
c90d
S
S
mzd
myd
S
S
vd
tor_d
t0d
t90d
c0d
c90d
alignment.
F
mzd
myd
vd
RATIO
l ,l
l ,l
z rel,z
y rel,y
0,05
0,05
Symbol
I
I
Description
Second moment of area about the weak y-axis.
tor
b, h
mk
m,k
0, mean
iii. Density -
SI
No.
Property
Symbol
Wood Type
Softwood (C)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Compressive Strength
perpendicular to grain
5.
Shear Strength
6.
0.6 * f
t,0,k
t,90,k
Hardwood (D)
m,k
c,0,k
m,k
0.007*r
c,90,k
v,k
) 0.45
5 * (f
0.0015*r
0,05
0.67* E
0,
0.84* E
mean
7.
8.
9.
Shear Modulus
90,mean
mean
0,05
/30 E
0,mean
0,
mean
0,mean
0,mean
0,05
/15
/16
/16
The values of the characteristic strengths computed using the above equations, may differ
with the tabulated values in Table-1 of EN 338:2003. However, in all such cases, the values
obtained from the provided equations are treated as actual and is used by the program, as the
values of Table-1 are based on these equations.
359 STAAD.Pro
361 STAAD.Pro
If both
and
are less than or equal to 0.3 the following conditions should be
rel,z
rel,y
satisfied:
(Sc0d /Fc0d )2 +(Smzd /Fmzd ) +Km(Smyd /Fmyd ) RATIO
(Sc0d /Fc0d )2 +Km(Smzd /Fmzd ) +(Smyd /Fmyd ) RATIO
In other cases, the conditions in Equations 6.23 and 6.24 of EC-5 2004 should be
satisfied.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 7E.2-Timber Design EC 5: Part 1-1 Parameters
Parameter Name
CODE
Default Value
Description
ALPHA
0.0
DFF
None
363 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name
Default Value
DJ1
Description
Start node number for a
physical member under
consideration for Deflection
Check.
DJ2
KC90
1.0
KLEF
1.0
(Member Length)
KY
1.0
(Member Length)
Parameter Name
KZ
Default Value
1.0
(Member Length)
Description
Effective Length Factor for
Local-z-axis. (Ref. Cl.6.3.2), for
the computation of the
relative slenderness ratios.
LDC
MTYP
RATIO
1.0
SCL
365 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name
Default Value
TRACK
Description
Degree/Level of Details of
design output results.
1.0 = Print the design
output at the minimal
detail level
2.0 = Print the design
output at the
intermediate detail level
3.0 = Print the design
output that the maximum
detail level
TSC
6 (C24)
Softwood: 1 = C14, 2 =
C16, 3 = C18, 4 = C20, 5
= C22, 6 = C24, 7 = C27,
8 = C30, 9 = C35, 10 =
C40, 11 = C45, 12 = C50.
Hardwood: 13 = D30, 14
= D35, 15 = D40, 16 =
D50, 17 = D60, 18 =
D70.
Solution
Characteristic material properties for timber:
Modification factor Kmod = 0.80 from table 3.1
Material factors m = 1.30 from table 2.3
fc0k = 21.00 N/mm
Fc0d = (Kmodfc0k )/m = (0.8021.00)/1.30 = 12.92 N/mm [Cl 2.4.1(1)P]
Cross section loads:
Fx = 50.000 kN
Compression parallel to the grain:
Sc0d = (1000xFx )/A = (1000x50.000)/14454 = 3.46N/mm < 12.92N/mm (Fc0d )
The ratio of actual compressive stress to allowable compressive strength:
Sc0d /Fc0d = 3.46 / 12.92 = 0.268 < 1.0 [Cl. 6.1.4.(1)P]
Check for Slenderness:
Slenderness ratios:
z = (1000/57) = 17.54
y = (1000/21) = 47.62
E0,mean = 1.1031 kN/m2
As timber grade is C24 (i.e., Soft Wood)
E0,05 = 0.67E0,mean = 0.739 kN/m2
[Annex A,EN 338:2003]
rel,z = z/(fc0k /E0,05 )1/2 = 17.54/(21.00/0.739)1/2 = 0.298
367 STAAD.Pro
rel,y
Comparison
Table 7E.3-EC 5: Part 1-1 Verification Problem 1
Criteria
Critical Ratio
(Cl. 6.3.2)
0.327
none
Input File
The following file is included AS C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\Eur\EC5 ver 1.std.
STAAD SPACE
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 1.0 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC WOOD
E 1.10316E+007
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 0.00231749
ALPHA 5.5E-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL WOOD MEMB 1
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 PRIS YD 0.198 ZD 0.073
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -50
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE TIMBER EC5
ALPHA 0 ALL
LDC 3 ALL
SCL 2 ALL
TSC 6 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The member checking part of the output file:
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (EC5 )
***********************
ALL UNITS ARE - KN
MEMBER
TABLE
LOADING/
MY
RATIO/
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1
PRIS ZD =
0.073 YD =
0.198
PASS
CL.6.3.2
0.327
1
50.00 C
0.00
0.00
0.0000
369 STAAD.Pro
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| AX =
0.01 IY =
0.00 IZ =
0.00
|
| LEZ =
1.00 LEY =
1.00
|
|
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (NEW MMS)
|
|
FBY =
14.769 FBZ
=
14.769
|
|
FC
=
12.859
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES : (NEW MMS)
|
|
fby =
0.000 fbz
=
0.000
|
|
fc
=
3.459
|
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Solution
Characteristic material properties for timber:
rel,y
371 STAAD.Pro
Comparison
Table 7E.4-EC 5: Part 1-1 Verification Problem 2
Criteria
Critical Ratio
(Cl. 6.3.2)
0.616
none
Input File
The following file is included AS C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\Eur\EC5 ver 2.std.
STAAD SPACE
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 1 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC WOOD
E 1.10316E+007
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 0.00231749
ALPHA 5.5E-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL WOOD MEMB 1
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 PRIS YD 0.198 ZD 0.073
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
JOINT LOAD
Output
The member checking part of the output file:
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (EC5 )
***********************
ALL UNITS ARE - KN
MEMBER
TABLE
LOADING/
MY
RATIO/
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1
PRIS ZD =
0.073 YD =
0.198
PASS
CL.6.3.2
0.616
1
5.00 C
1.00
-2.00
0.0000
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| AX =
0.01 IY =
0.00 IZ =
0.00
|
| LEZ =
1.00 LEY =
1.00
|
|
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (NEW MMS)
|
|
FBY =
14.769 FBZ
=
14.769
|
|
FC
=
12.859
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES : (NEW MMS)
|
373 STAAD.Pro
fby
5.686 fbz
4.193
|
|
fc
=
0.346
|
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
375 STAAD.Pro
Section 8
Finnish Codes
377 STAAD.Pro
379 STAAD.Pro
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 8A.1-Finnish Concrete Design per B4 Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default
Value
-
Description
ACTAGE
70
BRACE
0.0
CLEAR
25 mm
DRYCIR
100
EFACE
0.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
ELY
1.0
ELZ
1.0
ENVIR
Environment class
1. LA Least aggressive
2. NA Aggressive
3. MA Very aggressive
FC
FYMAIN
35 N/mm 2
LAGE
7 days
MAX
MAIN
32
MINMAIN
10
MOY
moy factor
MOZ
moz factor
NMAG
nmag factor
REIANG
RELHUM
40
RFACE
381 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
SFACE
Default
Value
0
Description
90
STIRDIA
10 mm
TORANG
45
TRACK
10
Stirrup diameter
Default
Value
none
Description
BEAM
0.0
1.0
BZ
1.0
CB
1.0
CMZ
CY
CZ
1.5
Default
see NS
3472
DMAX
100.0
[cm]
DMIN
0.0
[cm]
FYLD
235
MF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
SSY
0.0
383 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
SSZ
Default
Value
Description
0.0
TRACK
0.0
UNL
Member
length
The parameter CMY will, when given with negative value, define an inside pressure in pipe
members. The pressure corresponds to given water depth in meters.
The parameter CB defines the value with respect to calculation of the ideal lateral buckling
moment for single symmetric wide flange profiles, ref. NS app. 5.2.2.
385 STAAD.Pro
Section 9
French Codes
387 STAAD.Pro
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 9A.1-French Concrete Design B.A.E.L. Parameters
Parameter Default
Name
Value
CODE
BAEL
Description
CLEAR
* 20
mm
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
*0.0
* 30 N/
mm 2
Parameter Default
Name
Value
Description
FYMAIN
* 300
N/mm 2
FYSEC
* 300
N/mm 2
MAX
MAIN
50 mm
MINMAIN 8 mm
MINSEC
8 mm
MMAG
1.0
SFACE
*0.0
NSE
CTION
10
TRACK
0.0
WIDTH
ZD
* These values must be provided in the units currently being used for input.
389 STAAD.Pro
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 300 mm
width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be
assumed to be circular with a 300 mm diameter. Note that area (AX) is not provided for these
members. If shear areas (AY & AZ) are to be considered in analysis, the user may provide them
along with YD and ZD. Also note that moments of inertia may be provided, but if not
provided, the program will calculate values from YD and ZD.
391 STAAD.Pro
393 STAAD.Pro
Moment capacities about both axes are calculated using the procedures of sections 4.5 and
4.6. Lateral torsional buckling is considered in calculating ultimate twisting moment per
section 5.22 of the specification. The parameter UNL (see Table 7B.1) must be used to specify
the unsupported length of the compression flange for a laterally unsupported member. Note
that this length is also referred to as twisting length.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 9B.1-French Steel Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default Value
FRENCH
Description
BEAM
0.0
C1
395 STAAD.Pro
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
C2
1.0
DFF
None
(Mandatory
for
deflection
check)
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
DMAX
100.0 cm.
DMIN
0.0 cm.
FYLD
250.0 MPa
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
NSF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
Parameter
Name
SAME*
Default Value
0.0
Description
TRACK
0.0
UNF
1.0
UNL
Member
Length
*For angles, if the original section is an equal angle, then the selected section will be an equal
angle and vice versa for unequal angles.
397 STAAD.Pro
Note: COND CRITIQUE refers to the section of the CM 66 (Revn. 80) specification which
governed the design.
If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, calculated member capacities will be printed. The
following is a detailed description of printed items:
PC = Member Compression Capacity
TR = Member Tension Capacity
MUZ = Member Moment Capacity (about z-axis)
MUY = Member Moment Capacity (about y-axis)
VPZ = Member Shear Capacity (z-axis)
VPY = Member Shear Capacity (y-axis)
STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for designing structural members as individual
components of an analyzed structure. The member design facilities provide the user with the
ability to carry out a number of different design operations. These facilities may be used
selectively in accordance with the requirements of the design problem. The operations to
perform a design are:
l
Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design.
These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times depending upon the design
requirements.
Currently STAAD supports steel design of wide flange, S, M, HP shapes, angle, double angle,
channel, double channel, beams with cover plate, composite beams and code checking of
prismatic properties.
Sample Input data for Steel Design:
UNIT METER
PARAMETER
CODE FRENCH
NSF 0.85 ALL
UNL 10.0 MEMBER 7
KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
9B.8.2 HE shapes
HE shapes are specified as follows.
3 5 TA ST HEA120A
7 10 TA ST HEM140
13 14 TA ST HEB100
9B.8.4 T Shapes
Tee sections are not input by their actual designations, but instead by referring to the I beam
shapes from which they are cut. For example,
1 5 TA T IPE140
2 8 TA T HEM120
9B.8.5 U Channels
Shown below is the syntax for assigning 4 different names of channel sections.
399 STAAD.Pro
1 TO 5 TA ST UAP100
6 TO 10 TA ST UPN220
11 TO 15 TA ST UPN240A
16 TO 20 TA ST UAP250A
In the above set of commands, member 11 is a back-to-back double channel UAP150 with no
spacing in between. Member 17 is a double channel UAP250A with a spacing of 0.5 length
units between the channels.
9B.8.7 Angles
Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is
specified as follows:
16 20 TA ST L30X30X2.7
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 30mm and a leg thickness of 2.7mm.
This specification may be used when the local Z axis corresponds to the z-z axis specified in
Chapter 2. If the local Y axis corresponds to the z-z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse angle)
should be used instead of ST.
17 21 TA RA L25X25X4
22 24 TA RA L100X100X6.5
Note that if the leg thickness is a round number such as 4.0, only the number 4 appears in the
section name, the decimal part is not part of the section name.
Members 64 and 78 are tubes with a depth of 50mm, width of 25mm and a wall thickness of
2.7mm. Members 66 and 73 are tubes with a depth of 200mm, width of 100mm and a wall
thickness of 8.0mm. Unlike angles, the ".0" in the thickness is part of the section name.
Tubes can also be input by their dimensions instead of by their table designations. For
example,
6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
is a tube that has a depth of 8 length units, width of 6 length units, and a wall thickness of
0.5 length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed for TUBE
sections specified in this way.
Members 8 to 28 are pipes 42.4mm in dia, having a wall thickness of 2.6mm. Members 3, 64
and 78 are pipes 219.1mm in dia, having a wall thickness of 12.5mm.
Circular hollow sections may also be provided by specifying the outside and inside diameters
of the section. For example,
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 length units and inside dia. of 20 length units. Only
code checking, no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used.
9B.8.11 Example
SAMPLE FILE CONTAINING FRENCH SHAPES
STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORD
401 STAAD.Pro
1 0 0 0 15 140 0 0
MEMB INCI
1 1 2 14
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES FRENCH
* IPE SHAPES
1 TA ST IPEA120
* IPN SHAPES
2 TA ST IPN380
*HE SHAPES
3 TA ST HEA200
* T SHAPES
4 TA T HEM120
* U CHANNELS
5 TA ST UAP100
* DOUBLE U CHANNELS
6 TA D UAP150 SP 0.5
* ANGLES
7 TA ST L30X30X2.7
* REVERSE ANGLES
8 TA RA L25X25X4
* DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK
* TO BACK
9 TA SD L30X20X4 SP 0.25
* DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK
* TO BACK
10 TA LD L80X40X6 SP 0.75
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE
* HOLLOW SECTIONS)
11 TA ST TUB50252.7
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE
* HOLLOW SECTIONS)
12 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
* PIPES (CIRCULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS)
13 TA ST PIP422.6
* PIPES (CIRCULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS)
14 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
PRINT MEMB PROP
FINI
403 STAAD.Pro
Section 10
German Codes
405 STAAD.Pro
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250 mm
width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be
assumed to be circular with 350 mm diameter. It is absolutely imperative that the user not
provide the cross section area (AX) as an input.
analysis, use the command PDELTA ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS in the input file.
The user must note that to take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading
must be provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact
that load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments, whereas a
primary load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on the deflections. Also, note
that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load etc.) should be provided by the user.
STAAD does not factor the loads automatically. The column is designed for the total
moment which is the sum of the primary and secondary forces. The secondary moments can
be compared to those calculated using the charts of DIN 1045.
407 STAAD.Pro
"balance" shear. Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance shear forces acting
on these sections. Stirrups are assumed to be U-shaped for beams with no torsion, and closed
hoops for beams subject to torsion.
409 STAAD.Pro
parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as
Millimeter and Newton before performing the concrete design.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 10A.1-German Concrete Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default Value
Description
CLEAR
25 mm
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0
1.0
ELZ
1.0
FC
25 N/mm 2
FYMAIN
420 N/mm 2
FYSEC
420 N/mm 2
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
MAXMAIN
50 mm
MINMAIN
16 mm
MINSEC
8 mm
MMAG
1.0
NSECTION
10
SFACE
0.0
SRA
0.0
411 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
TRACK
Default Value
0.0
Description
WIDTH
ZD
413 STAAD.Pro
10B.1 General
This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of the DIN code.
The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis
and allowable stress design. Facilities are available for member selection as well as code
checking. Two major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by
stability considerations. The following sections describe the salient features of the design
approach.
Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceedance of the allowable
stresses or capacities and the most economical section is selected on the basis of the least
weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness
requirements and the stability criteria. It is recommended that you use the following steps in
performing the steel design:
1. Specify the geometry and loads and perform the analysis.
2. Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values.
3. Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection.
10B.2 AnalysisMethodology
Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done
for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed
complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and in using appropriate load factors to
create necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular
stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed
and the results combined with static analysis results.
10B.4.2 HE Shapes
The designation for HE shapes is similar to that for IPE shapes.
25 TO 35 TA ST HEB300
23 56 TA ST HEA160
10B.4.3 I Shapes
I shapes are identified by the depth of the section. The following example illustrates the
designation.
14 15 TA ST I200 (INDICATES AN I-SECTION WITH 200MM DEPTH)
10B.4.4 T Shapes
Tee sections are not input by their actual designations, but instead by referring to the I beam
shapes from which they are cut. For example,
1 5 TA T HEA220
2 8 TA T IPE120
415 STAAD.Pro
10B.4.5 U Channels
The example below provides the command for identifying two channel sections. The former
(U70X40) has a depth of 70mm and a flange width of 40mm. The latter (U260) has a depth of
260mm.
11 TA D U70X40
27 TA D U260
10B.4.7 Angles
Two types of specifications may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is
specified as follows:
16 20 TA ST L20X20X2.5
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 20mm and a leg thickness of 2.5mm.
The above specification may be used when the local z-axis corresponds to the Z-Z axis specified
in Chapter 2. If the local y-axis corresponds to the Z-Z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse
angle) may be used.
17 21 TA RA L40X20X5
Circular hollow sections may also be provided by specifying the outside and inside diameters
of the section. For example,
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units. Only code
checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used.
is the specification for a tube having sides of 100mm x 60mm and the wall thickness of
3.6mm.
Tubes, like pipes can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and Thickness)
instead of by their table designations.
6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
is a tube that has a height of 8, a width of 6, and a wall thickness of 0.5 in current length
units. Only code checking and no member selection will be performed for TUBE sections
specified this way.
10B.4.11 Example
SAMPLE INPUT FILE CONTAINING GERMAN SHAPES
STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0 15 140 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2 14
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES GERMAN
417 STAAD.Pro
* IPE SHAPES
1 TA ST IPEA120
* HE SHAPES
2 TA ST HEB300
* I SHAPES
3 TA ST I200
* T SHAPES
4 TA T HEA220
* U CHANNELS
5 TA ST U70X40
* DOUBLE U CHANNELS
6 TA D U260
* ANGLES
7 TA ST L20X20X2.5
* REVERSE ANGLES
8 TA RA L40X20X5
* DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK TO BACK
9 TA LD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
* DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK TO BACK
10 TA SD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
* PIPES
11 TA ST PIP602.9
* PIPES
12 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
* TUBES
13 TA ST TUB100603.6
* TUBES
14 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 WT 0.5
*
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES
FINISH
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
419 STAAD.Pro
Default Value
Description
BEAM
0.0
CB
CMM
1.0
DMAX
1.0 m
DMIN
0.0 m
KY
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
KZ
1.0
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
PY
240 N/sq.mm
Strength of steel.
NSF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
SAME
0.0
SBLT
SGR
0.0
Grade of steel:
0. St 37-2
1. St 52-3
2. St E 355
TRACK
0.0
UNF
421 STAAD.Pro
1.0
Parameter
Name
UNL
Default Value
Member
Length
Description
423 STAAD.Pro
Section 11
Indian Codes
425 STAAD.Pro
will be done accordingly. In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm
depth and 250mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width
provided, will be assumed to be circular with 350 mm diameter. The third set numbers in the
above example represents a T-shape with 750 mm flange width, 200 width, 400 mm overall
depth and 100 mm flange depth (See section 6.20.2). The program will determine whether the
section is rectangular, flanged or circular and the beam or column design.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Default Value
Description
BRACING
0.0
Beam Design:
A value of 1.0 means the
effect of axial force will
be taken into account
for beam design.
Column Design:
correspond to the terms
"Braced" and "Unbraced"
described in Notes 1, 2,
and 3 of Clause 39.7.1 of
IS456:2000.
1. The column is unbraced about
major axis.
2. The column is unbraced about
minor axis.
3. The column is unbraced about
both axis.
CLEAR
25 mm
40 mm
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0
427 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
ELZ
1.0
ELY
1.0
ENSH
0.0
30 N/mm 2
FYMAIN
415 N/mm 2
Parameter
Name
FYSEC
Default Value
415 N/mm 2
Description
MINMAIN
10 mm
MAXMAIN
60 mm
MINSEC
8 mm
MAXSEC
12 mm
RATIO
4.0
REINF
0.0
RENSH
0.0
RFACE
4.0
SFACE
SPSMAIN
429 STAAD.Pro
0.0
25 mm
Parameter
Name
TORSION
Default Value
0.0
Description
0. torsion to be considered in
beam design.
1. torsion to be neglected in beam
design.
TRACK
0.0
Beam Design:
0. output consists of
reinforcement details at START,
MIDDLE, and END.
1. critical moments are printed in
addition to TRACK 0.0 output.
2. required steel for intermediate
sections defined by NSECTION
are printed in addition to
TRACK 1.0 output.
Column Design:
0. reinforcement details are
printed.
1. column interaction analysis
results are printed in addition
to TRACK 0.0 output.
2. a schematic interaction
diagram and intermediate
interaction values are printed
in addition to TRACK 1.0
output.
ULY
1.0
ULZ
1.0
WIDTH
ZD
11A.3.1 Notes
a. You may specify reinforcing bar combinations through the
BAR COMBINATIONcommand. Refer to Section 9A.8 for details.
b. ELY and ELZ parameters are used to calculate effective length of column to find
whether it is a short or long column. Please refer CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000.
In CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, you will find two term, l and l , which STAAD calculates
ex
ey
as:
l
l = ELZ multiplied by the member length (distance between the two nodes of
ex
the member)
l = ELY multiplied by the member length (distance between the two nodes of
ey
the member)
For the term "D" in CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, STAAD uses the YD dimension of the
column.
For the term "b" in CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, STAAD uses the ZD dimension of the
column.
c. ULY and ULZ parameters are used to calculate unsupported length of column to find
minimum eccentricity. Please refer CL 25.4 of IS456:2000.
In CL 25.4 of IS456:2000, you will find an expression "unsupported length of column".
This term is calculated as
l
d. The value of the ENSH parameter (other than 0.0 and 1.0) is used only when the span of
a beam is subdivided into two or more parts. When this condition occurs, the RENSH
parameter is also to be used.
The span of the beam is subdivided four parts, each of length L meter. The shear
strength will be enhanced up to X meter from both supports. The input should be the
following:
Steps:
1. ENSH L MEMB 1 =>
Shear strength will be enhanced throughout the length
of the member 1, positive sign indicates length measured from start of the
431 STAAD.Pro
member
2. ENSH (X-L) MEMB 2 => Shear strength will be enhanced up to a length (X-L) of
the member 2, length measured from the start of the member
3. ENSH L MEMB 4 => Shear strength will be enhanced throughout the length
of the member 4, negative sign indicates length measured from end of the
member
4. ENSH (X-L) MEMB 3 => Shear strength will be enhanced up to a length (X-L) of
the member 3, length measured from the end of the member
5. RENSH L MEMB 2 3 => Nearest support lies at a distance L from both the
members 2 and 3.
6. DESIGN BEAM 1 TO 4=> This will enhance the shear strength up to length X
from both ends of the beam consisting of members 1 to 4 and gives spacing
accordingly.
At section = y1 from start of member 1 av = y1
At section = y2 from the start of member 2 av = y2+L
At section = y3 from the end of member 3 av = y3+L
At section = y4 from end of member 4 av = y4
where c, enhanced = 2dc/av
At section 0.0, av becomes zero. Thus enhanced shear strength will become infinity.
However for any section shear stress cannot exceed c, max. Hence enhanced shear
strength is limited to a maximum value of c, max.
sidesway (Clause 39.7.1 and 39.7.1.1,IS: 456 - 2000). The rules of Clause 39.7.1 have been
implemented in STAAD.Pro. They will be checked if the ELY and ELZ parameters are
specified.
Considering all these information, a P-Delta analysis, as performed by STAAD may be used for
the design of concrete members.
Note: To take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be
provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the
fact that load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments
(i.e., analysis results), whereas a primary load case is revised during the P-delta
analysis based on the deflections. Loads can be combined prior to analysis using
the REPEAT LOADcommand.
Note: You must specify the appropriate load factors (e.g., 1.5 for dead load, etc.) as STAAD
does not factor the loads automatically.
433 STAAD.Pro
choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at 11 equally spaced sections from which
the final detail drawing can be prepared.
N O.
D E S I G N
R E S U L T
S
M20
Fe415 (Main)
Fe250
(Sec.)
LENGTH:
COVER: 25.0 mm
6400.0 mm
SIZE:
300.0 mm X
400.0 mm
2666.7 |
0.00
94.28
0.00
1
|
10.10
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
3200.0 |
0.00
96.98
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
3733.3 |
0.00
94.28
0.00
1
| -10.10
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
4266.7 |
0.00
86.20
0.00
1
| -20.20
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
4800.0 |
0.00
72.73
0.00
1
| -30.31
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
5333.3 |
0.00
53.88
0.00
1
| -40.41
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
5866.7 |
0.00
29.63
0.00
1
| -50.51
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
6400.0 |
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
| -60.61
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
--------------------------------------------------------------------------SUMMARY OF REINF. AREA (Sq.mm)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------SECTION |
TOP
|
BOTTOM
|
STIRRUPS
(in mm) | Reqd./Provided reinf.
| Reqd./Provided reinf.
|
(2 legged)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------0.0 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )|
0.00/ 981.75( 2-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
533.3 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 237.32/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
1066.7 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
1600.0 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
2133.3 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 773.83/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
2666.7 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 863.91/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
3200.0 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 894.99/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
3733.3 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 863.91/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
4266.7 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 773.83/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
435 STAAD.Pro
4800.0 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25 )|
@ 180 mm
5333.3 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
5866.7 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 237.32/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
6400.0 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )|
0.00/ 981.75( 2-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
--------------------------------------------------------------------------8
N O.
1 D E S I G N
Fe415 (Main)
R E S U L T S
Fe250
(Sec.)
LENGTH: 3000.0 mm
CROSS SECTION: 400.0 mm X 600.0 mm
COVER: 40.0 mm
** GUIDING LOAD CASE:
1 END JOINT:
1 SHORT COLUMN
DESIGN FORCES (KNS-MET)
----------------------DESIGN AXIAL FORCE (Pu)
About Y
INITIAL MOMENTS
120.00
MOMENTS DUE TO MINIMUM ECC.
40.00
SLENDERNESS RATIOS
MOMENTS DUE TO SLENDERNESS EFFECT
2000.00
About Z
160.00
52.00
:
:
Note: The bar sizes should be specified in the order of increasing size (i.e., MD2 bar
diameter should be greater than MD1 bar diameter).
The beam length is divided into three parts, two at its ends and one at span. Ld gives the
development length to be provided at the two ends of each section.
The typical output for bar combination is shown below:
OUTPUT FOR BAR COMBINATION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
M A I N
R E I N F O R C E M E N T
|
437 STAAD.Pro
--------------------------------------------------------------------------SECTION |
0.0- 1600.0
|
1600.0- 4800.0
|
4800.06400.0
|
|
mm
|
mm
|
mm
|
--------------------------------------------------------------------------TOP
|
2-16
|
2-16
|
216
|
|
in 1 layer(s)
|
in 1 layer(s)
|
in 1
layer(s)
|
Ast Reqd|
0.00
|
0.00
|
0.00
|
Prov|
402.29
|
402.29
|
402.29
|
Ld (mm) |
752.2
|
1175.3
|
752.2
|
--------------------------------------------------------------------------BOTTOM |
4-16
|
2-16
+ 2-25 |
416
|
|
in 1 layer(s)
|
in 1 layer(s)
|
in 1
layer(s)
|
Ast Reqd|
632.82
|
894.99
|
632.82
|
Prov|
804.57
|
1384.43
|
804.57
|
Ld (mm) |
752.2
|
1175.3
|
752.2
|
--------------------------------------------------------------------------============================================================================
Refer to Section 5.55 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details on shear wall
design.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 11A.2-Shear Wall Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
439 STAAD.Pro
Default Value
Description
CLEAR
25 mm
EMAX
36
EMIN
FYMAIN
415 Mpa
FC
30 Mpa
Compressive strength of
concrete, in current
units.
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
HMIN
Minimum size of
horizontal reinforcing
bars (range 6 mm 36
mm). If input is 6
(integer number) the
program will assume 6
mm diameter bar.
HMAX
36
Maximum size of
horizontal reinforcing
bars (range 6 mm 36
mm). If input is 6
(integer number) the
program will assume 6
mm diameter bar.
KSLENDER
1.0
LMAX
16
LMIN
TWOLAYERED
Reinforcement placement
mode:
0. single layer, each
direction
1. two layers, each
direction
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
VMAX
36
VMIN
441 STAAD.Pro
30.
Design for in-plane bending and vertical load
(denoted by Mz & Fy in the shear wall force output)
Walls when subjected to combined in-plane horizontal and vertical forces produce in-plane
bending in conjunction with vertical load. According to clause no. 32.3.1, in-plane bending
may be neglected in case a horizontal cross section of the wall is always under compression
due combined effect of horizontal and vertical loads. Otherwise, the section is checked for
combined vertical load and in-plane moment as column with axial load and uni-axial
bending. For this purpose, the depth is taken as 0.8 x horizontal length of wall and breadth is
the thickness of the wall. The reinforcement is concentrated at both ends (edges) of the wall.
The edge reinforcement is assumed to be distributed over a length of 0.2 times horizontal
length on each side. Minimum reinforcements are according to clause no. 32.5.(a). Maximum
4% reinforcement is allowed.
Design for in-plane shear
(denoted by Fxy in the shear wall force output)
By default, the program does not design only at the critical section but at all the horizontal
sections. By suitable use of the surface division command, design at critical section as per
clause no. 32.4.1 can be performed.
The design for in-plane shear is done as per clause no. 32.4. The nominal shear stress is
calculated as per clause no. 32.4.2 and it is checked with the maximum allowable shear stress
as per clause no. 32.4.2.1. The design shear strength of concrete is calculated as per clause no.
32.4.3. Design of shear reinforcement is done as per clause no. 32.4.4. Minimum reinforcements
are as per clause no. 32.5.
Design for vertical load and out-of-plane vertical bending
(denoted by Fy and My respectively in the shear wall force output)
Apart from the in-plane bending and horizontal shear force, the wall is also subjected to outof-plane bending in the vertical and horizontal directions. The part of the wall which is not
having edge reinforcements (i.e., a zone of depth 0.6 x Length of the wall), is designed again as
column under axial load (i.e., vertical load) and out-of-plane vertical bending. The minimum
reinforcements and maximum allowable spacings of reinforcements are as per clause no. 32.5
Design for out-of-plane horizontal bending
(denoted by Mx in the shear wall force output)
The horizontal reinforcement which is already provided for in-plane shear is checked against
out-of-plane horizontal bending. The wall is assumed as a slab for this purpose.
Design for out-of-plane shears
(denoted by Qx and Qy in the shear wall force output)
The out-of-plane shear arises from out-of-plane loading. The nominal shear stresses are
calculated as per clause no. 40.1. Maximum allowable shear stresses are as per table 20. For
shear force in the vertical direction, shear strength of concrete section is calculated as per
section 4.1 of SP 16 : 1980 considering vertical reinforcement as tension reinforcement.
Similarly, for shear force in the horizontal direction, shear strength of concrete section is
calculated considering horizontal reinforcement as tension reinforcement. Shear
reinforcements in the form of links are computed as per the provisions of clause no. 40.4.
11A.8.3 Example
The following example illustrates the input for the definition of shear wall and design of the
wall.
SET DIVISION 12
SURFACE INCIDENCES
2 5 37 34 SUR 1
19 16 65 68 SUR 2
11 15 186 165 SUR 3
10 6 138 159 SUR 4
SURFACE PROPERTY
1 TO 4 THI 18
SUPPORTS
1 7 14 20 PINNED
2 TO 5 GEN PIN
6 TO 10 GEN PIN
11 TO 15 GEN PIN
19 TO 16 GEN PIN
SURFACE CONSTANTS
E 2.17185E+007
POISSON 0.17
DENSITY 23.5616
ALPHA 1E-005
443 STAAD.Pro
VMIN 12
HMIN 12
EMIN 12
DESIGN SHEA LIST 1 TO 4
END
Note: If the sd1, , sdj or the od1, , odk list does not include all node-to-node
segments, or if any of the numbers listed equals zero, then the corresponding
division number is set to the default value (=10, or as previously input by the
SET DIVISION command).
Default locations for stress/force output, design, and design output are set as follows:
SURFACE DIVISION X xd
SURFACE DIVISION Y yd
Where:
Note: xd and yd represent default numbers of divisions for each edge of the
surface where output is requested. The output is provided for sections
located between division segments. For example, if the number of divisions
= 2, then the output will be produced for only one section (at the center of
the edge).
2. Stress/force output printing
Values of internal forces may be printed out for any user-defined section of the wall.
The general format of the command is as follows:
PRINT SURFACE FORCE (ALONG ) (AT a) (BETWEEN d1, d2) LIST s1, ,si
Where:
local axis of the surface element (X or Y),
a distance along the axis from start of the member to the full
cross-section of the wall,
d1, d2 coordinates in the direction orthogonal to , delineating a
fragment of the full cross-section for which the output is desired. **
s1, ,si list of surfaces for output generation
** The range currently is taken in terms of local axis. If the local axis is directed away
from the surface, the negative range is to be entered.
445 STAAD.Pro
Note: If the command AT is omitted, the design proceeds for all cross sections of
the wall or panels, as applicable, defined by the SURFACE DIVISION X or
SURFACE DIVISION Y input values.
a. No panel definition.
Design is performed for the specified horizontal full cross-section, located at a
distance c from the origin of the local coordinates system. If opening is found
then reinforcement is provided along sides of openings. The area of horizontal
and vertical bars provided along edges of openings is equal to that of the
respective interrupted bars.
b. Panels have been defined.
Only wall panel design is supported in Indian code.
447 STAAD.Pro
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 11B.1-Indian Concrete Design IS 13920 Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default Value
Description
Parameter
Name
BRACING
Default Value
0.0
Description
Beam Design
1.0 = the effect of axial force will be
taken into account for beam design.
Column Design: Correspond to the
terms "Braced" and "Unbraced"
described in Notes 1, 2, and 3 of Clause
39.7.1 of IS456:2000.
1.0 = the column is unbraced about
major axis.
2.0 = the column is unbraced about
minor axis.
3.0 = the column is unbraced about
both axis.
DEPTH
YD
CLEAR
25 mm
40 mm
449 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
COMBINE
Default Value
0.0
Description
EFACE
0.0
1.0
ELY
1.0
Parameter
Name
ENSH
Default Value
0.0
Description
451 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
None
FYMAIN
415 N/mm 2
FYSEC
415 N/mm 2
FC
30 N/mm 2
EUDL
Parameter
Name
GLD
Default Value
Description
None
453 STAAD.Pro
Spacing of
longitudinal
bars measured
to the outer
face
Parameter
Name
IPLM
Default Value
0.0
Description
Parameter
Name
IMB
Default Value
0.0
Description
MINMAIN
10 mm
MAXMAIN
60 mm
MINSEC
8 mm
MAXSEC
12 mm
PLASTIC
0.0
RATIO
4.0
REINF
0.0
455 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
RENSH
Default Value
0.0
Description
RFACE
4.0
SFACE
0.0
25 mm
TORISION
0.0
Parameter
Name
TRACK
Default Value
0.0
Description
Beam Design:
0.0 = output consists of
reinforcement details at
START, MIDDLE and
END.
1.0 = critical moments are
printed in addition to
TRACK 0.0 output.
2.0 = required steel for
intermediate sections
defined by NSECTION
are printed in addition to
TRACK 1.0 output.
Column Design:
0.0 = reinforcement
details are printed.
1.0 = column interaction
analysis results are
printed in addition to
TRACK 0.0 output.
2.0 = a schematic
interaction diagram and
intermediate interaction
values are printed in
addition to TRACK 1.0
output.
ULY
1.0
ULZ
1.0
WIDTH
ZD
Bar combination has been introduced for detailing. Please refer section 9A1.6 for details.
* EFACE and SFACE command is not valid for member combination.
457 STAAD.Pro
** IPLM and IMB commands are not valid for member combination. These commands are
ignored for members forming physical member.
*** The purpose of COMBINE command is the following:
1. If a beam spanning between two supports is subdivided into many sub-beams this
parameter will combine them into one member. It can also be used to combine
members to form one continuous beam spanning over more than two supports.
2. When two or more members are combined during design plastic or elastic moments
will be calculated at the column supports. At all the intermediate nodes (if any) this
calculation will be ignored.
Note: Please note that the program only recognizes column at right angle to the
beam. Inclined column support is ignored.
3. It will calculate sectional forces at 13 sections along the length of the combined
member.
4. It will calculate critical loads (similar to that of Design Load Summary) for all active
load cases during design.
Beams will be combined only when DESIGN BEAM command is issued.
The following lines should be satisfied during combination of members:
1. Members to be combined should have same sectional properties if any single span
between two column supports of a continuous beam is subdivided into several
members.
2. Members to be combined should have same constants (E, Poi ratio, alpha, density, and
beta angle)
3. Members to be combined should lie in one straight line.
4. Members to be combined should be continuous.
5. Vertical members (i.e., columns) cannot be combined.
6. Same member cannot be used more than once to form two different combined
members.
7. The maximum number of members that can be combined into one member is 299.
Note: Sectional forces and critical load for combined member output will only be available
when all the members combined are successfully designed in both flexure and
shear.
ENSH and RENSH parameters will have to be provided (as and when necessary) even if physical
member has been formed.
11B.3.1 Example
The following lines show a standard example for design to be performed in IS 13920.
STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER MTON
JOINT COORDINATES
MEMBER INCIDENCES
CONSTANTS
SUPPORTS
459 STAAD.Pro
3. The minimum tension steel ratio on any face, at any section, is given by (Clause 6.2.1b)
min = 0.24fck/fy
The maximum steel ratio on any face, at any section, is given by (Clause 6.2.2)
max = 0.025
4. The positive steel ratio at a joint face must be at least equal to half the negative steel at
that face. (Clause 6.2.3)
5. The steel provided at each of the top and bottom face, at any section, shall at least be
equal to one-fourth of the maximum negative moment steel provided at the face of
either joint. (Clause 6.2.4)
N O.
D E S I G N
R E S U L T
S
M20
Fe415 (Main)
Fe250
(Sec.)
LENGTH:
COVER: 25.0 mm
461 STAAD.Pro
6400.0 mm
SIZE:
300.0 mm X
400.0 mm
- CLAUSE 6.3.3 OF
IS-13920
NOTE :
MOMENT OF RESISTANCE IS CALCULATED BASED ON THE AREA OF STEEL
PROVIDED.
IF AREA OF STEEL PROVIDED IS MUCH HIGHER COMPARED TO AREA OF
STEEL
REQUIRED MOMENT OF RESISTANCE WILL INCREASE WHICH MAY INCREASE
DESIGN
SHEAR FORCE.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------STAAD SPACE
-PAGE NO.
7
0.0 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )|
0.00/ 981.75( 2-25 )|
8 @ 100 mm
533.3 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 281.26/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
1066.7 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
1600.0 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
2133.3 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 773.83/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
2666.7 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 863.91/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
3200.0 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 894.99/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
3733.3 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 863.91/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
4266.7 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 773.83/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
4800.0 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
5333.3 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
5866.7 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 281.26/1472.62( 3-25 )|
8 @ 180 mm
6400.0 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )|
0.00/ 981.75( 2-25 )|
8 @ 100 mm
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Steel reinforcements of grade Fe415 or less only shall be used. (Clause 5.3)
463 STAAD.Pro
The minimum dimension of column member shall not be less than 200 mm. For
columns having unsupported length exceeding 4m, the shortest dimension of column
shall not be less than 300 mm. (Clause 7.1.2)
The spacing of hoops shall not exceed half the least lateral dimension of the column,
except where special confining reinforcement is provided. (Clause 7.3.3)
Special confining reinforcement shall be provided over a length l from each joint face,
o
towards mid span, and on either side of any section, where flexural yielding may occur.
The length l shall not be less than a) larger lateral dimension of the member at the
o
section where yielding occurs, b) 1/6 of clear span of the member, and c) 450 mm.
(Clause 7.4.1)
The spacing of hoops used as special confining reinforcement shall not exceed of
minimum member dimension but need not be less than 75 mm nor more than 100
mm. (Clause 7.4.6)
The area of cross-section of hoops provided are checked against the provisions for
minimum area of cross-section of the bar forming rectangular, circular or spiral hoops,
to be used as special confining reinforcement. (Clause 7.4.7 and 7.4.8)
4.53
:
4.53
Along Y
ENDBAR COMBINATION
Note: The bar sizes should be specified in the order of increasing size (i.e., MD2 bar
diameter should be greater than MD1 bar diameter).
The beam length is divided into three parts, two at its ends and one at span. Ld gives the
development length to be provided at the two ends of each section.
The typical output for bar combination is shown below:
OUTPUT FOR BAR COMBINATION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
M A I N
R E I N F O R C E M E N T
|
--------------------------------------------------------------------------SECTION |
0.0- 1600.0
|
1600.0- 4800.0
|
4800.06400.0
|
|
mm
|
mm
|
mm
|
--------------------------------------------------------------------------TOP
|
2-16
|
2-16
|
216
|
|
in 1 layer(s)
|
in 1 layer(s)
|
in 1
layer(s)
|
Ast Reqd|
0.00
|
0.00
|
0.00
|
Prov|
402.29
|
402.29
|
402.29
|
Ld (mm) |
752.2
|
1175.3
|
752.2
|
--------------------------------------------------------------------------BOTTOM |
4-16
|
2-16
+ 2-25 |
416
|
|
in 1 layer(s)
|
in 1 layer(s)
|
in 1
layer(s)
|
Ast Reqd|
632.82
|
894.99
|
632.82
|
Prov|
804.57
|
1384.43
|
804.57
|
Ld (mm) |
752.2
|
1175.3
|
752.2
|
--------------------------------------------------------------------------============================================================================
st_Top_A
st_Bot_A
st_Top_B
st_Bot_B
= 339.29 mm 2
= 226.19 mm 2
= 226.19 mm 2
= 339.29 mm 2
Steps
Calculation of Simple Shear
Simple shear from
Va = Vb = 1.2 * w * L / 2
= 15600N
467 STAAD.Pro
0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_A * d *
= 36768130.05 N
(1 - Ast_Bot_A * fy / b * d * fck)
0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_A * d *
(1 - Ast_Top_A * fy / b * d * fck)
= 54003057.45 N
Sagging Moment Of
0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_B * d *
= 54003057.45 N
(1 - Ast_Bot_B * fy / b * d * fck)
0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_B * d * (1 - Ast_
= 36768130.05 N
-10137.69104 N
Vur,b =
41337.69104 N
Vul,a =
53402.14022 N
=
Vul,b =
11.56 N
Design Shear Force At End A, Vu,a = Max (Va,anl, Vur,a, Vul,a) = 53402.14022 N
Shear Force From Analysis At End B , Vb,anl =
-6.44 N
Design Shear Force At End B, Vu,b = Max (Vb,anl, Vur,b, Vul,b) = 41337.69104 N
300 mm
Section depth, D
450 mm
415 N/sq. mm
20 N/sq. mm
25 mm
Bar Diameter
12 mm
419 mm
Eudl w
6.5 N/sq. mm
Length L
3000 mm
Ast_Top_A
226.19 sq. mm
Ast_Bot_A
339.29 sq. mm
Ast_Top_B
452.39 sq. mm
Ast_Bot_B
226.19 sq. mm
Va = Vb = 1.2 * w * L / 2
= 11700N
from gravity
load on span =
Calculation of Moment Of Resistances Based On Area Of Steel Provided
Sagging
Moment Of
Resistance of
End A Mu,as =
469 STAAD.Pro
0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_A * d *
(1 - Ast_Bot_A * fy / b * d * fck)
= 48452983 N
Hogging
Moment Of
Resistance of
0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_A * d *
= 32940364.5 N
(1 - Ast_Top_A * fy / b * d * fck)
End A Mu,ah =
Sagging
Moment Of
Resistance of
0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_B * d *
= 32940364.5 N
(1 - Ast_Bot_B * fy / b * d * fck)
End A Mu,bs =
Hogging
Moment Of
d * fck)
Resistance of
End A Mu,bh =
Calculation of shear force due to the formation of a plastic hinge at both ends of the beam
plus the factored gravity load on the span.
Figure 11B.4 - Sway to right
Vur,a =
-40463.862 N
Vur,b =
63863.862 N
Sway to left
Vul,a =
42444.3402 N
Vul,b =
-15144.34 N
-10.31 N
42444.3402 N
-23.81 N
63863.862 N
471 STAAD.Pro
Note: Steel design per the limit state method in IS 800 is also available in the Steel
Design mode in the Graphical User Interface.
Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design.
These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times depending upon the design
requirements. The entire ISI steel section table is supported. Section 11C.13 describes the
specification of steel sections.
This section, however, will discuss the salient features of the allowable stresses specified by
IS:800 and implemented in STAAD. Appropriate sections of IS:800 will be referenced during
the discussion of various types of allowable stresses.
Compressive Stress
Allowable compressive stress on the gross section of axially loaded compression members shall
not exceed 0.6f nor the permissible stress calculated based on the following equation (per
y
ac
Clause: 5.1.1):
ac = 0.6{(fcc fy )/[(fcc)n +(fy )n ]1/n }
Where:
ac
cc
bt
bc
473 STAAD.Pro
For an I-beam or channel with equal flanges bent about the axis of maximum strength (z-z
axis), the maximum bending compressive stress on the extreme fibre calculated on the effective
section shall not exceed the values of maximum permissible bending compressive stress. The
maximum permissible bending compressive stress shall be obtained by the following formula:
(Clause: 6.2.2)
bc = 0.66
fcbf y
1/n
(f ) + f n
y
cb
n
()
Clause 6.2.3
Where:
f
cb
c
fcb = k 1X + k 2Y 2
c1
Where:
2
1
20 ry D
X = Y 1+
Y=
26.5(10)
in MPa
(1 / ry)
k
= a coefficient to allow for reduction in thickness or breadth of flanges
1
between points of effective lateral restraint and depends on , the ratio of the
total area of both flanges at the point of least bending moment to the
corresponding area at the point of greatest bending moment between such
points of restraint.
k
= a coefficient to allow for the inequality of flanges, and depends on ,
2
the ratio of the moment of inertia of the compression flange alone to that of the
sum of the moment of the flanges each calculated about its own axis parallel to
the y-yaxis of the girder, at the point of maximum bending moment.
1 =effective length of compression flange
r
= radius of gyration of the section about its axis of minimum
y
strength (y-y axis)
T = mean thickness of the compression flange, is equal to the area of
horizontal portion of flange divided by width.
D = overall depth of beam
c ,c =respectively the lesser and greater distances from the section neutral
1 2
axis to the extreme fibres.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 11C.1-Indian Steel Design IS 800:1984 Parameters
Parameter Name
CODE
Default Value
-
Description
Must be specified as
INDIAN
Design Code to follow.
See section 5.48.1 of the
Technical Reference
Manual.
475 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name
BEAM
Default Value
3.0
Description
0.0 = design only for end
moments and those at
locations specified by the
SECTION command.
1.0 = calculate section
forces at twelfth points
along the beam, design at
each intermediate location
and report the critical
location where ratio is
maximum.
CMY
DFF
None
(Mandatory for
deflection check)
"Deflection Length" /
Maxm. allowable local
deflection
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
DMAX
100.0 cm.
DMIN
0.0 cm.
FYLD
250 MPA
CMZ
(36.25 KSI)
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member Length
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description
LZ
Member Length
MAIN
NSF
1.0
PROFILE
RATIO
1.0
SSY
0.0
SSZ
0.0
TMAIN
400 (Tension
Memb)
TRACK
0.0
477 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description
UNF
1.0
UNL
Member Length
11C.4.1 Notes
a. "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of local
deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the "Deflection
Length" will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some situations, the
"Deflection Length" may be different. A straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the
reference line from which local deflections are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four joints
and three members. The Deflection Length for all three members will be equal to the
total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used to
model this situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2 should
be 4.
b. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length and
local deflections will be measured from original member line.
c. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for
steel design.
479 STAAD.Pro
Selection of members, whose properties are originally provided from user specified table, will
be limited to sections in the user provided table. Member selection can not be performed on
members whose cross sectional properties are specified as PRISMATIC.
The process of MEMBER SELECTION may be controlled using the parameters listed in Table
11C.1. It may be noted that the parameters DMAX and DMIN may be used to specify member
depth constraints for selection. If PROFILE parameter is provided, the search for the lightest
section is restricted to that profile. Up to three (3) profiles may be provided for any member
with a section being selected from each one.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification
of the Member Selection command.
Note: If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block out part of the table
and will print allowable bending stresses in compression (FCY & FCZ) and tension
(FTY & FTZ), allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and allowable shear stress
(FV). When the parameter TRACK is set to 2.0 for all members parameter code
values are as shown in the following example.
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (
800)
IS-
v1.0
********************************************
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|
Y
PROPERTIES
|
|*************
|
IN
CM UNIT |
|
* |=============================|
===|===
----------- |
|MEMBER
7 * | INDIAN SECTIONS
|
|
AX
=
85.0 |
|
* | ST ISWB400
|
|
--Z AY
=
34.4 |
|DESIGN CODE * |
|
|
AZ
=
34.7 |
| IS-800
* ===============================
===|===
SY
= 138.8 |
|
*
SZ
= 1171.3 |
|
* |<---LENGTH (ME=
3.00 --->|
RY
=
4.0 |
|*************
RZ
=
16.6 |
|
|
|
112.1( KN-METR)
|
|PARAMETER
|L1
STRESSES
|
|IN
NEWT MM
|
IN
NEWT MM|
|--------------- +
------------|
481 STAAD.Pro
| KL/R-Y=
74.2 |
150.0 |
| KL/R-Z=
18.1 +
=
1.0 |
| UNL
= 3000.0 |
= 139.9 |
| C
= 400.0 +
= 165.0 |
| CMY
=
0.60 |
= 165.0 |
| CMZ
=
0.40 +
= 165.0 |
| FYLD = 249.9 |
L3
=
95.7 |
| NSF
=
0.9 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---|
=
0.0 |
| DFF
=
0.0 90.5
= 100.0 |
| dff
=
0.0
ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE
=
17.1 |
|
(WITH LOAD NO.)
|
|
|
|
MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY ( KN-METR)
|
|
------------------------|
|
|
|
AXIAL
SHEAR-Y
SHEAR-Z
MOMENT-Y
MOMENT-Z
|
|
|
|
VALUE
-23.9
60.6
0.0
0.0
112.1
|
|
LOCATION
0.0
3.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
|
|
LOADING
3
1
0
0
1
|
|
|
FA
fa
FCZ
FTZ
FCY
FTY
fbz
fby
FV
fv
|**************************************************************************|
|*
*|
|*
DESIGN SUMMARY ( KN-METR)
*|
|*
-------------*|
|*
*|
|*
|
|
|
|
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
*|
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
|
======================================================
|
PASS
7.1.2 BEND C
0.684
1
|
7.39 T
0.0
-112.1
0.00
|
|*
*|
|**************************************************************************|
Note: In case of two identical beams, the heavier beam is designated with an A on the
end (e.g., ISHB400 A, etc.).
1 TO 5 TA ST ISHB400A
483 STAAD.Pro
At present there is no standard way to define the local y and z axes for an angle section. The
standard section has local axis system as illustrated in Fig.2.4 of this manual. The standard
angle is specified as:
51 52 53 TA ST ISA60X60X6
This specification has the local z-axis (i.e., the minor axis corresponding to the V-V axis
specified in the steel tables. Many engineers are familiar with a convention used by some other
programs in which the local y-axis is the minor axis. STAAD provides for this convention by
accepting the command:
54 55 56 TA RA ISA50X30X6
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units
Only code checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is
used.
For example,
15 TO 25 TA ST TUB 160808
Tubes, like pipes, can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and Thickness) and
not by any table designations.
6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
485 STAAD.Pro
Note: Only code checking and no member selection is performed for TUBE sections
specified this way.
Angle
150X150X18
200X100X15
200X150X18
200X200X18
A. Joist Designation
IW450 = ISWB450
B. Top flange channel designation:
350 = ISMC350
C. Constant (always X).
D. Top flange plate thickness in mm.
Note: The heavier ISWB600 has been omitted, since the lighter ISWB600 is more
efficient.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
487 STAAD.Pro
Default Value
Description
Type of joining
1. implies single lacing with
riveted connection
2. implies double lacing with
riveted connection
3. implies single lacing with
welded connection
4. implies double lacing with
welded connection
5. implies batten with riveted
connection
6. implies batten with welded
connection
COG
0.0 mm
DBL
20 mm
DCFR
0.0
EDIST
32 mm
(Rivetted
Connection)
Edge Distance.
25 mm
(Welded
Connection)
FVB
100 N/mm 2
FYB
300 N/mm 2
Parameter
Name
SPA
489 STAAD.Pro
Default Value
Description
0.0 mm
THETA
50 degree
WMIN
6 mm
WSTR
108 N/mm 2
Compressive Stress
The estimated compressive stresses in various members multiplied by the appropriate factor of
safety shall not exceed the value given by the formulae described below.
I. Condition: when (b/t) [(b/t)lim = 210/Fy ]:
i. When KL/r Cc, the allowable compressive stress is (in N/mm 2)
Fa = Fy {1 - 0.5[(KL/r)/Cc]2 }
ii. When KL/r > Cc, the allowable compressive stress is (in N/mm 2)
Fa = 2 E/(KL/r)2
II. Condition: when (b/t)lim < (b/t) 378/Fy :
The equations in condition 1 shall be used, substituting for F the value F given by:
y
cr
cr
Fcr = 65,550/(b/t)
Where:
F = allowable unit stress in compression, Mpa
a
K = restraint factor,
L = unbraced length of the compression member in cm, and
R = appropriate radius of gyration in cm.
E = modulus of elasticity of steel in N/mm 2
KL/r = largest effective slenderness ratio of any unbraced segment of the
member,
b = distance from edge of the fillet to the extreme fibre in mm, and
t = thickness of flange in mm.
Note: The maximum permissible value of b/t for any type of steel shall not exceed 25.
491 STAAD.Pro
Slenderness
Limit
120
200
250
Type of Member
Calculation
of KL/r
L/r
L/r
30 + 0.75L/r
60 + 0.5L/r
L/r
28.6 +
0.762L/r
ELA
Value
7
Type of Member
Calculation
of KL/r
46.2 +
0.615L/r
If the value for ELA is given in the input for any particular member is such that condition for
L/r ratio to fall within the specified range is not satisfied, STAAD goes on by the usual way of
finding slenderness ratio using KL/r formula.
Painted
Other members
493 STAAD.Pro
2. If the minimum thickness criterion is fulfilled, the program determines whether the
member is under compression or tension for the load case under consideration.
Depending upon whether the member is under tension or compression the slenderness
ratio of the member is calculated. This calculated ratio is checked against allowable
slenderness ratio.
3. If the slenderness criterion is fulfilled check against allowable stress is performed.
Allowable axial and tensile stresses are calculated. If the member is under tension and
there is no user defined net section factor (NSF), the net section factor is calculated by
the program itself (See "Calculation of Net Section Factor" on page 500). Actual axial
stress in the member is calculated. The ratio for actual stress to allowable stress, if less
than 1.0 or user defined value, the member has passed the check.
4. Number of bolts required for the critical load case is calculated.
IS-802)
v1.0
********************************************
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|
Y
PROPERTIES
|
|*************
|
IN
CM UNIT |
|
* |=============================|
==| |==
----------- |
|MEMBER
8 * | INDIAN SECTIONS
|
| |
AX
=
17.0 |
|
* | ST ISA125x95x8
|
| | --Z AY
=
6.7 |
|DESIGN CODE * |
|
| |
AZ
=
5.1 |
| IS-802
* ===============================
==| |==
SY
=
38.8 |
|
*
SZ
=
16.6 |
|
* |<---LENGTH (ME=
1.80 --->|
RY
=
4.4 |
|*************
RZ
=
2.0 |
|
|
|
|
|PARAMETER
BOLTING
STRESSES
|
|IN
NEWT MM
IN
NEWT MM|
|--------------------------------------|
| L/R-Y =
40.5
BOLT DIA = 12 MM
FA
= 188.4 |
| L/R-Z =
87.9
BOLT CAP = 24.66 KN
fa
=
80.7 |
| KL/R =
87.9
# BOLT = 6
FYB = 436.0 |
| FYLD = 250.0
FVB = 218.0 |
| GALVA =
0.0
|
| C
=
1.0
|
| LEG
=
1.0
|
| ELA
=
1.0
|
| NSF
=
1.0
|
495 STAAD.Pro
|
|
|**************************************************************************|
|*
*|
|*
DESIGN SUMMARY ( KN-METR)
*|
|*
-------------*|
|*
*|
|*
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
*|
|
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
|
|
======================================================
|
|
PASS
COMPRESSION
0.428
1
|
|
137.13 C
0.0
0.0
0.00
|
|*
*|
|**************************************************************************|
|
|
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Using TRACK 9.0 also adds the following set of calculation details:
DETAILS OF CALCULATION
---------------------CHECK FOR MINIMUM THICKNESS
--------------------------TYPE : PAINTED
MIN. ALLOWABLE THICKNESS : 6.0 MM
ACTUAL THICKNESS : 8.0 MM
RESULT : PASS
CHECK FOR SLENDERNESS RATIO
--------------------------VALUE OF L/r : 87.94
EQN. USED TO FIND KL/r : L/r
ACTUAL VALUE OF KL/r : 87.94
ALLOWABLE KL/r : 120.00
RESULT : PASS
CALCULATION OF ALLOWABLE STRESS
--------------------------------CRITICAL CONDITION : COMPRESSION
Cc : sqrt(2*3.14159265*3.14159265*E : 127.53
b : LENGTH OF LEG - WEB THICKNESS - ROOT RADIUS
: 125.0 - 8.0 9.0 : 108.0 MM
(b/t)lim : 210/sqrt(fy)
: 13.28
(b/t)cal : 13.50
(b/t)cal > (b/t)lim
(b/t)lim (modified) : 378/sqrt(fy)
: 23.91
(b/t)cal <= (b/t)lim (modified) AND KL/r <= Cc
Fcr : (1.677 - (0.677*(b/t)cal/(b/t)lim))*fy
: 247.18 MPA
ALLOWABLE AXIAL COMP. STRESS : (1-0.5*(KL/r/Cc)*(KL/r/Cc))*Fcr
: 188.41 MPA
CHECK AGAINST PERMISSIBLE STRESS
-------------------------------LOAD NO. :
1
DESIGN AXIAL FORCE : 137131.16 N
ACTUAL AXIAL COMP. STRESS : 137131.16 / 1700.0 :
80.67 MPA
RESULT : PASS
EXAMPLE PROBLEM NO.1
-PAGE NO.
24
BOLTING
------BOLT DIA : 12 MM
SHEARING CAP : 24.66 KN
BEARING CAP : 41.86 KN
BOLT CAP : 24.66 KN
NO. OF BOLTS REQD. :
6
************** END OF TABULATED RESULT OF DESIGN **************
Default Value
Description
0.0
497 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
DANGLE
Default Value
Description
0.0
DBL
12 mm
DMAX
100.0 cm.
DMIN
0.0 cm.
ELA
1.0
FVB
218 MPA
FYB
436 MPA
FYLD
250 MPA
GUSSET
5 mm
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
Parameter
Name
LEG
Default Value
1.0
Description
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
MAIN
1.0
NSF
499 STAAD.Pro
1.0
Parameter
Name
NHL
Default Value
0.0 mm
Description
TRACK
0.0
For an angle section, it is the ratio of the net effective area, A , to the gross area,
net
where:
a. Single angle connected by only one leg
Anet = A1 + A2 K1
Where:
A = net cross-sectional area of the connected leg
1
Where:
A = net cross-sectional area of the connected leg
1
net
501 STAAD.Pro
11D.11.1 Given
End Condition = Members with normal framing eccentricities at both ends of the
unsupported panel for values of L/r up to and including 120
Diameter of the bolt = 16 mm
Thickness of the gusset plate = 8 mm
Net Section Factor is to be calculated.
27 12 2; 28 11 3; 29 1 13; 30 13 4; 31 3 14; 32 14 5; 33 15 4; 34
15 6;
35 16 5; 36 16 7; 37 17 6; 38 17 8; 39 18 7; 40 18 9; 41 19 8; 42
19 10;
43 20 9; 44 20 2; 45 12 10; 46 21 23; 47 23 24; 48 24 25; 49 25
26; 50 26 27;
51 27 28; 52 28 29; 53 29 30; 54 30 22; 55 3 23; 56 4 24; 57 5
25; 58 6 26;
59 7 27; 60 8 28; 61 9 29; 62 10 30; 63 2 22; 64 1 23; 65 21 3;
66 3 24;
67 23 4; 68 4 25; 69 5 24; 70 5 26; 71 6 25; 72 6 27; 73 7 26; 74
7 28;
75 8 27; 76 8 29; 77 9 28; 78 9 30; 79 10 29; 80 10 22; 81 2 30;
82 31 33;
83 33 34; 84 34 35; 85 35 36; 86 36 37; 87 37 38; 88 38 39; 89 39
40; 90 40 32;
91 23 33; 92 24 34; 93 25 35; 94 26 36; 95 27 37; 96 28 38; 97 29
39; 98 30 40;
99 22 32; 100 21 33; 101 31 23; 102 23 34; 103 33 24; 104 24 35;
105 25 34;
106 25 36; 107 26 35; 108 26 37; 109 27 36; 110 27 38; 111 28 37;
112 28 39;
113 29 38; 114 29 40; 115 30 39; 116 30 32; 117 22 40; 118 33 13;
119 34 14;
120 35 15; 121 36 16; 122 37 17; 123 38 18; 124 39 19; 125 40 20;
126 32 12;
127 31 13; 128 11 33; 129 33 14; 130 13 34; 131 34 15; 132 35 14;
133 35 16;
134 36 15; 135 36 17; 136 37 16; 137 37 18; 138 38 17; 139 38 19;
140 39 18;
141 39 20; 142 40 19; 143 40 12; 144 32 20; 145 32 44; 146 12 42;
147 2 41;
148 22 43; 149 42 41; 150 41 43; 151 43 44; 152 44 42; 153 12 41;
154 42 2;
155 22 41; 156 43 2; 157 43 32; 158 44 22; 159 12 44; 160 32 42;
161 41 47;
162 47 45; 163 45 2; 164 47 46; 165 46 45; 166 41 45; 167 43 50;
168 50 48;
169 48 22; 170 50 49; 171 49 48; 172 43 48; 173 47 50; 174 46 49;
175 45 48;
176 41 50; 177 50 46; 178 43 47; 179 47 49; 180 22 50; 181 2 47;
182 22 45;
183 2 48; 184 47 48; 185 50 45; 186 45 49; 187 48 46; 188 42 53;
189 53 51;
190 51 12; 191 53 52; 192 52 51; 193 42 51; 194 44 56; 195 56 54;
196 54 32;
197 56 55; 198 55 54; 199 44 54; 200 53 56; 201 52 55; 202 51 54;
203 42 56;
503 STAAD.Pro
204 56 52; 205 44 53; 206 53 55; 207 32 56; 208 12 53; 209 32 51;
210 12 54;
211 53 54; 212 56 51; 213 51 55; 214 54 52; 215 44 60; 216 42 58;
217 41 57;
218 43 59; 219 60 59; 220 59 57; 221 57 58; 222 58 60; 223 44 58;
224 42 60;
225 42 57; 226 41 58; 227 44 59; 228 43 60; 229 43 57; 230 41 59;
231 60 57;
232 59 58; 235 33 3; 236 13 23; 237 34 4; 238 14 24; 239 35 5; 240
15 25;
241 36 6; 242 16 26; 243 37 7; 244 17 27; 245 38 8; 246 18 28; 247
39 9;
248 19 29; 249 40 10; 250 20 30; 251 32 2; 252 22 12; 253 44 41;
254 43 42;
255 60 61; 256 58 61; 257 57 61; 258 59 61;
MEMBER PROPERTY INDIAN
1 TO 18 46 TO 54 82 TO 90 145 TO 148 215 TO 218 TA LD
ISA200X150X18 SP 0.01
19 TO 26 28 TO 45 55 TO 62 64 TO 81 91 TO 98 100 TO 125 127 TO 144
155 156 159 160 223 224 229 230 235 TO 250 TA ST ISA150X150X10
27 63 99 126 149 TO 154 157 158 161 TO 214 219 TO 222 225 TO 228
231 232 251 252 TO 258 TA ST ISA80X50X6
CONSTANTS
E 2.05E+008 ALL
POISSON 0.3 ALL
DENSITY 76.8195 ALL
ALPHA 6.5E-006 ALL
SUPPORTS
1 11 21 31 FIXED
UNIT METER KG
LOAD 1 VERT
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 732
46 49 52 55 FX 153
61 FX 1280 FY -1016 FZ 160
46 49 52 55 FX 9006 FY -7844 FZ 1968
2 12 22 32 FX 4503 FY -3937 FZ 1968
LOAD 2 GWBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
61 FX 515 FY -762 FZ 2342
46 49 52 55 FX 6755 FY -5906
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
LOAD 3 LEFT PCBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
61 FX 960 FY -762
46 49 FX 6755 FY -5906
52 55 FX 4211 FY -4551 FZ 13293
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
LOAD 4 RIGHT PCBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
61 FX 960 FY -762
52 55 FX 6755 FY -5906
46 49 FX 4211 FY -4551 FZ 13293
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
PERFORM ANALYSIS
UNIT NEW MMS
PARAMETER
CODE IS802
LY 2800 MEMB 28
LZ 2800 MEMB 28
MAIN 1.0 MEMB 1
ELA 4 MEMB 1
CNSF 1.0 MEMB 28
DBL 16 ALL
GUSSET 8 ALL
TRACK 9 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 1 28
FINISH
11D.11.3 Output
A portion of the output for the TRACK9.0 member code check follows:
505 STAAD.Pro
IS-802)
v1.0
********************************************
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|
Y
PROPERTIES
|
|*************
|
IN
CM UNIT |
|
* |=============================|
==||==
----------- |
|MEMBER
1 * | INDIAN SECTIONS
|
||
AX
= 120.0 |
|
* | LD ISA200X150X18
|
||
--Z AY
=
48.0 |
|DESIGN CODE * |
|
||
AZ
=
36.0 |
| IS-802
* |-----------------------------|
||
SY
= 297.3 |
|
*
SZ
= 350.6 |
|
* |<---LENGTH (ME=
3.01 --->|
RY
=
6.2 |
|*************
RZ
=
6.3 |
|
|
|
|
|PARAMETER
BOLTING
STRESSES
|
|IN
NEWT MM
IN
NEWT MM|
|--------------------------------------|
| L/R-Y =
48.6
BOLT DIA = 16 MM
FA
= 195.1 |
| L/R-Z =
47.7
BOLT CAP = 55.81 KN
fa
= 145.2 |
| KL/R =
84.3
# BOLT = 32
FYB
= 436.0 |
| FYLD = 250.0
FVB
= 218.0 |
| GALVA =
0.0
|
| C
=
1.0
|
| LEG
=
1.0
|
| ELA
=
4.0
|
| NSF
=
1.0
|
|
|
|**************************************************************************|
|*
*|
|*
DESIGN SUMMARY ( KN-METR)
*|
|*
-------------*|
|*
*|
|*
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
*|
|
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
|
|
======================================================
|
|
PASS
COMPRESSION
0.744
1
|
|
1742.26 C
0.0
0.0
0.00
|
|*
*|
|**************************************************************************|
|
|
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
STAAD TRUSS
-PAGE NO.
5
DETAILS OF CALCULATION
---------------------CHECK FOR MINIMUM THICKNESS
--------------------------TYPE : PAINTED
MIN. ALLOWABLE THICKNESS : 6.0 MM
ACTUAL THICKNESS : 18.0 MM
RESULT : PASS
CHECK FOR SLENDERNESS RATIO
--------------------------VALUE OF L/r : 48.63
EQN. USED TO FIND KL/r : 60.0 + 0.5*L/r
ACTUAL VALUE OF KL/r : 84.31
ALLOWABLE KL/r : 120.00
RESULT : PASS
CALCULATION OF ALLOWABLE STRESS
--------------------------------CRITICAL CONDITION : COMPRESSION
507 STAAD.Pro
Cc : sqrt(2*3.14159265*3.14159265*E : 127.24
b : LENGTH OF LEG - WEB THICKNESS - ROOT RADIUS
: 200.0 - 18.0 - 15.0 : 167.0 MM
(b/t)lim : 210/sqrt(fy)
: 13.28
(b/t)cal : 9.28
(b/t)cal <= (b/t)lim AND KL/r <= Cc
ALLOWABLE AXIAL COMP. STRESS : (1-0.5*(KL/r/Cc)*(KL/r/Cc))*fy
: 195.07 MPA
CHECK AGAINST PERMISSIBLE STRESS
-------------------------------LOAD NO. :
1
DESIGN AXIAL FORCE : 1742259.75 N
ACTUAL AXIAL COMP. STRESS :1742259.75 / 12000.0 : 145.19 MPA
RESULT : PASS
STAAD TRUSS
-PAGE NO.
6
BOLTING
------BOLT DIA : 16 MM
SHEARING CAP : 87.66 KN
BEARING CAP : 55.81 KN
BOLT CAP : 55.81 KN
NO. OF BOLTS REQD. : 32
STAAD TRUSS
-PAGE NO.
7
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (
IS-802)
v1.0
********************************************
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|
Y
PROPERTIES
|
|*************
|
IN
CM UNIT |
|
* |=============================|
==| |==
----------- |
|MEMBER 28 * | INDIAN SECTIONS
|
| |
AX
=
29.2 |
|
* | ST ISA150X150X10
|
| | --Z AY
=
10.0 |
|DESIGN CODE * |
|
| |
AZ
=
10.0 |
| IS-802
* ===============================
==| |==
SY
=
95.7 |
|
*
SZ
=
44.8 |
|
* |<---LENGTH (ME=
6.53 --->|
RY
=
5.9 |
|*************
RZ
=
3.0 |
|
|
|
|
|PARAMETER
STRESSES
|
|IN
NEWT MM
NEWT MM|
|-------------------------|
| L/R-Y =
47.5
= 249.9 |
| L/R-Z =
94.0
=
48.5 |
| KL/R =
94.0
FYB = 436.0 |
| FYLD = 250.0
FVB = 218.0 |
| GALVA =
0.0
|
| C
=
1.0
|
| LEG
=
1.0
|
| ELA
=
1.0
|
| NSF
=
0.8
|
|
|
BOLTING
IN
-------------
--
BOLT DIA = 16 MM
FA
BOLT CAP =
43.83 KN
fa
BOLT
|**************************************************************************|
|*
*|
|*
DESIGN SUMMARY ( KN-METR)
*|
|*
-------------*|
|*
*|
|*
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
*|
|
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
|
|
======================================================
|
|
PASS
TENSION
0.194
3
|
|
112.86 T
0.0
0.0
6.53
|
|*
*|
509 STAAD.Pro
|**************************************************************************|
|
|
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
STAAD TRUSS
-PAGE NO.
8
DETAILS OF CALCULATION
---------------------CHECK FOR MINIMUM THICKNESS
--------------------------TYPE : PAINTED
MIN. ALLOWABLE THICKNESS : 6.0 MM
ACTUAL THICKNESS : 10.0 MM
RESULT : PASS
CHECK FOR SLENDERNESS RATIO
--------------------------VALUE OF L/r : 93.96
EQN. USED TO FIND KL/r : K*L/r
ACTUAL VALUE OF KL/r : 93.96
ALLOWABLE KL/r : 400.00
RESULT : PASS
CALCULATION OF ALLOWABLE STRESS
--------------------------------CRITICAL CONDITION : TENSION
ALLOWABLE AXIAL TENSILE STRESS : 249.94 MPA
CHECK AGAINST PERMISSIBLE STRESS
-------------------------------LOAD NO. :
3
DESIGN AXIAL FORCE : 112855.91 N
ACTUAL AXIAL TENSILE STRESS : 112855.91 / ( 2920.0*0.797 ) :
48.51 MPA
RESULT : PASS
BOLTING
------BOLT DIA : 16 MM
SHEARING CAP : 43.83 KN
BEARING CAP : 55.81 KN
BOLT CAP : 43.83 KN
NO. OF BOLTS REQD. :
3
STAAD TRUSS
-PAGE NO.
9
************** END OF TABULATED RESULT OF DESIGN **************
511 STAAD.Pro
Z with Lips
Hat
Shape selection may be done using the member property pages of the graphical user interface
(GUI) or by specifying the section designation symbol in the input file.
The properties listed in the tables are gross section properties. STAAD.Pro uses unreduced
section properties in the structure analysis stage. Both unreduced and effective section
properties are used in the design stage, as applicable.
The program will check member strength in accordance with Clause 6 of the Standard as
follows:
11E. Indian Codes - Design per Indian Cold Formed Steel Code
Clause 6.7.1 Doubly-symmetric shapes or Shapes not subjected to torsional or torsionalflexural buckling
513 STAAD.Pro
PASS/FAIL identifier and a RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. The
user may choose the degree of detail in the output data by setting the TRACK parameter.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 11E.1-Indian cold formed steel design parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default Value
Description
11E. Indian Codes - Design per Indian Cold Formed Steel Code
Parameter
Name
Default Value
1.0
BEAM
Description
CMY
0.85
CMZ
1.0
CWY
0.85
FLX
515 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
FU
Default Value
450 MPa
(4588.72
Description
kg/cm 2)
FYLD
353.04 MPa
(3600.0
kg/cm 2)
KX
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
11E. Indian Codes - Design per Indian Cold Formed Steel Code
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
LX
Member
length
LY
Member
length
LZ
Member
length
MAIN
NSF
1.0
DMAX
2540.0
cm.
517 STAAD.Pro
RATIO
1.0
STIFF
Member
Length
Parameter
Name
TRACK
Default Value
Description
TSA
519 STAAD.Pro
Note: STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 3) (release 20.07.08) or higher are required for design
per WSD.
Where:
n = optional integer (i.e., - 1, 2) which signifies the numerical order of parameter
command block (if multiple blocks are specified).
When a design is performed, the output file reports the maximum utilization ratio from all
the above mentioned checks.
11F.2.1 Slenderness
As per Section 3.8 Table 3, the slenderness ratio (KL/r) of compression members shall not
exceed 180, and the slenderness ratio (L/r) of tension members shall not exceed 400.
You can edit the default values through MAIN and TMAIN parameters, as defined in Table
11F.1.
Slender Sections
STAAD.Pro is capable of designing I-Sections with slender webs for IS 800:2007.
Note: This feature requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 3) (release 20.07.08) or higher.
The IS:800-2007 code does not provide any clear guidelines about what method should be
adopted for the design of slender section. The "Flange Only" methodology is used where it is
assumed that flexure is taken by the flanges alone and the web will resist shear with adequate
shear buckling resistance. This method requires that the flanges be non-slender elements (i.e.,
on the web is a slender element) to qualify for a valid section for design. If any of the flange
elements become slender, the design will not be performed and a warning message is
displayed in the output.
11F.2.3 Tension
Limit State Method
The criteria governing the capacity of Tension members are based on:
521 STAAD.Pro
STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member based on these three limit states.
The limit state of yielding in the gross section is intended to prevent excessive elongation of
the member, and the corresponding check is done as per section 6.2 of the code.
The Design strength, involving rupture at the section with the net effective area, is evaluated
as per section 6.3 of the code. Here, the number of bolts in the connection may be specified
through the use of the design parameter ALPHA.
The Design strength, involving block shear at an end connection, is evaluated as per section
6.4 of the code. This criteria is made optional by the parameter DBS. If the value of DBS is
specified as 1, additional design parameters AVG, AVN, ATG, and ATN must be supplied to the
program for that member.
The Net Section Area may be specified through the use of the parameter NSF.
Rupture of Net Section - to prevent rupture of the net effective section area. The
number of bolts in the connection may be specified through the use of the design
parameter ALPHA. The code parameter, , is taken as 1.25 per Table 5, Clause 5.4.1 of the
M1
code.
Block Shear to prevent block shearing at the end connection. This check is made
option through use of the DBS parameter. Additional design parameters AVG, AVN, ATG,
and ATN must be supplied to the program for any member which is to be checked for
block shear. The code parameters,, and , are taken as 1.10 and 1.25, respectively,
M0
M1
per Table 5, Clause 5.4.1 of the code.
11F.2.4 Compression
The design capacity of the section against Compressive Force, the guiding phenomenon is the
flexural buckling.
ZZ
Fac = 0.6Fcd
Where:
F
cd
= the minimum of the values of Fcd calculated for the local Y and Z axis.
Fcd = (FYLD/mo )/ [ + (2 + 2 ]
= the non-dimensional slenderness factor is evaluated for each local Y and Z
axis.
= (FYLD/Fcc)1/2
= 0.5[1 + a( - 0.2) + 2 ]
F
cc
Fcc = 2 E/(Kl/r)2
K = the effective length factor for bending about either the local Y or Z axis, as
provided in the KY and KZ parameters, respectively.
r = radius of gyration about the local Y or Z axis for the section.
FYLD = The yield strength of steel specified in the FYLDparameter.
523 STAAD.Pro
Slender Sections
For member with slender section under axial compression, design compressive strength should
be calculated on area ignoring depth thickness ratio of web in excess of the class 3 (semicompact) limit.
Refer to clause 7.3.2 and Table 2 of IS 800:2007, (corresponding to Internal Element of
Compression Flange)
Ae= Ag - (d/tw - 42) tw2
Where:
A = Effective area of section.
e
d = Depth of web.
t = thickness of web.
w
11F.2.5 Shear
The design capacities of the section against Shear Force in major- and minor-axis directions
are evaluated as per section 8.4 of the code, taking care of the following phenomena:
l
Vn = Vcr = b Av
A = AY or AZ, whichever is appropriate, with reference to Clause 8.4.1.1.
v
Shear buckling must be checked when (d/ tw) > 67 w for webs without
stiffener or (d/tw) > 67 w (Kv /5.35) for webs with stiffeners.
d = Clear Depth of Web between Flanges.
t = Thickness of Web.
w
= (250 / FYLD )
cr,e
w = [FYLD / (3 cr,e)]1/2
Slender Sections
Slender sections should be verified against shear buckling resistance if d/tw > 67 for web
without stiffeners or if it exceeds 67 (Kv 5.35) for a web with stiffeners.
Design methods for resistance to shear buckling are described in clause 8.4.2.2 of IS:800-2007
code.
Vn = Vcr
Where:
525 STAAD.Pro
= Av b
= shear stress corresponding to web buckling, determined as follows:
b
i. When w 0.8
b = fyw3
ii. When 0.8 < w < 1.2
b = [1 - 0.8(w - 0.8) ](fyw3)
iii. When w 1.2
b = fyw((3 w2 ) )
w = non-dimensional web slenderness ratio or shear buckling stress, given by:
w= [fyw(3 cr,e )]1/2
cr,e
11F.2.6 Bending
The design bending moment capacity of a section is primarily dependent on whether the
member is laterally supported or unsupported.
You can control the lateral support condition of the member by the use of LAT parameter.
If the member is laterally supported, then the design strength is calculated as per the
provisions of the section 8.2.1 of IS 800:2007, based on the following factors:
l
Section Classification
If the member is laterally unsupported, then the design strength is calculated as per the
provisions of the section 8.2.2 of IS 800:2007, based on the following factors:
Section Classification
Md = b Zpz fbd
fbd = LT FYLD / mo
Z
Z
ez
pz
= 0.21 for Rolled Steel Section and 0.49 for Welded Steel
LT
Section
= 1.0 for Plastic and Compact Section or Zez/Zpz for Semib
Compact Section.
LT
527 STAAD.Pro
LT
Torsional Buckling.
LTZ =
1
2
2
LTZ + LTZ
LTZ
2EI y
2
L LT
GI t +
2EI w
2
L LT
Slender Sections
For member with slender section subjected to bending, moment is taken by flanges alone.
Design bending strength should be calculated with effective elastic modulus disregarding the
contribution of web of the section.
Zez = 2[Bf tf3 /12 + (Bf tf) (D/2 - tf/2)2 )] (0.5 D)
Zey = 2(Bf tf3 /12) (0.5 Bf)
Where:
Z
Z
ez
ey
B = Width of flange.
f
T = thickness of flange.
f
Note: Slender section can only attain elastic moment capacity and cannot reach to plastic
moment capacity.
Section Strength
Section Strength interaction ratio is calculated as per sec. 9.3.1 of the code.
Overall Member Strength interaction ratio is calculated as per sec. 9.3.2, taking care of the
design parameters PSI, CMX, CMY and CMZ.
529 STAAD.Pro
f
,f
= Allowable bending compressive stress about minor and major
abcy abcz
axes, respectively.
Ky = 1 +(y - 0.2)ny 1 +0.8ny
Kz = 1 +(z - 0.2)nz 1 +0.8nz
KLT = 1 - 0.1LTny /(CmLT - 0.25) 0.1ny /(CmLT - 0.25)
c. Combined Axial Tension and Bending The following formulas are intended to
require member stability:
ft/fat + fbty /fabty +fbtz/fabtz 1.0
Where:
f = Actual axial tensile stress.
t
Default Value
Description
ALPHA
0.8
ATG
None
(Mandatory
for Block
Shear check)
ATN
None
(Mandatory
for Block
Shear check)
AVG
531 STAAD.Pro
None
(Mandatory
for Block
Shear check)
Parameter
Name
AVN
BEAM
Default Value
None
(Mandatory
for Block
Shear check)
1.0
Description
CAN
0.0
CMX
0.9
CMY
0.9
0.0
CMZ
DBS
None
(Mandatory
for deflection
check)
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
DJ1
Start Joint of
member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
DMAX
1000 in.
DMIN
0.0 in.
FU
420 MPA
FYLD
250 MPA
KX
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LAT
0.0
LST
LX
533 STAAD.Pro
Member
Length
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
MAIN
180
NSF
1.0
TMAIN
400
PROFILE
PSI
None
1.0
RATIO
STP
1.0
TRACK
TSP
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
TST
0 = No Transverse Stiffener is
provided
1 = Transverse Stiffener is provided
11F.5.1 Example 1
Commands for code checking
UNIT NEWTON METER
PARAMETER 1
CODE IS800 LSD
ALPHA 0.7 ALL
DBS 1 ALL
CAN 1 MEMB 2
PSI 0.8 MEMB 2
TMAIN 350 MEMB 2
TRACK 2 MEMB 2
CHECK CODE MEMB 2
11F.5.2 Example 2
Commands for member selection
UNIT NEWTON METER
PARAMETER 1
CODE IS800 LSD
MAIN 160 MEMB 7
KY 0.8 MEMB 7
KZ 0.9 MEMB 7
535 STAAD.Pro
11F.6.1 Solution
Material properties:
E = 2.05(10)5 MPa
Note: This is the default value of the modulus of elasticity for steel used by STAAD.Pro. IS
800:2007 specifies that a modulus of 2.0(10)5 MPa should be used.
= 0.3
G = E/2.0(1 + ) = 78,846 MPa
Cross sectional properties:
Ag = 8006 + 2(20010) = 8,800 mm2
Izz = 912.1(10)6 mm4
Iyy =13.35(10)6 mm4
Ryy = (Iyy Area) = 38.95 mm
Rzz = (IzzArea) = 321.95 mm
Force:
F = 19.644 kN (Compression)
x
F = 1.2 kN
y
F = 2.0 kN
z
M = 0.0 kNm
x
M = 10.0 kNm
y
M = 51.659 kNm
z
Section Classification
Flange:
b = (bf - tw)/2 = (200 - 6)/2 = 97 mm
f = (250/fy ) = (250/250) = 1.0
1 + 2r 2
126(1.0)
1 + 2(0.0089)
= 123.8
> 42 = 42(1.0) = 42
d/tw = 800/6 = 133.33 >123.8
Thus, the web is considered slender.
The overall section is classified as slender.
E
(KL / R )
2.05(10)
(42.36)
= 1, 127 MPa
Fy
Fcc
250
1, 127
= 0.471
Imperfection factor, , is equal to 0.49 and buckling class is c as T < 40.0 mm and buckling is
f
about YY axis (per Table 7 and Table 10 in IS 800:2007).
Partial factor of safety mo = 1.10
Per Cl.7.1.2.1 of IS 800:2007:
= 0.5[1 +( - 0.2) + 2 ] = 0.5[1 +0.49(0.471 - 0.2) +(0.471)2 ] = 0.677
Stress reduction factor,
=
=
1
2
1.0
1
2
537 STAAD.Pro
I z = 2
+ 200 10
12
800
2
10 2
2
) = 656.1(10)
mm4
LT
L LT
GIxx +
2EI w
2
L LT
22.05(10) 513.33(10)6
LTZ =
2EI y
5, 000
Z ezF y
M cr
( )
1.60(10)6 250
6
449.8(10)
22.05(10) 52.187(10) 12
5, 000
= 449.8 kN m
= 0.943
1
LTZ +
2
2
LTZ
LTZ
1
1.13 + 1.13 2 0.943 2
= 0.574
Since, d/Tw > 67(kv 5.35), shear strength is governed by shear buckling.
Elastic critical stress of the web
tcr, e =
k v E
12 1 2 d / T
w
7.91 2.05(10)
12 1 0.3 2 133.33
= 82.44
f yw
3 t cr ,e
410
3 82.44
Hence
b =
f yw
2
3 w
250
3 (1.323)
= 82.46
VcrY =
A WY b
VcrY =
A WZ b
m0
m0
800(6)(82.46)
200(10)(82.46)
1.1
1.1
= 359.5 kN
= 300.0 kN
11F.6.2 Comparison
Table 11F.2-IS 800:2007 Verification Problem 1
Item
Compressive
Strength, P
d
(kN)
539 STAAD.Pro
1.076(10)3
Negligible
Item
Major Axis
Bending
Strength, M
dz
(kNm)
208.6
208.681
Negligible
30.30
30.303
Negligible
Major Axis
Shear
Strength, V
crY
(kN)
359.5
359.732
Negligible
MInor Axis
Shear
Strength, V
crZ
(kN)
300.0
299.776
Negligible
(Laterally
unsupported)
Minor Axis
Bending
Strength, M
dy
(kNm)
(Laterally
unsupported)
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
START USER TABLE
TABLE 1
UNIT METER KN
WIDE FLANGE
SLEND
0.0088 0.82 0.006 0.2 0.01 0.000912133 1.33477E-005 1.90933E-007
0.00492 0.004
END
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
1 UPTABLE 1 SLEND
MEMBER PROPERTY INDIAN
2 TABLE ST ISMB500
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
JOINT LOAD
3 FY -2
MEMBER LOAD
2 UNI GY -2
JOINT LOAD
2 FX 1.2
2 FZ -2
SELFWEIGHT Y -1 ALL
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PRINT SUPPORT REACTION
PRINT MEMBER FORCES
PARAMETER 1
CODE IS800 LSD
CAN 0 MEMB 1
KY 0.33 ALL
STP 2 ALL
TST 1 MEMB 1
TSP 1 MEMB 1
***LATERALLY UNSUPPORTED****
*LAT 1 ALL
TRACK 2 MEMB 1
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
541 STAAD.Pro
PARAMETER 2
CODE IS800 LSD
CAN 0 MEMB 1
KY 0.33 ALL
STP 2 ALL
TST 1 MEMB 1
TSP 1 MEMB 1
***LATERALLY SUPPORTED****
LAT 1 ALL
TRACK 2 MEMB 1
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
FINISH
11F.6.4 Output
TRACK 2.0 output for the Laterally unsupported check
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - IS-800 2007 (V2.0)
************************************************
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Member Number:
1
|
| Member Section: ST
SLEND
(UPT)
|
| Status: PASS Ratio:
0.401 Critical Load Case:
1
Location:
0.00
|
| Critical Condition: Sec. 9.3.1.1
|
| Critical Design Forces: (Unit: KN
METE)
|
|
FX:
19.644E+00 C
FY:
-1.200E+00
FZ:
-2.000E+00
|
|
MX:
0.000E+00
MY:
-10.000E+00
MZ:
51.659E+00
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Section Properties:
(Unit: CM )
|
| AXX:
88.000E+00
IZZ:
91.213E+03
RZZ:
32.195E+00|
| AYY:
48.000E+00
IYY:
1.335E+03
RYY:
3.895E+00|
| AZZ:
40.000E+00
IXX:
19.093E+00
CW:
2.187E+06|
| ZEZ:
2.225E+03
ZPZ:
2.580E+03
|
ZEY:
133.477E+00
ZPY:
207.200E+00
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Slenderness Check:
(Unit: METE)
|
| Actual Length:
5.000E+00
|
| Parameters:
LZ:
5.000E+00 LY:
5.000E+00
|
|
KZ:
1.000 KY:
0.330
|
| Actual Ratio: 42.37 Allowable Ratio: 180.00 LOAD:
1 FX:
19.644E+00 C |
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Section Class:
Slender; Flange Class: Semi-Compact; Web
Class:
Slender |
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - IS-800 2007
(V2.0)
************************************************
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Member Number:
1
|
| Member Section: ST
SLEND
(UPT)
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Tension:
(Unit:KN
METE)
|
| Parameters:
FYLD:
250.000E+03
FU:
420.000E+03
|
|
NSF:
1.000
ALPHA:
0.800
DBS: 0
|
| Capacity:
2.000E+03
As per sec. No.:Cl. 6.2
|
| Actual Design Force:
0.000E+00
LC:
0
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Compression:
(Unit:KN
METE)
|
| Buckling Class:
Major: b
Minor: c
As per Sec. No.:Cl.
7.1.2.2
|
| Capacity:
1.076E+03
As per sec. No.:Cl. 7.1.2
|
| Actual Design Force:
19.644E+00
LC:
1
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
543 STAAD.Pro
Shear:
(Unit:KN )
|
| Major Axis: Actual Design Force:
-1.200E+00 LC:
1
Loc:
0.000E+00|
|
Capacity:
359.732E+00
As per sec. No.:Cl.
8.4.2
|
| Minor Axis: Actual Design Force:
-2.000E+00 LC:
1
Loc:
0.000E+00|
|
Capacity:
299.776E+00
As per sec. No.:Cl.
8.4.2
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Bending:
(Unit:KN
METE)
|
| Parameters:
Laterally Unsupported
KX:
1.00 LX:
5.000E+00 General
|
| Major Axis: Actual Design Force:
51.659E+00 LC:
1
Loc:
0.000E+00|
|
Capacity:
208.681E+00
As per sec. No.:Cl.
8.2.2
|
| Minor Axis: Actual Design Force:
-10.000E+00 LC:
1
Loc:
0.000E+00|
|
Capacity:
30.303E+00
As per sec. No.:Cl.
8.2.1.1
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Combined Interaction:
|
| Parameters: PSI: 1.00
CMX:
0.900
CMY:
0.900
CMZ:
0.900
|
| Interaction Ratio:
0.401
As per sec. No.:Sec. 9.3.1.1
|
| LC:
1
Loc:
0.000E+00
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Checks
Ratio
Load Case No.
Location from
Start
|
|
|
| Tension
0.000
0
0.000E+00
|
| Compression
0.018
1
0.000E+00
|
| Shear Major
0.003
1
0.000E+00
|
| Shear Minor
0.007
1
0.000E+00
|
| Bend Major
0.248
1
0.000E+00
|
| Bend Minor
0.340
1
0.000E+00
|
| Sec. 9.3.1.1
0.401
1
0.000E+00
|
| Sec. 9.3.2.2 (Z)
0.210
1
5.000E+00
|
| Sec. 9.3.2.2 (Y)
0.233
1
5.000E+00
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
545 STAAD.Pro
KZ:
1.000 KY:
0.330
|
| Actual Ratio: 42.37 Allowable Ratio: 180.00 LOAD:
1 FX:
19.644E+00 C |
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Section Class:
Slender; Flange Class: Semi-Compact; Web
Class:
Slender |
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - IS-800 2007 (V2.0)
************************************************
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Member Number:
1
|
| Member Section: ST
SLEND
(UPT)
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Tension:
(Unit:KN
METE)
|
| Parameters:
FYLD:
250.000E+03
FU:
420.000E+03
|
|
NSF:
1.000
ALPHA:
0.800
DBS: 0
|
| Capacity:
2.000E+03
As per sec. No.:Cl. 6.2
|
| Actual Design Force:
0.000E+00
LC:
0
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Compression:
(Unit:KN
METE)
|
| Buckling Class:
Major: b
Minor: c
As per Sec. No.:Cl.
7.1.2.2
|
| Capacity:
1.076E+03
As per sec. No.:Cl. 7.1.2
|
| Actual Design Force:
19.644E+00
LC:
1
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Shear:
(Unit:KN )
|
| Major Axis: Actual Design Force:
-1.200E+00 LC:
1
Loc:
0.000E+00|
|
Capacity:
359.732E+00
As per sec. No.:Cl.
8.4.2
|
| Minor Axis: Actual Design Force:
-2.000E+00 LC:
1
Loc:
0.000E+00|
|
Capacity:
299.776E+00
As per sec. No.:Cl.
8.4.2
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Bending:
(Unit:KN
METE)
|
| Parameters:
Laterally Supported
KX:
1.00 LX:
5.000E+00 General
|
| Major Axis: Actual Design Force:
51.659E+00 LC:
1
Loc:
0.000E+00|
|
Capacity:
363.710E+00
As per sec. No.:Cl.
8.2.1.1
|
| Minor Axis: Actual Design Force:
-10.000E+00 LC:
1
Loc:
0.000E+00|
|
Capacity:
30.303E+00
As per sec. No.:Cl.
8.2.1.1
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Combined Interaction:
|
| Parameters: PSI: 1.00
CMX:
0.900
CMY:
0.900
CMZ:
0.900
|
| Interaction Ratio:
0.360
As per sec. No.:Sec. 9.3.1.1
|
| LC:
1
Loc:
0.000E+00
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Checks
Ratio
Load Case No.
Location from
Start
|
|
|
| Tension
0.000
0
0.000E+00
|
| Compression
0.018
1
0.000E+00
|
| Shear Major
0.003
1
0.000E+00
|
| Shear Minor
0.007
1
0.000E+00
|
| Bend Major
0.142
1
0.000E+00
|
| Bend Minor
0.340
1
0.000E+00
|
| Sec. 9.3.1.1
0.360
1
0.000E+00
|
| Sec. 9.3.2.2 (Z)
0.126
1
5.000E+00
|
| Sec. 9.3.2.2 (Y)
0.141
1
5.000E+00
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
547 STAAD.Pro
Section 12
Japanese Codes
549 STAAD.Pro
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250 mm
width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be
assumed to be circular with a 350 mm diameter.
Warning: It is absolutely imperative that you do not provide the cross section area (AX) as
an input.
The second option is to approximately magnify the moments from the elastic analysis and
design the column for the magnified moment. It is assumed that the magnified moment is
equivalent to the total moment comprised of the sum of primary and secondary moments.
STAAD provides facilities to design according to both of the above methods. To utilize the
first method, the command PDELTA ANALYSIS must be used instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS in
the input file. The user must note that to take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations
of loading must be provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due
to the fact that load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments,
whereas a primary load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on the deflections.
Also, note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load etc.) should be provided by the
user. STAAD does not factor the loads automatically. The second method mentioned above is
utilized by providing the magnification factor as a concrete design parameter (See the
parameter MMAG in Table 10A.1). The column is designed for the axial load and total of
primary and secondary biaxial moments if the first method is used and for the axial load and
magnified biaxial moments if the second method is used.
551 STAAD.Pro
This program automatically calculates the Bar size and no. of bars needed to design the
section. It arranges the bar in layers as per the requirements and recalculate the effective depth
and redesign the sections for this effective depth.
Notes:
a. Beams are designed for MZ only. The moment MY is not considered in flexure design
b. MMAG parameter can be used to increase design moment
c. 1.4 cm. is added to the clear cover to take stirrup size into consideration for flexure
design.
d. STAAD beam design procedure is based on the local practice and considering the fact
that Japan is a high seismic zone area.
the MMAG parameter is used, the column moments will be multiplied by that value. If the
SMAG parameter is used, column shear force will be multiplied by that value.
Column design is done for Rectangular, Square and Circular sections. For rectangular and
square sections Pt value is calculated separately for MZ and MY, while for circular sections Pg
value is calculated for MZ and MY separately.
Column design for biaxial moments is optional. If the BIAXIAL parameter value is 1.0, the
program will design the column for biaxial moments. Otherwise column design is always
uniaxial.
Steps involved:
1. Depending on the axial force zone is determined for Pt = 0.0 .
2. If the column is in "zone A", design is performed by increasing Pt and checking
allowable load for that known Pt and known actual eccentricity of the column.
3. If the column is in "zone B" or in "zone C", xn is calculated for given P and Pt and
checking is done for allowable moment, if allowable moment is less than the actual
moment, program increases Pt and this procedure continues until the column design
conditions are satisfied or the column fails as the required Pt is higher than Pt
maximum value.
4. If the column is in tension, design is done by considering allowable tensile stress of
steel only.
5. If biaxial design is requested program solve the following interaction equation
6. where, a = 1.0+1.66666666 (ratio-0.2), ratio = P/Pcap & 1.0 a 2.0, Mycap, Mzcap &
Pcap represents section capacity
7. If the interaction equation is not satisfied program increases Pt and calculates Pcap,
Mycap and Mzcap and solve the interaction equation again and this process continues
until the eqn. is satisfied or the column fails as Pt exceeds its maximum limit.
8. If biaxial design is not requested program assumes that interaction equation is satisfied
(if uniaxial design is performed successfully).
9. If the interaction equation is satisfied program determines bar size and calculates no.
of bars and details output is written.
12A.5.1 Example
UNIT KGS CMS
START CONCRETE DESIGN
CODE JAPAN
FYMAIN SRR295 ALL
FC 210 ALL
CLEAR 2.5 MEMB 2 TO 6
553 STAAD.Pro
DESIGN COLUMN 2 TO 6
END CONCRETE DESIGN
2. FC Concrete grade
3. CLEAR Distance from the outer surface of the element to the edge of the bar. This is
considered the same on both top and bottom surfaces of the element.
4. MINMAIN Minimum required size of longitudinal/transverse reinforcing bar
The other parameters shown in Table 12A.1 are not applicable to slab or wall design.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 12A.1-Japanese Concrete Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default Value
Description
Parameter
Name
BIAXIAL
Default Value
0.0
Description
CLEAR
3.0 cm (beam)
4.0 cm
(Column)
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0
FC
210 Kg/cm2
FYMAIN
SR235
FYSEC
SR235
LONG
0.0
555 STAAD.Pro
MAXMAIN
41.0 cm
MAXSEC
41.0 cm
MINMAIN
10 mm
MINSEC
10 mm
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
MMAG
1.0
NSECTION
12
REINF
0.0
SFACE
0.0
SMAG
1.0
TORSION
0.0
TRACK
0.0
Beam Design:
0. Critical section design results.
1. Five section design results &
design forces.
2. 12 section design results &
design forces.
Column Design:
1. Detail design results for critical
load case only.
2. Design results for minimum P,
maximum P, maximum MZ
and maximum MY among all
load cases for both ends.
WIDTH
ZD
557 STAAD.Pro
Shear
Reinforcement
Tension
&Compression
Shear
Reinforcement
SR235
SRR235
SDR235
1600
1600
2400
2400
SR295
SRR295
1600
2000
3000
3000
SD295A
SD295B
SDR295
2000
2000
3000
3000
SDR345
SD345
2200 (2000)
2000
3500
3500
SD390
2200 (2000)
2000
4000
4000
12B.1 General
This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of the
Architectural Institute of Japan (AIJ) specifications for structural steel design (2005 edition)
in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic
analysis and allowable stress design. Facilities are available for member selection as well as code
checking. Two major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by
stability considerations. The following sections describe the salient features of the design
approach.
Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceedance of the allowable
stresses or capacities and the most economical section is selected on the basis of the least
weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness
requirements and the stability criteria. Users are recommended to adopt the following steps in
performing the steel design:
l
Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values.
The method for calculating allowable bending stress was updated for the AIJ 2005 from the AIJ
2002 code. All other allowable limit states, analysis and design methods, etc., remain
unchanged. Refer to the AIJ 2002 documentation for additional details.
12B.2.2 Methodology
For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as required
by AIJ specifications. The design procedure consist of following three steps.
1. Calculation of sectional properties
The program extract sectional properties like sectional area (A ), Moment of Inertia
about Y axis and Z axis (I , I ) from in-built Japanese Steel Table and calculates Z ,
yy zz
z
Z , i , i using appropriate formula. For calculation of i (radius of gyration needed for
y y z
bending ), program calculates moment of inertia (I )and sectional area (A ) for 1/6th
i
i
section and then uses following formula:
i = (Ii/Ai)
Note: The above mentioned procedure for calculation of i is applicable for I shape,
H shape and Channel sections.
2. Calculation of actual and allowable stresses
Program calculates actual and allowable stresses by following methods:
i. Axial Stress:
Actual tensile stresses (F ) = Force / (A x NSF ),
T
fc =
2
1 0.4 F
( )
0.227F
2
( )
when
when >
=
=
559 STAAD.Pro
0.6F
3
2
2 2
()
cy
,Z
cz
tz
(fbcy ) = ft
Allowable bending stress for M
When b p b , fb = F/
When p b <b eb ,
fb =
b p
b
F 1 0.4
b p
e
When eb <b ,
fb =
2
b
F
2.17
Where:
b = My / Me
e b
= 1 / 0.6
bcz
= 1.5 x (f
bcz
Where:
C = 1.75 - 1.05 (M2 / M1) +0.3 (M2 / M1)2
Allowable bending stress for M , f
=f
=f
y bty
z btz
t
bcz
ww
qz = Qz / Aff
Where:
A = flange shear area = 2/3 times total flange area
ff
Note: All other member capacities (axial tension, axial compression, and shear) are
calculated as for AIJ 2002. See "Member Capacities" on page 577
561 STAAD.Pro
from the engineer to the program. The default parameter values have been selected such that
they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design
requirements of the situation, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to
exactly model the physical structure.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 12B.1-Japanese Steel Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default Value
Description
BEAM
0.0
CAN
Parameter
Name
CB
Default Value
Description
DFF
None
(Mandatory
for
deflection
check)
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
DMAX
100 cm
DMIN
0.0 cm
FYLD
235 MPA
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
MAIN
0.0
563 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
MISES
Default Value
Description
NSF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
SSY
0.0
SSZ
0.0
TMAIN
400
TMP
0 = Permanent Loading
1 = Temporary Loading
TRACK
0.0
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
UNL
Member
Length
Description
12B.3.1 Notes
a. When performing the deflection check, you can choose between two methods. The
first method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter, is based on the local
displacement. See Section 5.44 of the Technical Reference Manual for details on local
displacement.
If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever style deflection.
Let (DX1, DY1,DZ1) represent the nodal displacements (in global axes) at the node
defined by DJ1 (or in the absence of DJ1, the start node of the member). Similarly,
(DX2, DY2, DZ2) represent the deflection values at DJ2 or the end node of the
member.
Compute Delta =
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 and DJ2 or, between start node and end
node, as the case may be.
Then, if CAN is specified a value 1, dff = L/Delta
Ratio due to deflection = DFF/dff
b. If CAN = 0, the "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation
of local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the
"Deflection Length" will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some
situations, the "Deflection Length" may be different. A straight line joining DJ1 and
DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four
joints and three members. The Deflection Length for all three members will be equal
to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be
used to model this situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1 and
DJ2 should be 4.
565 STAAD.Pro
c. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length and
local deflections will be measured from original member line.
d. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for
steel design.
Note: As with other design checks, the unity check value can be modified by use of the
RATIO parameter.
The von Misers stresses are evaluated and checked as follows:
2
x + 3 xy
f
< 1.0
Where:
Longitudinal stress in beam element:
x =
Fx
Ax
My
Zy
Mz
Zz
F = Axial force
x
A = Cross-sectional area,
x
xy =
Mx
Zx
Fy
Ay
Fz
Az
M = Torsional moment
x
I = Torsional constant
x
In the STRESSES output category, stress value of (numerator of the von Mises stress equation)
is output as the value of fm. Along with slenderness ratios, stresses, and deflections, von Mises
stress equation is checked. When its left-hand side yields the maximum ratio value, it is
printed as RATIO and VON MISES is printed as CRITICAL COND.
Problem
A cantilever beam of length 0.3 meters is subjected to a permanent joint load of 3 kN in the Y
direction and 2 kN in the Z direction as well as a 0.008 kNm torque applied at the end. Axial
tension of 10 kN is also applied to the member. An H100x50x5 section is used from the
Japanese steel tables.
Given
Section properties
D = 100 mm, B = 50 mm, t = 7 mm, t = 5 mm
f
I = 15,000
x
mm 4
Z = I /t
x
x max
The maximum of the left hand side of the von Mises stress equation apparently occurs at the
fixed end of the beam. Section forces at the fixed end are ass follow:
-10.0 kN (Tension)
567 STAAD.Pro
Solution
From these section forces, and
x
x =
Fx
Ax
My
Zy
Mz
Zz
xy
10, 000
1, 185
600, 000
5, 920
900, 000
37, 400
N/mm2
xy =
Mx
Zx
Fy
Ay
Fz
Az
8, 000
2, 143
3, 000 2
500
2, 000 2
467
N/mm2
From and , f
x
xy m
is calculated:
Since ft = FYLD/1.5 = 300.0 MPa/15 = 200.0 N/mm2 and k = 1 for permanent loading,
Ratio = 135.22/(200.0 1) = 0.676 < 1, So OK.
Comparison
Table 12B.2-Comparison of results for a AIJ 2005 verification problem
Hand
Calculation
STAAD.Pro
Result
Comments
135.22
135.2
None
Output
The TRACK 2.0 output portion is as follows:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (
AIJ 2005)
********************************************
v1.0
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|
Y
PROPERTIES
|
|*************
|
IN CM UNIT |
|
* |=============================|
===|===
------------ |
|MEMBER
1 * | JAPANESE SECTIONS
|
|
AX = 11.85 |
|
* | ST H100X50X5
|
|
--Z AY =
5.00 |
|DESIGN CODE * |
|
|
AZ =
4.67 |
| AIJ-2005 * ===============================
===|===
ZY =
5.92 |
|
*
ZZ = 37.40 |
569 STAAD.Pro
|
* |<---LENGTH (ME=
0.30 --->|
iY =
1.12 |
|*************
iZ =
3.97 |
|
ZX =
2.14 |
|
0.90(KN-MET)
|
|PARAMETER
|L1
STRESSES
|
|IN
N
MM
|
L1 L1
IN
N
MM|
|--------------- +
L1 L1
-------------|
| KL/R-Y=
26.8 |
L1
FA = 189.5 |
| KL/R-Z=
7.6 +
L1
fa =
8.4 |
| UNL
=
2.5 |
L1 L1
FCZ = 200.0 |
| CB
=
1.75 +
FTZ = 200.0 |
| CMY
=
0.85 |
L1 L1
FCY = 200.0 |
| CMZ
=
0.85 +
L1 L1
FTY = 200.0 |
| FYLD = 300.0 |
L0 fbz =
24.1 |
| NSF
=
1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---|
fby = 101.4 |
| DFF
=
0.0 -0.05
FV = 115.5 |
| dff
=
0.0
ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE
fv =
6.0 |
|
(WITH LOAD NO.)
FT = 200.0 |
|
fm = 135.2 |
|
MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KN-MET)
Sx = 133.9 |
|
------------------------Tou =
11.1 |
|
|
|
AXIAL
SHEAR-Y
SHEAR-Z
MOMENT-Y
MOMENT-Z
|
|
|
|
VALUE
-10.00
3.00
2.00
0.60
0.90
|
|
LOCATION
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
|
|
LOADING
1
1
1
1
1
|
|
|
|**************************************************************************|
|*
*|
|*
DESIGN SUMMARY (KN-MET)
*|
|*
-------------*|
|*
*|
|*
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
*|
|
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
|
|
======================================================
|
|
PASS
VON MISES
0.676
1
|
|
10.00 T
0.60
-0.90
0.000
|
|*
*|
|**************************************************************************|
|
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
571 STAAD.Pro
12C.1 General
The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis
and allowable stress design. Facilities are available for member selection as well as code
checking. Two major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by
stability considerations. The following sections describe the salient features of the design
approach.
Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceedance of the allowable
stresses or capacities and the most economical section is selected on the basis of the least
weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness
requirements and the stability criteria. Users are recommended to adopt the following steps in
performing the steel design:
l
Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values.
12C.3 MemberPropertySpecifications
For specification of member properties of standard Japanese steel shapes, the steel section
library available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands
used to assign properties from the built-in steel table. Members properties may also be
specified using the User Table facility. For more information on these facilities, refer to Section
1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be
obtained using the tools of the graphical user interface.
Following are the descriptions of different types of sections.
12C.4.1 I shapes
I shapes are specified in the following way:
Note: While specifying the web thickness, the portion after the decimal point should be
excluded.
1 TO 9 TA ST I300X150X11
12 TO 15 TA ST I350X150X9
12C.4.2 H shapes
H shapes are specified as follows:
Note: While specifying the web thickness, the portion after the decimal point should be
excluded.
1 TO 8 TA ST H200X100X4
13 TO 17 TA ST H350X350X12
12C.4.3 T shapes
T shapes are specified as follows:
573 STAAD.Pro
Note: While specifying the web thickness, the portion after the decimal point should be
excluded.
20 TO 25 TA ST T250X19
12C.4.4 Channels
Channel sections are specified as follows.
25 TO 34 TA ST C125X65X6
46 TO 49 TA ST C200X90X8
12C.4.6 Angles
Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle specification
is as follows.
The letter L (signifying that the section is an angle) is followed by the length of the legs and
then the thickness of the leg, all in millimeters. The word ST signifies that the section is a
standard angle meaning that the major principal axis coincides with the local YY axis
specified in Chapter 1 of Section 1.5.2 of the Technical Reference Manual.
1 4 TA ST L150X90X9
If the minor principal axis coincides with the local YY axis specified in Chapter 2 of the User's
Manual, the word RA (Reverse Angle) should be used instead of ST as shown below.
7 TO 23 TA RA L90X75X9
The first example indicates a short legs back-to-back double angle comprised of 100X65X7
angles separated by 2 length units. The latter is a long legs back-to-back double angle
comprised of 300X90X11 angles separated by 3 length units.
12C.4.8 Tubes
Tube names are input by their dimensions. For example,
6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
is a tube that has a height of 8 length units, width of 6 length units and a wall thickness of
0.5 length units. Only code checking, no member selection can be performed on TUBE
sections.
575 STAAD.Pro
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 267.0 mm and a thickness of 7.0 mm. Only code
checking, no member selection, can be performed on PIPE sections.
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 660.4 mm and a thickness of 16.0 mm. Only code
checking, no member selection, can be performed on CHS sections.
specifies a tube with a depth of 200 mm, a width of 100 mm, and a thickness of 12 mm. Only
code checking, no member selection, can be performed on CHS sections.
specifies a square tube with a width of 200 mm and a thickness of 12 mm. Only code checking,
no member selection, can be performed on CHS sections.
Sample Input file containing Japanese shapes
STAAD SPACE
UNIT KIP FEET
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 12 11 0 0
MEMB INCIDENCE
1 1 2 11
UNIT INCH
MEMBER PROPERTY JAPANESE
* H-SHAPE
1 TA ST H200X100X4
* I SHAPE
2 TA ST I250X125X10
* T SHAPE
3 TA ST T200X19
* CHANNEL
4 TA ST C125X65X6
* DOUBLE CHANNEL
5 TA D C200X90X8
* REGULAR ANGLE
6 TA ST L100X75X7
* REVERSE ANGLE
7 TA RA L90X75X9
* DOUBLE ANGLE - LONG LEG BACK TO BACK
8 TA LD L125X75X7 SP 2.0
* DOUBLE ANGLE - SHORT LEG BACK TO BACK
9 TA SD L300X90X11 SP 1.5
* TUBE
10 TA ST TUBE DT 3.0 WT 2.5 TH 0.25
* PIPE
11 TA ST PIPE OD 3.0 ID 2.5
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES
FINISH
577 STAAD.Pro
12C.5.2 Methodology
For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as required by
AIJ specifications. The design procedure consist of following three steps.
1. Calculation of sectional properties
The program extract sectional properties like sectional area (A ), Moment of Inertia
about Y axis and Z axis (Iyy, Izz) from in-built Japanese Steel Table and calculates Zz,
Zy, iy, iz using appropriate formula. For calculation of i (radius of gyration needed for
bending ), program calculates moment of inertia (Ii )and sectional area (Ai ) for 1/6th
section and then uses following formula:
i = Ii / A i
Note: The above mentioned procedure for calculation of i is applicable for I shape,
H shape and Channel sections.
2. Calculation of actual and allowable stresses
Allowable stresses for structural steel under permanent loading shall be determined on
the basis of the values of F given in the following table.
STKN490
SS400
STK400
STKR400
SSC400
SMA490
SWH400
STKR490
STK490
t 40
235
325
235
275
375
235
325
355
400
40< t
100
215
295
215
255
215
295*
335
400
579 STAAD.Pro
fc =
2
1 0.4 F
( )
0.227F
when
when >
( )
=
=
0.6F
3
2
2 2
()
cy
,Z
cz
tz
(fbcy ) = ft
Allowable bending stress for Mz
(fbcz) = {1 - .4 x (lb / i)2 / (C 2 )} ft max
= 900/ (lb x h / Af)
For Temporary case, f
bcz
= 1.5 x (f
bcz
Where:
C = 1.75 - 1.05 (M2 / M1) +0.3 (M2 / M1)2
Allowable bending stress for M , f
y bty
=f
z btz
=f
bcz
ww
qz = Qz / Aff
Where:
A = flange shear area = 2/3 times total flange area
ff
581 STAAD.Pro
ix. von Mises stress ratio (if the von Mises stresses were set to be checked)=
f /(kf )
m
Note: This output format is available only when the BEAMparameter value is 0 and the
TRACK parameter value is 3. If section command is not used design information will
be printed for two ends only. If Member Truss option is used no Shear Design
information will be printed.
Example:
SECTION 0.0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.0 ALL
PARAMETER
CODE JAPANESE 2002
BEAM 0.0 ALL
TMP 0.0 MEMB 1 TO 4
TMP 1.0 MEMB 5 TO 8
TRACK 3 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 12C.2-Japanese Steel Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default Value
Description
583 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
BEAM
Default Value
0.0
Description
Locations of design:
0. Design only for end moments
or those at locations specified
by the SECTION command.
1. Calculate moments at twelfth
points along the beam, and use
the maximum Mz location for
design.
CAN
CB
DFF
None
(Mandatory for
deflection
check)
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
DMAX
100 cm
DMIN
0.0 cm
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
FYLD
235 MPA
MAIN
0.0
MISES
NSF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
SSY
0.0
Sidesway:
0. Sidesway in local y-axis.
1. No sidesway
SSZ
585 STAAD.Pro
0.0
Parameter
Name
TMAIN
Default Value
400
Description
TMP
Loading condition:
0. Permanent Loading
1. Temporary Loading
TRACK
0.0
Member
Length
UNF
1.0
12C.7.1 Notes
a. When performing the deflection check, you can choose between two methods. The first
method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter, is based on the local displacement.
See Section 5.44 of the Technical Reference Manual for details on local displacement.
If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever style deflection. Let
(DX1, DY1,DZ1) represent the nodal displacements (in global axes) at the node defined
by DJ1 (or in the absence of DJ1, the start node of the member). Similarly, (DX2, DY2,
DZ2) represent the deflection values at DJ2 or the end node of the member.
Compute Delta =
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 and DJ2 or, between start node and end
node, as the case may be.
Then, if CAN is specified a value 1, dff = L/Delta
Ratio due to deflection = DFF/dff
b. If CAN = 0, the "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation
of local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the
"Deflection Length" will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some
situations, the "Deflection Length" may be different. A straight line joining DJ1 and
DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four
joints and three members. The Deflection Length for all three members will be equal
to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be
used to model this situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1 and
DJ2 should be 4.
c. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length
and local deflections will be measured from original member line.
d. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for
steel design.
587 STAAD.Pro
PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance
from start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Note: As with other design checks, the unity check value can be modified by use of the
RATIO parameter.
The von Misers stresses are evaluated and checked as follows:
2
x + 3 xy
f
< 1.0
Where:
Longitudinal stress in beam element:
x =
Fx
Ax
My
Zy
Mz
Zz
F = Axial force
x
A = Cross-sectional area,
x
xy =
Mx
Zx
Fy
Ay
Fz
Az
M = Torsional moment
x
I = Torsional constant
x
In the STRESSES output category, stress value of (numerator of the von Mises stress equation)
is output as the value of fm. Along with slenderness ratios, stresses, and deflections, von Mises
stress equation is checked. When its left-hand side yields the maximum ratio value, it is
printed as RATIO and VON MISES is printed as CRITICAL COND.
589 STAAD.Pro
Section 13
Mexican Codes
591 STAAD.Pro
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (40 cm depth and 20 cm width)
and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to
be circular with 20 cm diameter. Note that no area (AX) is provided for these members. For
concrete design, this property must not be provided. If shear areas and moments of inertias
are not provided, the program calculates these values from YD and ZD. Notice that in the
above example the IZ and IY values provided are actually 50% of the values calculated using
YD and ZD. This is a conventional practice which takes into consideration revised section
parameters due to cracking of section.
Note that the third and the fourth set of members in the above example represent a T-shape
and a TRAPEZOIDAL shape respectively. Depending on the properties (YD, ZD, YB, ZB, etc.)
provided, the program will determine whether the section is rectangular, trapezoidal or Tshaped and the BEAM design will be done accordingly.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 13A.1-Mexican Concrete Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default Value
Parameters
593 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
BTP
Default Value
Parameters
CCL
CFB
FALSE
CLB
3 cm
CLS
3 cm
CLT
3 cm
DAG
2 cm
DCP
TRUE
DEPTH
DIM
YD
TRUE
Parameter
Name
DSD
EFACE
EXP
FC
595 STAAD.Pro
Default Value
TRUE
FALSE
200 Kg/cm 2
Parameters
FYMAIN
4,200 Kg/cm 2
FYSEC
4,200 Kg/cm 2
LSS
LTC
FALSE
MAXMAIN
12
MINMAIN
2.5
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Parameters
MINSEC
2.5
MMY
1.0
MMZ
1.0
MOE
198,000
Kg/cm 2
NSECTION
12
PHI
90 degrees
PSS
TRUE
REINF
SFACE
TEQ
FALSE
FALSE - No
TRUE - Yes
Parameter
Name
Default Value
TRACK
Parameters
Beam Design
0. Critical Moment will not be
printed out with beam design
report.
1. Will mean a print out.
2. Will print out required steel
areas for all intermediate
sections specified by NSECTION.
Column Design
0. Will print out detailed design
results.
1. Will mean a print out column
interation analysis results in
addition to TRACK 0 output.
2. will print out a schematic
interaction diagram and
intermediate interaction values
in addition to all of the above.
WIDTH
ZD
* These values must be provided in the current unit system being used.
Note: When using metric bars for design, provide values for these parameters in actual
mmunits instead of the barnumber. The following metric bar sizes are available:
4.2mm, 6 mm, 8 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 16 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 32 mm, 40 mm, 50
mm and 60 mm.
597 STAAD.Pro
load, that is if the required reinforcement is greater than the maximum allowable for the cross
section, the program reports that beam fails in maximum reinforcement. Rectangular sections
are also designed with compression reinforcement.
Effective depth is chosen as Total depth - (Clear cover + diameter of stirrup + half the dia. of
main reinforcement), and a trial value is obtained by adopting proper bar sizes for the stirrups
and main reinforcements. The relevant clauses in Sections 1.5, 1.6, 2.1.1-2-5, 3.10 and 5.2.2 of NTC
Concrete are utilized to obtain the actual amount of steel required as well as the maximum
allowable and minimum required steel. These values are reported as ROW, ROWMX and
ROWMN in the output and can be printed using the parameter TRACK 1.0 (see Table 13A.1).
In addition, the maximum, minimum and actual bar spacing are also printed.
It is important to note that beams are designed for flexural moment MZ only. The moment
MY is not considered in the flexural design.
13A.5.4 Output
Level
Serial number of bar level which may contain one or more bar group
Height
Height of bar level from the bottom of the beam
Bar Info
Reinforcement bar information specifying number of bars and bar size
From
Distance from the start of the beam to the start of the reinforcement bar
To
Distance from the start of the beam to the end of the reinforcement bar
Anchor (STA/END)
States whether anchorage, either hook or continuation, is needed at the start (STA)
or at the end (END).
Row
Actually required flexural reinforcement (As/bd) where b = width of cross section
(ZD for a rectangular or square section) and d = effective depth of cross section (YD
minus the distance from extreme tension fiber to the centroid of main
reinforcement).
ROWMN
Minimum required flexural reinforcement (Amin/bd)
ROWMX
Maximum required flexural reinforcement (Amax/bd)
Spacing
Distance between centers of adjacent bars of main reinforcement
Vu
Factored shear force at section
Vc
Nominal shear strength provided by concrete
Vs
Nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement
Tu
Factored torsional moment at section
Tc
Nominal torsional moment strength provided by concrete
Ts
Nominal torsional moment strength provided by torsion reinforcement
599 STAAD.Pro
AT END
SUPPORT - Vu=
5.63 KN Vc=
0.00 KN Vs=
0.00 KN
Tu=
0.09 Kn Me Tc=
0.00 Kn Me Ts=
0.00 Kn Me LOAD
STIRRUPS ARE NOT REQUIRED.
Des. Pn = Pu/FR where FR is the Strength Reduction Factor and Pu is the axial load
for the critical load case.
Mu = (Mux.Mmagx)+ (Muy.Mmagy)
601 STAAD.Pro
Pn max
M-bal.
2095196.38
2095196.38
727411.12
29235398.00
40.2
M0
Des.Pn
'Des.Mn
P-tens.
e/h
20606994.00
-550620.00
0.00
20000000.00
NaN
--------------------------------------------------------
Mn
Pn
Mn
|
1934027.38
5373253.50
967013.69 27278232.00
P0 |*
1772858.50 11408365.00
805844.75 28658428.00
| *
1611689.50
Pn,max|__*
|
1450520.62
1289351.62
Pn
|
*
1128182.62 25462606.00
NOMINAL|
AXIAL|
16296947.00
644675.81 29473708.00
20083028.00
23117562.00
483506.84 28901764.00
322337.91 27205616.00
161168.95 24433192.00
*
*
COMPRESSION|
*
Pb|-------*Mb
|
___________|____*_______
|
* M0
| *
Mn,
BENDING
P-tens|*
MOMENT
Element design will be performed only for the moments MX and MY at the center of the
element. Design will not be performed for FX, FY, FXY, MXY. Also, design is not performed
at any other point on the surface of the element. Shear is checked with Q.
A typical example of element design output is shown below. The reinforcement required to
resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required
to resist My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, CLB,
CLS, CLT, DIM, and EXP listed in Table 11A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters
mentioned are not used in slab design.
Figure 13A.2 - Element moments: Longitudinal (L) and Transverse (T)
603 STAAD.Pro
13B.1 General
The design philosophy considered is that of the Load Cases and Resistance Method or Limit
States Design usually known as Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD).
Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which
they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are
recognized--ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state
design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and
resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under
various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are
acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation of the Mexican Standards for steel structures, members are
proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength, and
stability. It allows to check deformation to verify serviceability.
Accordingly, the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as
augmented by the designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type,
or other such parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks that main code
requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria.
The following sections describe the salient features of the Mexican specifications as
implemented in STAAD steel design. A brief description of the fundamental concepts is
presented here.
On the left side of the inequality, the required strength is the summation of the various load
effects, Q , multiplied by their respective load factors, Y . The design strength, on the right
i
i
side, is the nominal strength or resistance, R , multiplied by a resistance factor, FR.
n
In the STAAD implementation of the Mexican Standards, it is assumed that the user will use
appropriate load factors and create the load combinations necessary for analysis. The design
portion of the program will take into consideration the load effects (forces and moments)
obtained from analysis. In calculation of resistances of various elements (beams, columns
etc.), resistance (nominal strength) and applicable resistance factor will be automatically
considered.
605 STAAD.Pro
effects of residual stresses and initial out-of-straightness. Compression strength for a particular
member is calculated by STAAD according to the procedure outlined in Section 3.2 of the
NTC. For slender elements, the procedure described in Section 2.3.6.NTC is also used.
The procedures of Section 3.2 of the Commentaries, design helps and examples of the
Complementary Technical Standards for the Design and Construction of Steel Structures (de
los Comentarios, ayudas de diseo y ejemplos de las Normas Tcnicas Complementarias para el
Diseo y Construccin de Estructuras Metlicas, DDF (Comentarios - Julio 1993) were
implemented for the determination of design strength for these limit states.
Effective length for calculation of compression resistance may be provided through the use of
the parameters KY, KZ and/or LY, LZ. If not provided, the entire member length will be taken
into consideration.
In addition to the compression resistance criterion, compression members are required to
satisfy slenderness limitations which are a function of the nature of use of the member (main
load resisting component, bracing member, etc.). In both the member selection and code
checking process, STAAD immediately does a slenderness check on appropriate members
before continuing with other procedures for determining the adequacy of a given member.
Note: The local X axis goes into the page; the Global Y axis is vertical upwards; the
shaded area indicates area under compression; the area not shaded indicates area
under tension.
Stress areas due to bending about Z axis (MZ)
607 STAAD.Pro
formulas to include structures with lateral displacements in the future considering for B2 the
columns individually and not the complete floor analysis.
It is taken into account if the elements have transverse loads and if the ends are angularly
restrained.
Default Value
Description
BEAM
CB
Parameter
Name
CMB
Default Value
Description
DFF
DJ1
None
(Mandatory for
deflection check,
TRACK 4.0)
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
DMAX
114 cm
DMIN
0.0 cm
DSD
609 STAAD.Pro
FU
4,230 Kg/cm 2
FYLD
2,530 kg/cm 2
Parameter
Name
IMM
Default Value
Description
INO
IRR
KX
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
LX
Member length
LY
Member length
LZ
Member length
LDR
NSF
RATIO
1.0
STIFF
Longer of Member
length or depth
TRACK
Member length
611 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
UNT
Default Value
Description
Member length
1. For deflection check, parameters DFF, DJ1, and DJ2 from Table 2B.1 may be used. All
requirements remain the same.
2. Top and Bottom represent the positive and negative side of the local Y axis (local Z axis
ifSET Z UP is used).
613 STAAD.Pro
Section 14
Norwegian Codes
615 STAAD.Pro
stability check including local plate buckling of un-stiffened pipe walls according to
NPD
channel
user table (wide flange, I-sections, tapered I, tube, channel and RA angle)
The code check is not available for the following cross-section types:
l
Double angles
Tapered tubes
NS 3472 and NPD code checking covered in this document are available through two
separate STAAD.Pro Code check packages.
This document is not a lecture in use of NS 3472 or NPD. This document explains how,
and which parts of, the Norwegian steel codes that have been implemented in
STAAD.Pro.
When L-sections are used, the Code Check requires RA angle definition.
The prismatic section defined in the code check (rectangular massive box) is not
identical to the general prismatic profile defined in the STAAD.Pro analysis package.
EDR does not accept any liability for loss or damage from or in consequence for use of the
program.
14A.1.1 Nomenclature
NS - refers to NS 3472 ref. [1]
NS2 - refers to NS 3472 ref. [6]
NPD - refers to NPD94 ref. [5]
14A.1.2 References
1. NS 3472 3.utg. 2001
Prosjektering av stlkonstruksjoner
Beregning og dimensjonering
2. STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual, Release 2002
3. NS 3472 1.utg. 1973
Prosjektering av stlkonstruksjoner
Beregning og dimensjonering
4. Roark &Young`s 5th edition
5. NPD utg. 1994
Veiledning om utforming, beregning og dimensjonering av stlkonstruksjoner. Sist
endret 1. oktober 1993.
6. NS 3472 2.utg.1984
Prosjektering av stlkonstruksjoner
Beregning og dimensjonering
617 STAAD.Pro
specific details about the treatment of pipes. Section 3.4 explains how this is adopted when NS
is selected for code checking.
The NPD however have a more thorough check of pipe members, and consider the effect of
local buckling of the pipe wall in conjunction with the stability check. In addition, the NPD
code gives joint capacity formulae for brace to chord connections for pipe members.
The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis
and ultimate limit state design. Two major failure modes are recognized:
l
failure by overstressing
The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach. Members are
proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the characteristic stresses or
capacities and the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. It
is generally assumed that the user will take care of the detailing requirements like the
provision of stiffeners and check the local effects like flange buckling, web crippling, etc.
The user is allowed complete control over the design process through the use of the
parameters listed in Table 2.1. Default values of parameters will yield reasonable results in most
circumstances. However, the user should control the design and verify results through the use
of the design parameters.
For members that cannot sway, without transverse loading, coefficients b are calculated and
proper dimensioning moments are used in the interaction formulae.
(x + by + bz)
+ 3(x + y + z)
fy
m
NS 3472
The material factor default value is 1.10. Other values may be input with the MF parameter.
The nominal stresses should satisfy
j
fy
m
= fd
NPD
The general requirement is according to NPD 3.1.1. For stability the NPD 3.1.1 and 3.1.3 requires
that the structural coefficient is considered.
S d fkd =
fk
m mk (S d)
Where:
S = reference stress or load effect resultant
d
f = characteristic capacity
k
kd
619 STAAD.Pro
= design capacity
= material coefficient
mk
= structural coefficient
shall be equal to 1.0 for frames. For pipe members is a function of the reduced
mk
mk
slenderness. In the STAAD.Pro implemented NPD code this is calculated automatically.
Note: Check b) handles members subjected to axial loads, bending moments and
hydrostatic pressure. In other words, check b) assumes that stresses resulting from
shear and torsion are of minor importance, e.g., in jacket braces.
Check c) provides the unity check based on the stability requirement for un-stiffened
cylindrical shells subjected to axial compression or tension, bending, circumferential
compression or tension, torsion or shear. The unity check refers to the interaction formulae in
NPD 3.4.4.1. The stability requirement is given in NPD 3.4.7.
Default
Value
none
Description
Reference
BEAM
0.0
Sec. NS
12.2.2
1.0
Fig. NS 3
Sec. NS
12.3
BZ
1.0
Fig. NS 3
Sec. NS
12.3
CB
1.0
Sec. NS2
A5.5.2 Fig.
NS2
A5.5.2a)-e)
vi
CMY
1.0
Valid for
the NPD
code only
CMZ
0.49
Sec. NS
12.3.4 Fig.
NS 6.
Default
see NS
3472
Fig. NS 3
Sec. NS
12.2 NS
Table 11
CY
CZ
621 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
DMAX
100.0
[cm]
DMIN
0.0 [cm]
FYLD
235
MF
1.1
Material factor / Resistance factor,
(NS3472)
m
1.15
(NPD)
Reference
Tab. NS 3
Sec. NS
10.4.2 Sec.
NPD 3.1
RATIO
1.0
Sec. NS
12.3.4.2
SSY
0.0
Sec. NS
12.3.4 Tab.
NS 12 Sec.
NPD
3.2.1.4
Sec. NS
12.3.4 Tab.
NS 12 Sec
NPD
3.2.1.4
SSZ
0.0
TRACK
0.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
UNL
Member
length
Reference
Sec. NS
12.3
The parameter CMY will, when given with negative value, define an inside pressure in pipe
members. The pressure corresponds to given water depth in meters.
The parameter CB defines the value with respect to calculation of the ideal lateral buckling
moment for single symmetric wide flange profiles, ref. NS app. 5.2.2.
14A.3.1 Example
Note: This is a partial example containing only the information pertaining to the
Norwegian steel design code; used at the end of the input file.
623 STAAD.Pro
14A.4.1 Buckling
nmax + kz mz + ky my 1
+ kLT
mz
LT
+ k ym y 1
Where:
i = z,y
nmax = n/min
n = Nf/Nd
min = min(z,y )
i = Nkd,i/Nd
ki = 1i
n
i m
1.5
i = i(2Mi - 4) 0.9
Mi
ref. NS Tab. 12
kLT = 1 LT
1.0
y m
LT = 0.15(y M - 1) 0.9
i = i/1
i = Lki/ii
i =
i =
E
fy
1
2
= 0.5[1 + ( - 0.2) +2 ]
ref. NS Tab 10 & 11
LT =
1
2
2
LT + LT
LT
2
LT = 0.51 + LT 0.4 + LT
W zfz
M cr
Mcr = Mvio
ref. NS2 A5.5.2 Sect. a - d
M vio =
EI zGIT 1 +
EC w
L 2 GI T
= 1.8 - 0.7
= 1.3
= 1.4
M0
M0
M = M , +
M0
M
( )
M,0
LT
M ,
The user can override the calculated factor with the following parameters:
625 STAAD.Pro
y =SSY
z=SSZ
E
L
I Ix 1 +
L2
2.6C w
Ix
concern double symmetric cross sections where y is given in NS fig. A5.5.2, (input parameter
CB), L = member length for lateral buckling (input parameter UNL), Cw and Ix , see section 5.
For single symmetric cross sections, the ideal lateral buckling moment is
M vix =
2EI y
L
5a
rx
3
2
5a
ys + C 2 2 +
rx
3
ys
Where:
C2 =
C w + 0.039L 2I T
Iy
= distance from profile CoG to point where the load is acting, assumed to be
on top flange.
The parameter (ref NS fig. A5.5.2.g) is controlled by the input parameter CB.
627 STAAD.Pro
629 STAAD.Pro
Figure 14A.4 - -coefficients for the cantilevered beam with single loads and distributed loads. Dashed curves
apply load on the surface.
IR =
N
N kd
My
Mz
+
+
1.0
M 1 N
N
M
1
d
N Ezd
N Eyd
Where:
N
N kd
N
N
= max
,
N kzd N kyd
vd
N
N kd
IR =
My
N
M yd1
N Eyd
Mz
N
M zd1
N Ezd
1.0
Where:
N
N kd
kyd
N
N
= max
,
N kzd N kyd
and N
kzd
are found from NS 3472 fig. 5.4.la C-curve for y- and z-axis, respectively.
For (2)
eff = 0.60 +0.57
For > (2)
eff =
Where:
=
fy
k = lk /i
i = I/ A
Possible lateral buckling effects and torsional buckling (NS A5.4.5) is not included in the
code check. This has to be evaluated by the user separately.
631 STAAD.Pro
fy
m
Where:
= N/A = axial compressive stress
c
mk
= structural coefficient
= c / fE
fE =
2E 2
lk
i = I/ A
*b = c
fy
fk
11
fk
mfE
l = kl
k
E
fy
0.5
0.1
E
fy
fy
1+
Where:
2
f y ao
j fea
b0
feb
p 0
fep
fe
j = (a + b)2 a + b p + p2 + 3 2
0 when
a
a0 = 0
< 0 when
a
a0 = -a
0 when
b
b0 = 0
< 0 when
b
b0 = -b
0 when
p
p0 = 0
< 0 when
p
p0 = p
= design axial stress in the shell due to axial forces (tension positive)
a
= design bending stress in the shell due to global bending moment (tension
b
positive)
= = design circumferential stress in the shell due to external pressure
p
(tension positive)
= design shear stress in the shell due to torsional moments and shear force.
S
2E
(t )
12(1 ) l
2
p 2
( )
The values of , , and p are given in Table 4.1 for the most important loading cases.
633 STAAD.Pro
0.702 Z
5.34
0.856 Z0.75
Lateral pressure
1.04 Z0.5
Hyrdostatic pressure
1.04 Z0.5
0.5 1 +
r 0.5
150t
0.6
1
rt
1 2
For long shells the elastic buckling resistance against shear stresses is independent of shell
length. For cases with:
1
r
> 3.85
r
t
( rt )
fk
m mk
= Ba
fy
fk
11
fk
fe
+ B 1 b
Where:
B=
1
1
= fy / fe
fe =
E
2
For all profiles other than angle sections absolute values of the stresses are used. For
double symmetric profiles there will always be one stress point.
The stresses are calculated in several stress points at each member section. At each stress
point the von Mises stress is checked as follows:
2
j = 2o + p2 o p + 3( x + y + z)
fy
m
Where:
tot = | x + by + bz |
stress from hydrostatic pressure.
p
635 STAAD.Pro
Section Properties
A , I , I , and I are taken from STAAD.Pro database
x
Az = (2/3) b t 2
y = Fy /Ay
z = Fz/Az
A and A are not used in the code check
y
Cw =
(h t ) b t
24
2 3
ref. NS app. C3
Ty = dA z
Tz = dA y
Stress calculation
General stresses are calculated as:
= x + by + bz =
= x + y + z =
Mx
Ix
Fx
Ax
c+
My
Iy
V yTz
Iz
z+
+
Mz
Iz
VzT y
Iy
Where the component stresses are calculated as shown in the following table:
by
Mz b
Mx
Iz 2
Ix
bz
F y bt h
2
I z 2t
Fz t b 2
My b
Iy 2
0
Fx
Ax
Mz
Iz
Ix
I y 8t
F y bt h
2
h1
Mx
Iz
2
F y bt h 2 + 0.5h 1 s
Iz
In general wide flange profiles are not suitable for large torsional moments. The reported
torsional stresses are indicative only. For members with major torsional stresses a separate
evaluation has to be carried out. Actual torsional stress distribution is largely dependent on
surface curvature at stress point and warping resistance.
Section properties
A , I , I , and I are taken from STAAD.Pro database, except for tapered sections
x x y
z
where these values are calculated for each section checked. (i.e., Iz, Iy values are
637 STAAD.Pro
b t b 1 t 1(h t / 2 t 1 / 2)
12 b t + b 1 t 1
ref. NS app. C3
See "Double symmetric wide flange profile" on page 635 for equations used in section property
calculations.
Stress calculation
See "Double symmetric wide flange profile" on page 635 for equations used in general stress
calculations.
Where the component stresses are calculated as shown in the following table:
Table 14A.5-Stress calculations at selected stress points for a singly
symmetric wide flange section
Point
No
F y bt (h 1 + t / 2)
Fz t b 2
Iz
I y 8t
Iy 2
Mz
Iz
h2
Mx
Ix
0
Fx
Mz
Iz
Ax
Iz
Mx
Mz
Iz
My b
1
Iy 2
Mz
Iz
Iz
s
F y b 1t 1(h 3 + t 1 / 2)
h3
h4
2
F y bt h 1 + t / 2 + 0.5h 1 s
Iz
My b
1
Iy 2
2t
F y bt (h 1 + t / 2)
h1
Ix
Iy 2
My b
bz
My b
by
Mx
Ix
F y b 1t 1(h 3 + t 1 / 2)
Fz t 1b 2
I y 8t 1
Iz
2t 1
In general wide flange profiles are not suitable for large torsional moments. The reported
torsional stresses are indicative only. For members with major torsional stresses a separate
evaluation has to be carried out. Actual torsional stress distribution is largely dependent on
surface curvature at stress point and warping resistance.
Section properties
d = D - 2t
r = 0.5 (D-t )
a = tan-1 M /M
Ax = /4
z
(D2
- d 2)
A = A = 0.5A
y
I = 2I =/32 (D4 - d 4)
x
639 STAAD.Pro
I = I = /64 (D4 - d 4)
y
Note: In the STAAD.Pro analysis package slightly different values are used
for A , A and I , however this has insignificant influence on the
y
z
x
force distribution.
A = A = 0.6A
Y
I =
2R3t
Section Properties
641 STAAD.Pro
643 STAAD.Pro
645 STAAD.Pro
Section forces
The section forces from the STAAD.Pro analysis are about the principle axis y and z.
The second moment of area (Ty L TZ):
T =AZ
y
T =AY
z
M = F Y4
T
647 STAAD.Pro
Note: Note that b may not be much greater than h. If that is the case, define the
member with h > b and Beta angle 90 instead.
Section Properties
649 STAAD.Pro
ref. [4] tab. 20, case 4 at midpoint the largest side i.e., point 2
The ASCII file should be edited to reflect the correct classification of the joints, gap, can or
stub dimensions, yield stress and other geometric options if required. The program will not
change the brace or chord definition if this is changed or modified in the input file GEOM1.
See Appendix A page xx for GEOM1 example file.
Joint classification parameters in the file GEOM1 are:
KO K joint overlapped
KG K joint with gap
TY T or Y joint
X X joint
Input example for the classification run.
*CLASSIFICATION OF JOINTS, TRACK 99
UNITS MM NEWTON
PARAMETER
CODE NPD GEOM1
FYLD 350 ALL
TRACK 99 ALL
BEAM 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
651 STAAD.Pro
g = a/D
f = Yield stress
y
Q = Factor
f
IP
OP
ax
IP
OP
This section gives design formulae for simple tubular joints without overlap and without
gussets, diaphragms or stiffeners. Tubular joints in a space frame structure shall satisfy:
N Nk / m
Where:
Nk = Q uQ f
f yT
sin
Q is given in Table 6.1 and Q is a factor to account for the nominal longitudinal stress in the
u
f
chord.
Qf = 1.0 - 0.03A2
A2 =
2
2
2
ax
+ IP
+ OP
2
0.64f y
In-plane
bending
Out-of-plane
bending
T and Y
2.5 +19
5.0()
3.2/(1-0.81)
(2.7 +13)
Q
0.90
(2+21)Q
When 0.9, Q is set to 1.0. This is also applicable for moment loading. For cases with
f
tension in the chord, Qf is set to 1.0. This is also applicable for moment loading.
The brace end moments shall be accounted for in the following cases:
a. Out-of-plane bending moment when > 0.85
b. When the brace acts as a cantilever
c. When the rotational stiffness of the connection is considered in the determination of
effective buckling length, and / or the structural coefficient = 1.00 for the beammk
column design of the brace or chord. See Section 3.1.3.
The characteristic capacity of the brace subjected to in-plane bending moment shall be
determined by:
MIPk = Q uQ f
d f yT
sin
Qf = 1.0 - 0.045A2
The characteristic capacity of the brace subjected to out-of-plane bending moment shall be
determined by:
MOPk = Q uQ f
d f yT
sin
Qf = 1.0 - 0.021A2
653 STAAD.Pro
For combined axial and bending loads in the brace, the following interaction equation should
be satisfied:
N
Nk
M
+ IP +
M IPk
M OP
M OPk
1
m
For overlapping tubular joints without gussets, diaphragms, or stiffeners, the total load
component normal to the chord, NN, shall not exceed
NN =
2f y t wl 2
Nk l1
sin +
m l
3 m
t = the lesser of the throat thickness of the overlapping weld or the thickness t
w
of the thinner brace
l = length as shown in NPD fig. 3.10
2
The above formula for the capacity of overlapping joints is valid only for K joints, where
compression in a brace is essentially balanced by tension in brace(s) in the same side of the
joint.
Description
TRACK
no.
Description
99
98
49
Prints member end forces for members entering each joint (at
the end of the member connected to the joint)
31
32
655 STAAD.Pro
Description
Unit
MEMB
Member number
kN
FX
kNm
MYs
kNm
MYm
kNm
MYe
kNm
MYb
kNm
RATIO
Interaction ratio
LOAD
TABLE
MZs
kNm
Symbol
Description
Unit
MZm
kNm
MZe
kNm
MZb
kNm
COND
Critical condition
DIST
Note: Myb and Mzb are the design moments used for max unity ratio.
NS3472 (VERSION 06002)
UNITS ARE KN
AND
METE
MEMB
FX
MYs
MYm
MYe
MYb
RATIO LOAD
TABLE
MZs
MZm
MZe
MZb
COND
DIST
===============================================================================
1
12.80 C
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0 5.08
1
FAIL PIPS40
(AISC SECTIONS)
31.9
-15.9
-36.2
36.2 STAB
10.00
4
24.20 C
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0 1.30
1
FAIL PIPS40
(AISC SECTIONS)
-0.2
-1.4
-2.9
2.9 STAB
14.14
3
26.31 C
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0 0.78
1
PIPS40
(AISC SECTIONS)
5.1
1.3
2.5
5.1 STAB
0.00
2
4.02 C
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0 0.58
1
PIPD60
(AISC SECTIONS)
36.4
-38.1
-6.8
38.9 STAB
5.83
5
5.02 T
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0 0.34
1
PIPS40
(AISC SECTIONS)
3.6
-1.8
1.7
2.8 VMIS
0.00
Symbol
Description
CURVESt
CURVEWk
Beta Z
Unit
Symbol
Description
Unit
Beta Y
FYLD
Betamz
about z-axis
Betamy
about y-axis
Fak Z
Fak Y
MYD
kN-m
MZD
kN-m
MVD
kN-m
IR1
IR2
N/mm
2
m
m
657 STAAD.Pro
5.1
1.3
2.5
5.1 STAB
0.00
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CURVE St A Wk A Beta Z 1.00
Beta Y 1.00
FYLD= 235. N/MM2 |
| Betamz=2.152
Betamy=1.000
FakZ=0.602
FakY=1.500
|
| MYD =.112E+2 KNM MZD =.112E+2 KNM MVD =.112E+2 KNM
|
| IR1
= 0.784 IR2
= 0.784 VON MISES = 0.510
|
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
4
24.20 C
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0 1.30
1
FAIL PIPS40
(AISC SECTIONS)
-0.2
-1.4
-2.9
2.9 STAB
14.14
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CURVE St A Wk A Beta Z 1.00
Beta Y 1.00
FYLD= 235. N/MM2 |
| Betamz=1.510
Betamy=1.000
FakZ=1.500
FakY=1.500
|
| MYD =.112E+2 KNM MZD =.112E+2 KNM MVD =.112E+2 KNM
|
| IR1
= 1.304 IR2
= 1.304 VON MISES = 0.310
|
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
659 STAAD.Pro
Member in compression:
661 STAAD.Pro
663 STAAD.Pro
665 STAAD.Pro
667 STAAD.Pro
669 STAAD.Pro
The code check is available for the pipe cross sections only.
The design of conical transitions and joints with joint cans is not performed.
Design of members per NTC 1987 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes
SELECTCode Pack.
Sd Rd
The design resistance is evaluated for each condition and this check is applied as described in
the following sections.
Note: Ring stiffener design to CL. 6.3.6.2 is not included for this implementation.
Warning: Only tubular sections can be used with the N-004 code in STAAD.Pro. A
warning is presented for any other section type.
The dimensions of the tubular sections are limited as follows:
l
If any of these conditions are not met for a member selected for design, a warning will be
issued by the engine and the design of that member is aborted.
Note: N-004 uses Y to define the action effects that is in plane and Z to define out of
plane effects. This is the opposite to what STAAD uses, where Z defines the in
plane effects and Y the out of plane effects. This document will follow the
STAAD.Pro convention for the Z and Y axes.
The N-004 code also segregates members into those that are subject to hydrostatic pressure
and those that are not subject to hydrostatic pressure. The program allows you to specify
whether a member is subject to hydrostatic pressure or not and, if so, to specify the
hydrostatic pressure for the element. By default the program will assume that all members are
not subject to any hydrostatic pressure. The design parameter HYD is used to specify the
maximum water level with respect to the origin.
If the HYD parameter is specified, the program will take that to be the water level and will
evaluate the pressure distribution on each element assuming a linear increase in pressure
with depth (The density of water is assumed to be 9.8 KN/m 3). Also, if the HYD parameter is
specified, the program will assume that the hydrostatic loads have not been included in the
analysis. For members that are subject to a combination of loads (i.e., bending plus
compression) along with a hydrostatic pressure, the design will be done according to Clause
6.3.9 of the code. In the absence of any hydrostatic pressure on the member the design will be
performed in accordance with Clause 6.3.8 of the code.
671 STAAD.Pro
Sd
t,Rd
= Af /
y m
Where:
N
Sd
Sd
c,Rd
= Af /
c m
Where:
N
Sd
The design axial compressive strength for a member that is not subject to any hydrostatic
pressure will be taken as the smaller of in plane or out of plane buckling strengths determined
by the equations given below:
f = [1.0 - 0282]f when 1.34
c
f =
c
0.9/2f
y
= (f /f ) = kl/(i)(f /E)
cl E
cl
Where:
f = Characteristic local buckling strength
cl
y cle
y cle
y cle
1.911 (Elastic/Plastic)
f =f
cl
cle
when f /f
y cle
Where:
f
cle
D = Outside diameter
t = wall thickness
For a member that is subject to pure compression, if f /f > 0.170, the section will be classed
y cle
as a CLASS 4 (slender section). In such cases, the value of the material factor ( ) used in the
m
above checks is increased according to equation 6.22 (Cl. 6.3.7) of the code.
14B.5 Bending
Clause 6.3.4 states that tubular members subject to pure bending alone shall satisfy:
M
Sd
Rd
= f W/
m
Where:
M
Sd
is calculated as:
m
m
m
14B.6 Shear
Clause 6.3.5 states that tubular members subject to shear shall satisfy:
V
Sd
Rd
= Af /(23
y
m)
Where:
V
Sd
f = Yield strength
y
When torsional shear stresses are present, the following condition shall also be satisfied:
673 STAAD.Pro
T,Sd
T,Rd
= 2I f /(D3
py
m)
Where:
M
T,Sd
p,Sd
h,Rd
= f /
h m)
Where:
= p D/(2t)
p,Sd
Sd
Sd
m)
f = f when f
h
f =
h
> 2.44f
0.7f (f /f )0.4
y he y
f =f
h
he
he
when f
he
when 2.44f f
y
y
he
he
> 0.55f
0.55f
he
= 2C Et/D
h
Where:
C = 0.44t/D when 1.6D/t
h
Where:
M
is the design bending moment about the y axis (out-of plane axis)
is the design bending moment about the z axis (in plane axis)
y,Sd
z,Sd
Sd
Rd
t,Rd
and
Where:
N
Sd
675 STAAD.Pro
ey
and N
ez
are the Euler buckling loads about y & z axes and are given by:
k is the effective length factor and is given in table 6-2 of the code.
N
cl, Rd
The reduction factors used in this clause depend on the structural element type and will be
as given in Table 6-2 of N-004. This requires the member to be classified under any one of the
section types given in the table.
M /M
Sd
Rd
Sd
Rd
Sd
Rd
Sd
Sd
Rd
Rd
If the member is subject to shear forces due to torsion along with bending moments, the
condition to be satisfied is:
M /M
M /M
Sd
Red,Rd
Sd
Red,Rd
Sd
Rd
Sd
Sd
Rd
Rd
Where:
M
Red,Rd
m,Red
T,Sd
= Wf
= f [1 - 3(
m,Red m
/f )2]
T,Sd d
M
/(2R2t)
T,Sd
f = f /
d
y m
The choice of method for checking members subject to combined forces and hydrostatic
pressure used by STAAD.Pro will depend on the HYD parameter specified as a design
parameter. If the HYD parameter has been specified, then the program will assume that the
hydrostatic forces have not been included in the analysis and will perform the necessary
checks as per Method A in code. If, on the other hand, the HYD parameter has not been
specified, the program will use the section forces and use Method B in the code.
a,Sd
q,Sd
Where:
my,Sd
mz,Sd
th,RD
mh,RD
B=
y m
/f
psd
h,Rd
= 5 - 4f /f
h y
a,Sd
Where:
f
cl,Rd
677 STAAD.Pro
= f /
cl m
<
q,Sd
c,Sd
> 0.5f /
he m
and
f
cle
>0.5f
he
Where:
c,Sd
Where:
ac,Sd
and
Where:
is the design axial stress that excludes the stress from hydrostatic
a,Sd
pressure
Additionally, when:
c,Sd
> 0.5f /
he m
and
f
cle
>0.5f
he
ac,Sd
and
679 STAAD.Pro
q,Sd
ac,Sd
<
q,Sd
c,Sd
> 0.5f /
he m
and
f /
cle m
>0.5f /
he m
Where:
c,Sd
Default
Value
none
Description
Parameter
Name
FYLD
Default
Value
235 [MPa]
Description
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
CMY
0.85
CMZ
0.85
LSR
HYD
681 STAAD.Pro
0.0
Parameter
Name
SGR
Default
Value
0.0
Description
DMAX
100.0 [cm]
DMIN
0.0 [cm]
DFF
MAIN
None
(Mandatory
for
deflection
check)
0.0
TMAIN
180.0
TRACK
0.0
RATIO
1.0
Parameter
Name
BEAM
Default
Value
0.0
Description
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint
of member
14B.14.1 Notes
a. C1 and C2 Parameters
The default values of these coefficients are taken from Table 6-4 of N-004 and depend
on the joint and load type:
Table 14B.2-Default values for C1 and C2 parameters
C1
C2
25
11
20
22
20
22
25
30
Joint Type
Note: These values can be changed by setting the K, X, and Y values in the
external geometry file.
14B.14.2 Example
Note: This is a partial example containing only the information pertaining to the
NORSOK N-004 steel design code; used at the end of the input file.
683 STAAD.Pro
PSD 10 MEMB 7 10
SGR 2 MEMB 1 TO 3 7 10
TRACK 2 MEMB 1 TO 3 7 10
CHECK CODE MEMB 1 TO 3 7 10
Prior to completing a joint design, the joint should be classified into one of the three
categories given by the code. Joint classification is the process whereby a BRACE member
connecting into a CHORD member is classified into one of these categories based on the axial
force components in the brace. The classification normally considers all the members at a
joint that lie in a plane. N-004 defines three joint classification categories: K, X, or Y (or a
combination of these).
Joint
Classification
Description
Note: Typical examples of these joint types are given in Figure 6-3 of the N-004 code. It is
worth noting that the joint class for each brace will be different for each load case.
Note: STAAD.Pro does not perform an automatic classification of the joints. This is left
up to the engineer. All joints will initially be classified as Y in the generation of
685 STAAD.Pro
The checks for joint capacity are given in Cl. 6.4.3.2 to 6.4.3.6 and STAAD.Pro performs the
checks as per these clauses. However, the program does not deal with conical joint transitions
and joints with joint cans. The code also specifies checks and limits for the gaps and
eccentricity of joints. This implementation will not perform such geometry checks.
The details of the checks done and the methodology will be discussed in the following
sections.
Note: This file will be produced only once (i.e., when this file does not exist). If this file
exists, it is assumed that you have already done a joint design check and hence the
program reads the values from this file and uses these for joint checks.
NRd =
M sin
MRd =
Q uQ f
f y T 2d
Msin
Q uQ f
Where:
N
Rd
Rd
is the angle between the chord and the brace (max = 90 degrees)
Q = Strength factor which varies with the joint type and the action type in the
u
brace. Refer to Table 6-3 and Clause 6.4.3.3 of N-004 for these equations.
Q = 1.0 A2
f
2
2
2
my
,Sd + mz,Sd
A 2 = C1 a ,Sd + C 2
2
1.62f y
fy
p,Sd
my,Sd
mz,Sd
C1 is the coefficient used for the axial stress term in calculating the joint
resistance. C2 is the coefficient used for the bending stress term in calculating
the joint resistance. The default values of C1 and C2 are as given in Table 6-4 of
N-004. The actual values used are dependent on the values of K, X, and Y
specified for the joint in the external geometry file.
See also Figures 6-3 to 6-6 of N-004 for definition of the various terms for
various joint classes.
687 STAAD.Pro
N Sd
N Rd
M
+ z,Sd +
M z,Rd
M y ,Sd
M y ,Rd
Where:
N
N
Sd
Rd
z,Sd
y,Sd
z,Rd
y,Rd
14B.19.2 Example
LOAD LIST 1 2 4
JOINT
NODE
BLEN
D
1
3
0.140
0.010
2
3
0.075
0.005
K
T
0
0
0
0
X
GAP
0
CHORD
CLEN
5.0
5.0
BRACE
0.168
0.10
4.0
0.168
0.10
16
6.04
Note: If the parameter TRACK is set to 2.0, the program will block out part of the table
and will print the allowable bending stressed in compression (FCY & FCZ) and
tension (FTY & FTZ), allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and allowable
shear stress (FV).
689 STAAD.Pro
************************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KN
MEMBER
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST
PIP13910.0
(BRITISH SECTIONS)
PASS
Eq. 6.44
0.170
1
0.01 C
1.01
6.39
0.00
=======================================================================
MATERIAL DATA
Grade of steel
= S 355
Modulus of elasticity
= 204999.98 N/mm2
Design Strength (py)
=355.00 N/mm2
SECTION PROPERTIES (units - cm)
Member Length =
400.00
Gross Area of cross section =
Moment of inertia
Plastic modulus
Elastic modulus
Radius of gyration
Effective Length
DESIGN PARAMETER (units
Height of water lavel
CMZ :
0.85
CMY
KZ
:
1.00
KY
SECTION CLASSIFICATION
:
:
:
:
:
40.70
z-axis
862.000
168.554
123.407
4.602
400.000
y-axis
862.000
168.554
123.407
4.602
400.000
- m)
N004/2004
:
3.000
:
0.85
:
1.00
:
Class 1
1256.4
790.1
52.0
362.7
44.0
MZ
-5.3
6.4
-5.3
6.4
MY
0.0
1.0
0.0
1.0
=======================================================================
691 STAAD.Pro
none
Description
ACTAGE
BRACE
70 years
0
CLEAR
25 mm
DRYCIR
100%
EFACE
ELY
ELZ
Parameter Default
Name
Value
ENVIR
Description
Environment class
1. LA Least aggressive
2. NA Aggressive
3. MA Very aggressive
FC
35
N/mm 2
FYMAIN
500
N/mm 2
LAGE
7 days
MAX
MAIN
32
MINMAIN
10
MOY
moy factor
MOZ
moz factor
NMAG
nmag factor
REIANG
RELHUM
70%
RFACE
693 STAAD.Pro
SFACE
STIRANG
90
STIRDIA
10 mm
TORANG
45
Stirrup diameter
Torsion angle, in degrees.
Parameter Default
Name
Value
TRACK
10
Description
695 STAAD.Pro
Section 15
Russian Codes
697 STAAD.Pro
15A.1 General
Russian Code SNiP 2.03.0184* plain concrete and concrete structures is based on the method
of limit states. Code SNiP 2.03.0184* defines two groups of limit states.
Analysis according to the first group of limit states is performed to avoid the following
phenomena:
l
fatigue failure,
failure due to the action of load actions and unfavorable environmental effects.
Analysis according to the second group of limit states is performed to avoid the following
phenomena:
l
excessive and long-term opening of cracks if they are allowed according to service
conditions,
excessive displacements.
Analysis of structures for the first group of limit states is performed with the use of the
maximum (design) loads and actions. Analysis of structures for the second group of limit
states is made in accordance with the operational (normative) loads and actions. Ratio
between design and normative loads is called reliability coefficient for loads which is
determined according to SNiP 2.01.07.-85 Loads and actions.
Reliability coefficient n for destination according to SNiP 2.01.07.-85 shall be considered in
determination of loads and their combinations.
Program STAAD.Pro makes it possible to calculate reinforcement for concrete members
according to codes of many countries round the World and Russian Code SNiP 2.03.01-84*
inclusive. Algorithms for calculation of reinforcement of concrete linear (beams, columns) and
2D (two dimensional) (slabs, walls, shells) members are incorporated in program STAAD.Pro.
Not only Code SNiP 2.03.01-84* but also the Guide for design of plain concrete and reinforced
concrete structures from normal weight and lightweight concrete (to SNiP 2.03.01-84) have
been used in creation of these algorithms.
Flange of T-shape beams may be situated at the top zone of the section if the angle BETA=0,
or at the bottom zone of the section, if BETA=180.
Example:
*
COMMAND OF ANALYSIS
PERFORM ANALYSIS
699 STAAD.Pro
.
.* OUTPUT COMMAND TO PRINT RESULTS OF CALCULATION (ACCORDING TO
USERS JUDGMENT)
.
* COMMAND OF LOADING AND THEIR COMBINATIONS CONSIDERED IN DESIGN
LOAD LIST 1 5 TO 9
* COMMAND TO START REINFORCEMENT CALCULATION PROCEDURE
START CONCRETE DESIGN
CODE RUSSIAN
.* LIST OF PARAMETERS BEING USED IN REINFORCEMENT CALCULATION
.
.
BCL 20. MEMB 17 TO 22
CL1 0.04 MEMB 1 TO 40
DD2 10. MEMB 23 TO 40
CRA 0.036 MEMB 41 TO 252
.
.
.
* COMMAND OF BEAM REINFORCEMENT CALCULATION
DESIGN BEAM 23 TO 40
* COMMAND OF COLUMN REINFORCEMENT CALCULATION
DESIGN COLUMN 1 TO 22
* COMMAND OF CALCULATION 2D ELEMENTS (SLABS, WALLS, SHELLS)
DESIGN ELEMENT 41 TO
252
In tables 1, 2 and 3 information about parameters used for calculation of reinforcement for
beams, columns and 2D (two dimensional) members is presented. Values of parameters do not
depend on UNIT command. In the file of input data only such parameters have to be taken,
the values of which differ from determined in the program.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
701 STAAD.Pro
Description
NLT
RCL
RCL
Description
1 = A240;
2 = A300;
3 = A400;
4 = A500;
5 = B500;
6 = A500SP;
European Grade:
USM
1.
11 = S240;
12 = S400;
13 = S500;
UB2
0.9
DD1
16.
DD2
16.
BCL
15.
BCL
UBM
15.
1.
Description
10 = B10;
15 = B15
20 = B20;
25 = B25;
30 = B30;
35 = B35;
40 = B40;
45 = B45;
50 = B50;
55 = B55;
60 = B60;
8.10 = C8/10
12.15 = C12/15;
16.20 = C16/20
25.30 = C25/30
30.37 = C30/37
35.45 = C35/45
40.50 = C50/50
45.55 = C45/55
50.60 = C50/60
60.75 = C60/75
70.85 = C70/85
80.95 = C80/95
90.105 = C90/105
703 STAAD.Pro
TEM
0.
Description
10
CL1
0.05
11
CL2
0.05
12
WST
0.4
13
WLT
0.3
14
SSE
SSE=0, if calculation of
reinforcement amount must be
carried out according to the
requirements of load carrying
capacity (the first limit state);
SSE=1, if calculation of
reinforcement amount must be
carried out according to the
cracking requirements (the second
limit state)
705 STAAD.Pro
RSH
Description
RSH
Description
1 = A240;
2 = A300;
3 = A400;
4 = A500;
5 = B500;
6 = A500SP;
European grade:
l
11 = S240;
12 = S400;
13 = S500;
16
FWT
ZD
17
FWB
ZB
18
DEP
YD
19
SFA
0.
20
EFA
0.
21
NSE
13
NLT
Description
RCL
Description
1 = A240;
2 = A300;
3 = A400;
4 = A500;
5 = B500;
6 = A500SP;
European Grade:
USM
1.
11 = S240;
12 = S400;
13 = S500;
UB2
0.9
707 STAAD.Pro
DD1
16.
DD2
16.
BCL
UBM
15.
1.
Description
10 = B10;
15 = B15
20 = B20;
25 = B25;
30 = B30;
35 = B35;
40 = B40;
45 = B45;
50 = B50;
55 = B55;
60 = B60;
8.10 = C8/10
12.15 = C12/15;
16.20 = C16/20
25.30 = C25/30
30.37 = C30/37
35.45 = C35/45
40.50 = C50/50
45.55 = C45/55
50.60 = C50/60
60.75 = C60/75
70.85 = C70/85
80.95 = C80/95
90.105 = C90/105
TEM
0.
Description
10
CL1
0.05
11
ELY
1.
12
ELZ
1.
13
RSH
1.
1 = A240;
2 = A300;
3 = A400;
4 = A500;
5 = B500;
6 = A500SP;
European grade:
l
11 = S240;
12 = S400;
13 = S500;
709 STAAD.Pro
No.
Parameter Default
Name
Value
NLT
Description
No.
Parameter Default
Name
Value
RCL
Description
1 = A240;
2 = A300;
3 = A400;
4 = A500;
5 = B500;
6 = A500SP;
European Grade:
USM
1.
11 = S240;
12 = S400;
13 = S500;
UB2
0.9
SDX
16.
SDY
16.
No.
Parameter Default
Name
Value
BCL
UBM
15.
1.
Description
10 = B10;
15 = B15
20 = B20;
25 = B25;
30 = B30;
35 = B35;
40 = B40;
45 = B45;
50 = B50;
55 = B55;
60 = B60;
8.10 = C8/10
12.15 = C12/15;
16.20 = C16/20
25.30 = C25/30
30.37 = C30/37
35.45 = C35/45
40.50 = C50/50
45.55 = C45/55
50.60 = C50/60
60.75 = C60/75
70.85 = C70/85
80.95 = C80/95
90.105 = C90/105
711 STAAD.Pro
No.
Parameter Default
Name
Value
TEM
0.
Description
10
CL
0.05
11
CRA
0.05
12
WST
0.4
13
WLT
0.3
713 STAAD.Pro
No.
Parameter Default
Name
Value
14
STA
Description
STA=0, if calculation of
nonsymmetrical reinforcement
must be carried out according to
the requirements of load carrying
capacity (the first limit state);
STA=2, if calculation of
nonsymmetrical reinforcement
must be carried according to the
cracking requirements (the second
limit state);
15
SELX
0.
16
SELY
0.
17
MMA
MMA=0, if reinforcement
calculation must be applied by
stresses in local axis;
No.
Parameter Default
Name
Value
18
MMB
19
RSH
1.
Description
1 = A240;
2 = A300;
3 = A400;
4 = A500;
5 = B500;
6 = A500SP;
European grade:
l
11 = S240;
12 = S400;
13 = S500;
15A.3 Beams
Reinforcement for beams of rectangular and T cross-section can be calculated. In calculation of
longitudinal reinforcement bending moment about local axis
and torsional moments are
considered, but influence of longitudinal forces and bending moments in relation to local axis
is ignored. In calculation of transverse reinforcement shear forces parallel to local axis
and torsional moments are taken into account.
Reinforcement for beams can be calculated either from conditions of strength or from
conditions of open crack width limitation (see parameter SSE).
Parameters SFA and FA are considered only in calculation of transverse reinforcement.
In general case calculation of reinforcement for beams is carried out two times according to
strength conditions and according to conditions of open crack width limitation. In
reinforcement calculations from conditions of strength design values of load have to be taken
and in calculations from conditions of crack width limitation characteristic (normative) load
values are used. Both calculations can be carried out in one session with the use multiple
analysis possibility of the program STAAD.Pro.
In most cases calculation of reinforcement is carried out with account only of a part of
loadings. In such cases command LOAD LIST is used, in which numbers of loads considered
in calculation are indicated. Number of permanent and long-term loads equal to parameter
NLT must be included into the list of considered loads.
It has to be noted, that values of parameters DD1 and DD2 have influence not only on the
width of opened crack but also in some cases, on design and normative reinforcement
resistances.
Parameter BCL can be equal to any value of concrete compression strength class given in
SNiP 2.03.0184* and to any intermediate value as well.
It should be remembered, that accuracy of results of calculation of transverse reinforcement
increases with the value of parameter NSE.
Parameters SFA and FA are considered only in calculations of transverse reinforcement.
Beam 1 is shown in Figure 2 with rigid intervals the lengths of which are: at the start of the
beam 0.3m and at the end 0.2m. In modeling of the beam the following command can be
used.
MEMBER OFFSET
1 START 0.3 0 0
1 END -0.2 0 0
715 STAAD.Pro
In both cases calculated quantity of transverse reinforcement will be the same. Calculated
quantity of longitudinal reinforcement in the second case will be greater.
For beam the following output is generated:
l
beam number;
distance from the side edge of cross-section of the beam web to the centroid of
longitudinal bars located at this edge;
l
concrete class;
In nine columns of the first table the following results are presented:
Table 15A.4-Beam design output 1
Result
Section
Description
distance of the section from the start of
the beam,
As-
As+
Acrc1
Acrc2
* Opened crack width is presented only in the case when calculation is performed according
to conditions limiting opened crack width.
In ten columns of second table the following results are presented:
Table 15A.5-Beam design output 2
Result
Section
Description
distance of the section from the start of
the beam, mm
Qsw
Asw
Load N.
Acrc1 Acrc2
mm sq.cm kNm mm mm
717 STAAD.Pro
--------------------------------------------------------------------0.
10.92
0.41
-152.
/ 2.
6 / 4 0.237
0.121
500.
4.74
0.41
-60. / 0.
5 / 0 0.294
0.157
1000.
1.13
1.13
-5.
/ 17.
4 / 6 0.000
0.000
1500.
1.13
6.41
-8.
/ 75.
4 / 6 0.295
0.147
2000.
1.13
9.24
-11.
/ 115.
4 / 6 0.298
0.149
2500.
1.13
11.53
-14.
/ 139.
4 / 6 0.271
0.134
3000.
1.19
12.16
-18.
/ 144.
4 / 6 0.263
0.127
3500.
1.41
10.86
-21.
/ 132.
4 / 6 0.277
0.130
4000.
1.63
8.28
-24. / 103.
4 / 6 0.296
0.129
4500.
1.95
4.54
-27. / 56.
4 / 6 0.299
0.093
5000.
3.23
0.58
-39. / 9.
5 / 3 0.293
0.157
5500.
0.74
0.41
-124.
/ 0.
5 / 0 0.271
0.142
6000.
16.89
0.41
-226.
/ 0.
5 / 0 0.155
0.078
S H E A R R E I N F O R C E M E N T
SectionQswAsw, cm^2, if Sw=
Q T Load
mmkN/m10cm15cm20cm25cm30cmkN kNm N.
0.
251.3
1.44 2.15
2.87
3.59
4.31 -203.9
0.0 6
500.
251.3
1.44 2.15
2.87
3.59
4.31 -168.9
0.0 6
1000.
174.5
1.00 1.50
1.99
2.49
2.99 -133.9
0.0 6
1500.
63.9
0.36 0.55
0.73
0.91
1.09
0.0 6
-98.9
2000.
-63.9
0.0 6
2500.
-28.9
0.0 6
3000.
12.7
0.0 5
3500.
47.7
0.0 5
4000.
82.7
0.0 5
4500.
95.0
0.55 0.82
1.09
1.37
1.64
117.7
0.0 5
5000.
242.5
1.39 2.08
2.77
3.46
4.16
152.7
0.0 5
5500.
302.5
1.73 2.59
3.46
4.32
5.19
187.7
0.0 5
6000.
302.5
1.73 2.59
3.46
4.32
5.19
216.1
0.0 5
Here Minimum detailing requirements! means that reinforcement is not required according to
calculation.
15A.4 Columns
Reinforcement for columns of rectangular or circular cross-section can be calculated. Flexibility
of columns can be evaluated in two ways. In the case of usual analysis (command PERFORM
ANALYSIS) flexibility is assessed by parameters ELY and ELZ, values of which should
conform with recommendation of the Code SNiP 2.03.01-84*. If P-DELTA (analysis according
to deformed diagram) or NONLINEAR (nonlinear geometry) analysis is performed, values of
parameters ELY and ELZ should be close to zero, for example ELY = ELZ=0.01.
Longitudinal reinforcement for columns is calculated only from condition of strength.
Longitudinal forces and bending moments in relation to local axes
into account in longitudinal reinforcement calculations.
and
are taken
column number;
distance of centroid of each longitudinal bar from the nearest edge of the crosssection;
l
concrete class;
quantity of longitudinal bars at each cross-section edge, directed parallel to the local
axis
l
quantity of longitudinal bars at each cross-section edge, directed parallel to the local
axis
In nine columns of the table under the heading LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT the
following output is presented:
Table 15A.6-Column design output 1
Result
Section
Astot
Asy
719 STAAD.Pro
, sq.cm
Result
Asz
Percent
Nx, Mz,
My
Load.N.
Section
Astot
Asy
Asz
Percent
Nx
Mz
My
Load
sq.cm
sq.cm
sq.cm
kN
kNm
kNm
0.
16.42
3.01
6.20
1.34
285.5
81.9
0.0
4000.
15.35
3.01
5.67
1.25
397.3
95.3
0.0
Calculated values of reinforcement cross-sectional areas are presented in the table and they
may differ from recommended on the lower side.
When it is not possible according to detailing provisions to arrange in the column
longitudinal reinforcement determined from calculation additional message is derived.
For columns of circular section the following output is generated:
l
column number;
In seven columns of the table under the heading LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT the
following results are presented:
Sec-
tion
Astot total cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement, sq.cm
Per
cent
721 STAAD.Pro
Nx,
Mz,
local axis
and
reinforcement
My
reinforcement
An example of output of calculation results for a column of circular section is presented below.
COLUMN NO. 80 DESIGN RESULTS
(circular section)
Length - 4000 mm.
Diameter: D= 350 mm.
Distance from edge of column cross section to center of each longitudinal
reinforcement bar - 50 mm.
Concrete class - 20.0 (Rb=10.35 Pa; Gb2=0.9).
Class of longitudinal reinforcement - -III (Rs=365.0 Pa; Rsc=365.0 Pa).
Diameter range of longitudinal reinforcement bars:
Dmin=16 mm . . . Dmax=32 mm
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars from calculation D=20 mm.
Total number of reinforcement bars Ntot =7.
L O N G I T U D I N A L R E I N F O R C E M E N T
Section
Astot
Percent
Nx
Mz
My
Load
sq.cm
kN
kNm
kNm
0.
17.96
1.87
195.1
59.8
0.0
4000.
21.86
2.27
195.1
80.2
0.0
Calculated cross-sectional areas of reinforcement presented in the table may differ from
recommended on the lower side.
Asx
Mx
Nx
sq.cm/m
kNm/m
kN/m
Load.N.
(X)
Asy
My
Ny
sq.cm/m
kNm/m
kN/m
Load
N.
(Y)
60
TOP
0.00
- 4.9
0.00
0.00
- 4.5
0.00
BOT
3.53
- 9.9
0.00
3.46
- 8.9
0.00
61 TOP
0.00
- 5.3
0.00
0.00
- 4.7
0.00
BOT
3.87
- 10.7
0.00
3.65
- 9.4
0.00
62 TOP
0.00
- 5.6
0.00
0.00
- 4.8
0.00
BOT
4.10
- 11.2
0.00
3.77
- 9.6
0.00
Here:
723 STAAD.Pro
Asx
Description
number of finite element, TOP - top zone of member, BOT
- bottom zone of member (top zone of member is
determined by positive direction of local axis
-see Fig.2)
intensity of reinforcing in the first direction (parallel to the
local axis
Mx
Nx
), sq.cm/m
, kNm/m
Load N.(X) number of loading version, determining intensity of
reinforcing in the first direction
Asy
My
), sq.cm/m
Ny
Load N.(Y)
axis
kN/m
number of loading version, determining intensity of
reinforcing in the second direction
725 STAAD.Pro
15B.1 General
Design Code SNiP Steel Structures as majority of modern codes is based on the method of
limit states. The following groups of limit states are defined in the Code.
The first group is concerned with losses of general shape and stability, failure,
qualitative changes in configuration of structure. Appearance of non-allowable residual
deformations, displacements, yielding of materials or opening of cracks.
l
The second group is concerned with states of structures making worse normal their
service or reducing durability due to not allowable deflections, deviations, settlements,
vibrations, etc.
l
Analysis of structures for the first limit state is performed using the maximum (design) loads
and actions, which can cause failure of structures.
Analysis of structures for the second limit state is performed using service (normative) loads
and actions. Relation between design and normative loads is referred to as coefficient of load
reliability, which is defined in SNiP 2.01.07.- 85 Loads and Actions.
Coefficient of reliability for destination GAMA n according to SNiP 2.01.07.- 85 shall be taken
in to account determining loads or their combinations.
In this version of the program only members from rolled, tube and roll-formed assortment
sections and also from compound such as double angles of T-type sections, double channels
are presented. Design of other members of compound section will be presented in other
versions of the program.
Economy of selected section is indicated by ratio (RATIO) /Ry yc presented in calculation
results. A section is economical when said ratio equals to 0,9 0,95.
15B. Russian Codes - Steel Design Per SNiP 2.23-81* (Edition 1999)
Section Type
Designation form
ST I12
ST B1-10
ST SH1-23
ST K1-20
ST C14
ST L100x100x7
ST L125x80x10
ST PIP102x5.5
RA L100x100x7
RA L125x80x10
or
ST PIPE OD 0.102 ID
0.055
ST TUB160x120x3
or
ST TUBE TH 0.003 WT
0.12 DT 0.16
727 STAAD.Pro
Double channels
Section Type
Designation
form
D C14 SP
0.01
(SP clear
distance
between
channel
walls)
LD
L100x100x7
SP 0.01
(SP clear
distance
between
angle walls)
LD
L125x80x10
SP 0.01
(SP clear
distance
between
angle walls)
SD
L125x80x10
SP 0.01
(SP clear
distance
between
angle walls)
T I12
T B1-10
T SH1-23
T K1-20
15B. Russian Codes - Steel Design Per SNiP 2.23-81* (Edition 1999)
15B.2.1 Example
UNITS METER
MEMBER PROPERTY RUSSIAN
* I-BEAM
1 TO 6 TABLE ST B1-10
* CHANNEL
7 TO 11 TABLE ST C14
* UNEQUAL LEGS ANGLE
12 TO 30 TABLE RA L125X80X10
* ROUND ASSORTMENT PIPE
31 TO 46 TABLE ST PIP102X5.5
* ROUND PIPE OF CROSS-SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS DEFINED BY CLIENT
47 TO 60 TABLE ST PIPE OD 0.102 ID 0.055
* SQUARE TUBE FROM ASSORTMENT
61 TO 68 TABLE ST TUB120X120X3
* RECTANGULAR TUBE OF CROSS-SECTIONAL DIMENSION DEFINED BY CLIENT
69 TO 95 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0.003 WT 0.12 DT 0.16
* DOUBLE CHANNEL (DISTANCE BETWEEN WALLS 10 )
96 TO 103 TABLE D C14 SP 0.01
* DOUBLE UNEQUAL LEGS ANGLES WITH SHORT LEGS BACK-TO-BACK
(DISTANCE BETWEEN WALLS 10 )
104 TO 105 TABLE SD L125X80X10 SP 0.01
* MEMBER OF TEE SECTION
106 TO 126 TABLE T SH1-23
* FLANGE OF T-BEAMS AT THE BOTTOM OF CROSS-SECTION
BETA 180. MEMB 116 TO 126
* ORIENTATION OF THE LOCAL ANGLE AXES IN RELATION TO THE GLOBAL
AXES OF THE STRUCTURE
BETA RANGLE MEMB 12 TO 30
COMMANDS OF OUTPUT DATA FOR CHECK AND SELECTION OF SECTIONS ARE
LOCATED AFTER COMMANDS OF ANALYSIS AND, AS A RULE, AFTER OUTPUT
COMMAND TO PRINT RESULTS OF CALCULATION.
729 STAAD.Pro
15B.3.1 Example
* COMMAND OF ANALYSIS
PERFORM ANALYSIS
* COMMAND OF LOADINGS AND THEIR COMBINATIONS CONSIDERED IN DESIGN
LOAD LIST 1 5 TO 9
* COMMAND TO START DESIGN ACCORDING TO RUSSIAN CODE
PARAMETER
CODE RUSSIAN
* LIST OF PARAMETERS USED IN CHECKING AND SELECTING
BEAM 1. ALL
Obligatory parameter
LY 4. MEMB 1 TO 4
LZ 4. MEM 1 TO 4
MAIN 1. ALL
SGR 3. ALL
SBLT 0 ALL
* PARAMETER OF OUTPUT AMOUNT OF INFORMATION ON CALCULATION RESULTS
TRACK 2. ALL
.
* COMMAND TO START SECTION CHECK PROCEDURE
CHECK CODE ALL
* COMMAND TO START SECTION SELECTION PROCEDURE
SELECT ALL
.
* COMMAND OF OUTPUT TO PRINT CONTENT OF ASSORTMENT TABLES
PRINT ENTIRE TABLE
* COMMAND OF OUTPUT TO PRINT SUMMARY OF STEEL ACCORDING TO
SECTIONS
STEEL TAKE OFF
* COMMAND OF OUTPUT TO PRINT SUMMARY OF STEEL ACCORDING TO MEMBERS
AND SECTIONS
STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF
15B. Russian Codes - Steel Design Per SNiP 2.23-81* (Edition 1999)
factor (ratio Anet/Agross (NSF)) is used for tension member to allow for reduction of design
cross-section area.
731 STAAD.Pro
15B. Russian Codes - Steel Design Per SNiP 2.23-81* (Edition 1999)
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 15B.3-Parameters for Steel design according to Russian Code (SNiP II
23 81*, edition 1990)
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
Member design parameter:
BEAM
733 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
Slenderness limit value for tension members:
MM
MM = 0, if slenderness is suppressed;
15B. Russian Codes - Steel Design Per SNiP 2.23-81* (Edition 1999)
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
Slenderness limit value for compression
members:
CMN
MN = 0, if slenderness is suppressed;
0.
DMAX
1.
0.
[m]
DMIN
[m]
735 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
GAMC1
1.0
GAMC2
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
Description
LEG
LY
[m]
LZ
[m]
15B. Russian Codes - Steel Design Per SNiP 2.23-81* (Edition 1999)
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
Standard of steel grade (GOST):
MAIN
NSF
1.0
PY
0
[MPa]
RATIO
1.0
SBLT
737 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
SGR
Description
TB
TRACK
15B. Russian Codes - Steel Design Per SNiP 2.23-81* (Edition 1999)
Parameter
MAIN
Steel
C235
C245
GT, F
C255
GT, F
C275
GT, F
C285
GT, F
C345
GT, F
C345K
GT, F
C375
GT, F
C390
10
C390K
11
C440
12
C590
13
C590
14
BSt3kp
GOST 1070580*
Tube
2
15
Tube
2
16
GOST 1070580*
BSt3ps
3
GOST 1070676*
GOST 1070580*
BSt3sp
Tube
3
GOST 1070676*
17
20
GOST 8731-87
Tube
18
16G2F 5
TY 14-3-567-76
Tube
739 STAAD.Pro
For
members*
GOST
15B. Russian Codes - Steel Design Per SNiP 2.23-81* (Edition 1999)
========================================================================
1
I60
PASS
SNiP- 5.18
0.68
1
0.000E+00
-4.650E+02
0.000E+00
3.000E+00
Material characteristics:
Steel;
Design resistance;
Elasticity modulus;
Section characteristics:
Length of member;
Section area;
Net area;
Radius of gyration;
Effective length;
Slenderness;
Design forces:
Longitudinal force;
Moments;
Shear force.
741 STAAD.Pro
Signs + and -indicate direction of acting longitudinal force, bending moments and shear
forces in accordance with sign rules assumed in program STAAD.
Check results in advanced form are presented with values of intermediate parameters by
formulas in analytical and numerical expression with indication of SNiP clause.
========================================================================
MEMBER
CROSS
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
SECTION NO.
FX
MZ
MY
LOCATION
========================================================================
1
I60
PASS
SNiP- 5.18
0.68
1
0.000E+00
-4.650E+02
0.000E+00
3.000E+00
1
I60
PASS
SNiP- DISPL
0.36
1
0.000E+00
-4.650E+02
0.000E+00
3.000E+00
MATERIAL DATA
Steel
=C245
Modulus of elasticity
= 206.E+06 KPA
Design Strength (Ry)
= 240.E+03 KPA
SECTION PROPERTIES (units - m)
Member Length
= 6.00E+00
Gross Area
= 1.38E-02
Net Area
= 1.38E-02
z-axis
y-axis
Moment of inertia (I)
:
768.E-06
173.E-07
Section modulus (W)
:
256.E-05
182.E-06
First moment of area (S)
:
149.E-05
156.E-06
Radius of gyration (i)
:
236.E-03
354.E-04
Effective Length
:
600.E-02
600.E-02
Slenderness
:
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
DESIGN DATA (units -kN,m)SNiP II-23-81*/1998
Axial force
:
0.00E+00
z-axis
y-axis
Moments
: -465.E+00
0.00E+00
Shear force
:
0.00E+00
500.E-02
CRITICAL CONDITIONS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK
F.(39) M/(C1*Wmin)=-465.0E+00/ 1.12E+00* 2.56E-03= 162.1E+03
F.(41) Q/(H*T)= 500.0E-02/ 6.00E-01* 1.20E-02= 694.E+00
RY*GAMAC= 240.0E+03
ACTUAL SECTION DISPLACEMENT = 1.094E-02 M
MAXIMUM MEMBER DEFLECTION = 1.094E-02 M Loading No.
1
ULTIMATE ALLOWABLE DEFLECTION VALUE = 3.000E-02 M
743 STAAD.Pro
Section 16
Singaporian Codes
745 STAAD.Pro
747 STAAD.Pro
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 16A.1-Singaporean Concrete Design CP65 Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default
Value
-
Description
BRACE
0.0
CLEAR
20 mm
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
ELZ
1.0
FC
4.0 ksi
FYMAIN
60 ksi
FYSEC
60 ksi
MAX
MAIN
50 mm
MINMAIN
8 mm
MINSEC
8 mm
MMAG
1.0
NSE
CTION
12
SERV
0.0
Serviceability checks:
0. No serviceability check performed.
1. Perform serviceability check for beams
as if they were continuous.
2. Perform serviceability check for beams
as if they were simply supported.
3. Perform serviceability check for beams
as if they were cantilever beams.
SFACE
749 STAAD.Pro
0.0
Parameter
Name
SRA
Default
Value
0.0
Description
TRACK
0.0
WIDTH
ZD
751 STAAD.Pro
Section 17
753 STAAD.Pro
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 17A.1-South African Concrete Design SABS 0100-1 Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default Value
Description
BRACE
0.0
Column bracing:
0. Column braced in both
directions.
1. Column braced about local Y
direction only
2. Column unbraced about local Z
direction only
3. Column unbraced in both Y
and Z directions
CLB
20mm
Parameter
Name
755 STAAD.Pro
Default Value
Description
CLS
20mm
CLT
20mm
DEPTH
YD
ELY
1.0
ELZ
1.0
FC
30N/mm 2
FYMAIN
450 N/mm 2
FYSEC
450N/mm 2
MAXMAIN
50mm
MINMAIN
8mm
MINSEC
8mm
Parameter
Name
TRACK
Default Value
0.0
Description
Output detail
0. Critical Moment will not be
printed with beam design
report. Column design gives no
detailed results.
1. For beam gives min/max steel %
and spacing. For columns gives
a detailed table of output with
additional moments calculated.
2. Output of TRACK 1.0 List of
design sag/hog moments and
corresponding required steel
area at each section of member
WIDTH
ZD
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth x 300mm width)
and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be
circular with 300mm diameter. Note that area (AX) is not provided for these members. If shear
area areas (AY & AZ ) are to be considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with
YD and ZD. Also note that if moments of inertias are not provided, the program will calculate
them from YD and ZD. Finally a T section can be considered by using the third definition
above.
757 STAAD.Pro
|
-84.04
1
|
---------------------------------------------------------------------------SUMMARY OF REINF. AREA FOR FLEXURE DESIGN (Sq.mm)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------SECTION |
TOP
|
BOTTOM
|
STIRRUPS
(in mm) | Reqd./Provided reinf.
| Reqd./Provided reinf.
|
(2 legged)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------0.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 680.71/ 706.86( 9-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm
500.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 567.75/ 603.18( 3-16 )| 8 @ 115 mm
1000.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 454.79/ 471.24( 6-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm
1500.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm
2000.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm
2500.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm
3000.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm
3500.0 | 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10 )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm
4000.0 | 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10 )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm
4500.0 | 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10 )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm
5000.0 | 448.91/ 452.40( 4-12 )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm
5500.0 | 561.87/ 565.50( 5-12 )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm
6000.0 | 674.83/ 678.60( 6-12 )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm
---------------------------------------------------------------------------TORSION REINFORCEMENT : Not required
INITIAL MOMENTS
-14.6
About Z
0.00
About Y
0.00
759 STAAD.Pro
17B. South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard SAB0162-1:1993
called for, the properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built into
these tables, shear deformation is always considered during the analysis of these members.
Refer to Section 1.7.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.
17B.4.1 I Shapes
The following example illustrates the specification of I- shapes.
1 TO 15 TABLE ST IPE-AA100
17B.4.2 H shapes
Designation of H shapes in STAAD is as follows.
For example,
18 TO 20 TABLE ST 152X37UC
17B.4.3 PG shapes
Designation of PG shapes in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST 720X200PG
A back-to-back double channel section 140X60X16C with spacing 0.01 unit length in between
should be specified as:
100 TO 150 TABLE D 140X60X16C SP 0.01
Note: The specification SP after the section designation is used for providing the spacing.
The spacing should always be provided in the current length unit.
761 STAAD.Pro
17B.4.6 Angles
To specify angles, the letter L succeeds the angle name. Thus, a 70X70 angle with a 25mm
thickness is designated as 70X70X8L. The following examples illustrate angle specifications.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST 70X70X8L
Note that the above specification is for standard angles. In this specification, the local z-axis
(see Fig. 2.6 in the Technical Reference Manual) corresponds to the Y-Y axis shown in the
CSA table. Another common practice of specifying angles assumes the local y-axis to
correspond to the Y-Y axis. To specify angles in accordance with this convention, the reverse
angle designation facility has been provided. A reverse angle may be specified by substituting
the word ST with the word RA. Refer to the following example for details.
100 TO 150 TABLE RA 45X45X3L
The local axis systems for STANDARD and REVERSE angles are shown in Fig. 2.6 of the
STAAD Technical Reference manual.
The second example above describes a double angle section consisting of 40X40X5 angles with
a spacing of 0.01 length units.
17B.4.8 Tees
Tee sections obtained by cutting W sections may be specified by using the T specification
instead of ST before the name of the W shape. For example:
100 TO 150 TABLE T IPE-AA180
17B. South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard SAB0162-1:1993
In addition, any tube section may be specified by using the DT(for depth), WT(for width),
and TH(for thickness) specifications. For example:
100 TO 150 TABLE ST TUBE TH 3 WT 100 DT 50
will describe a tube with a depth of 50mm, width of 100mm. and a wall thickness of 3mm.
Note that the values of depth, width and thickness must be provided in current length unit.
In addition to sections listed in the SAB tables, circular hollow sections may be specified by
using the OD (outside diameter) and ID (inside diameter) specifications.
For example:
100 TO 150 TABLE ST PIPE OD 50 ID 48
will describe a pipe with an outside diameter of 50 length units and inside diameter of 48
length units. Note that the values of outside and inside diameters must be provided in terms
of current length unit.
A sample input file to demonstrate usage of South African shapes:
STAAD PLANE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 30-MAR-05
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 9 0 0; 3 0 6 0; 4 3 6 0; 5 6 6 0; 6 9 6 0; 7 0 10.5 0;
8 9 10.5 0; 9 2.25 10.5 0; 10 6.75 10.5 0; 11 4.5 10.5 0; 12 1.5
11.4 0;
13 7.5 11.4 0; 14 3 12.3 0; 15 6 12.3 0; 16 4.5 13.2 0;
763 STAAD.Pro
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 3; 2 3 7; 3 2 6; 4 6 8; 5 3 4; 6 4 5; 7 5 6; 8 7 12; 9 12 14;
10 14 16; 11 15 16; 12 13 15; 13 8 13; 14 9 12; 15 9 14; 16 11 14;
17 11 15; 18 10 15; 19 10 13; 20 7 9; 21 9 11; 22 10 11; 23 8 10;
MEMBER PROPERTY SAFRICAN
1 TABLE ST IPE-AA100
2 TABLE T IPE120
3 TABLE ST 152X23UC
4 TABLE T 152X23UC
5 TABLE ST 812X200PG
6 TABLE T 812X200PG
7 TABLE ST 178X54X15C
8 TABLE D 178X54X15C
9 TABLE D 178X54X15C SP 0.1
10 TABLE ST 25X25X5L
11 TABLE RA 25X25X5L
12 TABLE LD 25X25X5L
13 TABLE SD 25X25X5L
14 TABLE LD 25X25X5L SP 0.1
15 TABLE SD 25X25X5L SP 0.1
16 TABLE ST TUB40X2.5SHS
17 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0 WT 0 DT 50
18 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0.02 WT 100 DT 50
20 TABLE ST PIP48X2.0CHS
21 TABLE ST PIPE OD 0.5 ID 0.48
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES
FINISH
17B. South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard SAB0162-1:1993
17B.6.1 Axial
Parameters FYLD, FU, and NSF are applicable for these calculations.
17B.6.3 Bending
The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange for the purpose of computing the
factored moment resistance is specified in STAAD with the help of the parameter UNL. If
UNL is less than one tenth the member length (member length is the distance between the
joints of the member), the member is treated as being continuously laterally supported. In
this case, the moment resistance is computed from Clause 13.5 of the code. If UNL is greater
765 STAAD.Pro
than or equal to one-tenth the member length, its value is used as the laterally unsupported
length. The equations of Clause 13.6 of the code are used to arrive at the moment of resistance
of laterally unsupported members. Some of the aspects of the bending capacity calculations are:
1. The weak axis bending capacity of all sections except single angles is calculated as:
For Class 1 & 2 sections
Phi*Py*Fy
For Class 3 sections
Phi*Sy*Fy
Where:
Phi = Resistance factor = 0.9
Py = Plastic section modulus about the local Y axis
Sy = Elastic section modulus about the local Y axis
Fy = Yield stress of steel
2. Single angles sections are not designed by STAAD, as the South African code doesnt
provide any clear guidelines for calculating this value.
3. For calculating the bending capacity about the Z-Z axis of singly symmetric shapes such
as Tees and Double angles, SAB0162-1: 1993 stipulates in Clause 13.6(b), page 31, that a
rational method.
17B.6.6 Shear
The shear resistance of the cross section is determined using the equations of Clause 13.4 of the
code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross section to the shear
resistance of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z axes) exceed 1.0
or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 17B.1), the section is
17B. South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard SAB0162-1:1993
considered to have failed under shear. The code also requires that the slenderness ratio of the
web be within a certain limit (See Cl.13.4.1.3, page 29 of SABS 0162-1:1993). Checks for safety in
shear are performed only if this value is within the allowable limit. Users may by-pass this
limitation by specifying a value of 2.0 for the MAIN parameter.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 17B.1-South African Steel Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default
Value
Description
BEAM
CB
1.0
CMY
1.0
CMZ
1.0
DFF
767 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
DJ1
DJ2
DMAX
1000
DMIN
FYLD
300Mpa
FU
345Mpa
KT
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LT
Member
length
LY
Member
length
LZ
Member
length
MAIN
NSF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
17B. South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard SAB0162-1:1993
Parameter
Name
SSY
Default
Value
Description
Sidesway parameter
0 - Sideway about local Y-axis.
1 - No sideway about local Y-axis.
SSZ
Sidesway parameter
0 - Sideway about local Z-axis.
1 - No sideway about local Z-axis.
TRACK
Track parameter
0. Print the design output at the
minimum detail level.
1. Print the design output at the
intermediate detail level.
2. Print the design output at maximum
detail level
UNB
Member
Length
UNT
Member
Length
769 STAAD.Pro
17B.8.1 Example
Sample input data for South African Code Design
PARAMETER
CODE SAB0162
MAIN 1 ALL
LY 4 MEMB 1
LZ 4 MEMB 1
UNL 4 MEMB 1
CB 0 MEMB 1 TO 23
CMZ MEMB 2 1 TO 23
CMY MEMB 2 1 TO 23
SSY 0 MEMB 1 TO 23
SSZ 0 MEMB 1 TO 23
FU 450000 MEMB 1 TO 23
BEAM 1 ALL
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 1.0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
FYLD 300000 1 TO 23
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
17B. South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard SAB0162-1:1993
**************************************
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING
(SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SAB-0162-01(1993))
**************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS
MEMBER
TABLE
LOADING/
RATIO/
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST
406X67UB
(SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
PASS
SAB-13.8
0.543
1
0.00
0.00
-191.90
4.08
|--------------------------------------------------------------------|
| FACTORED RESISTANCES FOR MEMBER1 UNIT - KN,M
PHI =
0.90 |
|
MRZ=
353.27 MRY=
63.99
|
|
CR=
453.21 TR=
2308.50 VR=
642.00
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------|
Factored member resistances will be printed out. Following is a description of some of the
items printed out.
Output Term
Description
MRZ
MRY
CR
TR
VR
Further details can be obtained by setting TRACK to 2.0. A typical output of track 2.0
parameter is as follows.
**************************************
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING
(SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SAB-0162-01(1993))
**************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS
MEMBER
TABLE
LOADING/
LOCATION
771 STAAD.Pro
MY
RATIO/
MZ
=======================================================================
1 ST
406X67UB
(SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
PASS
SAB-13.8
0.543
1
0.00
0.00
-191.90
4.08
MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM)
----------------------------CROSS SECTION AREA = 8.55E+01
MEMBER LENGTH = 7.00E+02
IZ = 2.43E+04
SZ = 1.19E+03
PZ = 1.35E+03
IY = 1.36E+03
SY = 1.52E+02
PY = 2.37E+02
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA)
-------------------------------FYLD = 300.0
FU = 345.0
SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M)
--------------------------------CRY = 4.532E+02
CRZ = 2.016E+03
CTORFLX = 4.532E+02
TENSILE CAPACITY
= 2.308E+03
COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY =
4.532E+02
FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 6.399E+01
MRZ = 3.533E+02
FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 6.420E+02
VRZ = 6.075E+02
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
-------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 85.000
KL/RY = 175.514
KL/RZ =
41.522
ALLOWABLE KL/R = 300.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 4.000
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-2 =
1.75
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = -6.305E+01
Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 4.33E+01
Description
Factored compressive resistance for column buckling
about the local y axis
CRZ
CTORFLX
TENSILE
CAPACITY
COMPRESSIVE
CAPACITY
17B. South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard SAB0162-1:1993
Output Term
FACTORED
Description
MRY = Factored moment of resistance in y direction
MOMENT
RESISTANCE
FACTORED
SHEAR
RESISTANCE
Reference
Example 4.3.4.1, page 4.18, Structural Steel Design to SAB:0162-1(1993)(Limit state Design) by
Greg Parrott, 1st edition, Shades Technical publication
Given
FYLD = 300 Mpa
Length = 6000 mm
Comparison
Table 17B.2-SABS 0162-1:1993 Verification problem no.1 comparison
Criteria
Axial Compressive Strength (kN)
Input File
STAAD PLANE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 6 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
773 STAAD.Pro
1,516
none
1 1 2;
MEMBER PROPERTY SAFRICAN
1 TABLE ST 356X67UB
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 1.99947E+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8191
ALPHA 6E-006
DAMP 0.03
TYPE STEEL
STRENGTH FY 248210 FU 399894 RY 1.5 RT 1.2
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT MMS KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
UNIT METER KN
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FY -1500
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER 1
CODE SABS0162
LZ 6 ALL
LY 3 ALL
FU 450000 ALL
BEAM 1 ALL
NSF 0.85 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
(SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SAB-0162-01(1993))
**************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS
MEMBER
TABLE
RATIO/
LOADING/
17B. South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard SAB0162-1:1993
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST
356X67UB
(SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
PASS
COMPRESSION
0.989
1
1500.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM)
----------------------------CROSS SECTION AREA = 8.55E+01
MEMBER LENGTH = 6.00E+02
IZ = 1.95E+04
SZ = 1.07E+03
PZ = 1.21E+03
IY = 1.36E+03
SY = 1.57E+02
PY = 2.43E+02
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA)
-------------------------------FYLD = 300.0
FU = 345.0
SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M)
--------------------------------CRY = 1.516E+03
CRZ = 2.038E+03
CTORFLX = 1.516E+03
TENSILE CAPACITY
= 1.918E+03
COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 1.516E+03
FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 6.561E+01
MRZ = 1.991E+02
FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 5.903E+02
VRZ = 6.461E+02
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
-------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 0.850
KL/RY =
75.220
KL/RZ =
39.730
ALLOWABLE KL/R = 200.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 6.000
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-2 = 1.00
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 0.000E+00
Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 3.65E+01
17B.12.1 Reference
Example 4.5, page 4.37, Structural Steel Design to SAB:0162-1(1993)(Limit state Design) by
Greg Parrott, 1st edition, Shades Technical publication
17B.12.2 Given
FYLD = 300 Mpa
775 STAAD.Pro
17B.12.3 Comparison
Table 17B.3-SAB 0162 -1:1993 Verification Problem 2 comparison
Criteria
353.4
353.3
none
17B. South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard SAB0162-1:1993
1 CON GY -104 4
1 UNI GY -4
2 UNI GY -2
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE SABS0162
CB 0 ALL
UNL 4 MEMB 1
FU 450000 ALL
BEAM 1 ALL
NSF 85 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
FINISH
17B.12.5 Output
**************************************
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING
(SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SAB-0162-01(1993))
**************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS
MEMBER
TABLE
777 STAAD.Pro
17B.13.1 Reference
Example 4.6.5, page 4.54, Structural Steel Design to SAB:0162-1(1993)(Limit state Design) by
Greg Parrott, 1st edition, Shades Technical publication
17B.13.2 Given
FYLD = 300 Mpa
17B.13.3 Comparison
Table 17B.4-SAB 0162-1:1993 Verification Problem 3 comparison
Criteria
Shear Capacity (kN)
Reference
STAAD.Pro
Difference
687.1
687.1
none
17B. South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard SAB0162-1:1993
E 2E+008
POISSON 3
DENSITY 8195
ALPHA 2E-005
DAMP 03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT MMS KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1
UNIT METER KN
SUPPORTS
1 2 PINNED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -70
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE SABS0162
FU 450000 ALL
BEAM 1 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
17B.13.5 Output
**************************************
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING
(SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SAB-0162-01(1993))
**************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS
MEMBER
TABLE
1 ST
457X67UB
FAIL
0.00
MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM)
----------------------------CROSS SECTION AREA = 8.55E+01
IZ = 2.94E+04
SZ = 1.30E+03
IY = 1.45E+03
SY = 1.53E+02
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA)
779 STAAD.Pro
(SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
SAB-13.8
4.134
0.00
-560.00
MEMBER LENGTH =
PZ = 1.47E+03
PY = 2.37E+02
8.00E+02
1
4.00
-------------------------------FYLD = 300.0
FU = 345.0
SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M)
--------------------------------CRY = 3.738E+02
CRZ = 1.996E+03
CTORFLX = 3.738E+02
TENSILE CAPACITY
= 2.257E+03
COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 3.738E+02
FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 6.399E+01
MRZ = 1.355E+02
FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 6.871E+02
VRZ = 5.730E+02
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
-------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000
KL/RY = 194.263
KL/RZ =
43.142
ALLOWABLE KL/R = 300.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 8.000
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-2 = 1.00
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 0.000E+00
Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 5.04E+01
781 STAAD.Pro
Section 18
Spanish Codes
783 STAAD.Pro
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 18A.1-Spanish Steel Design per NBE-MV103-1972 Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default Value
Description
BEAM
C1
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
C2
CB
DFF
None
DJ1
Start node
of member
DJ2
DMAX
25.4 meter
DMIN
ETA
FYLD
255 MPa
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LVV
Member Length
LY
Member Length
LZ
Member Length
785 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
MAIN
Default Value
Description
NSF
1.0
RATIO
TB
TRACK
UNF
UNL
Member Length
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Default
Value
Description
CLB
1.5 in
CLS
1.5 in
CLT
1.5 in
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0 Face
of
Support
4.0 ksi
FYMAIN
60 ksi
FYSEC
60 ksi
MAX
MAIN
Number
55 bar
MINMAIN Number
10 bar
MINSEC
Number
10 bar
MMAG
1.0
NSE
CTION
12
REINF
0.0
787 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
SFACE
Default
Value
0.0
Description
0.0
WIDTH
ZD
789 STAAD.Pro
Section 19
Swedish Codes
791 STAAD.Pro
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 19A.1-Swedish Steel Design per BSK 99 Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default
Value
-
Description
BEAM
BY
BZ
CB
CMY
CMZ
Parameter
Name
Description
CY
CZ
DMAX
1 meter
DMIN
FYLD
235 MPa
MF
793 STAAD.Pro
Default
Value
1.15
RATIO
SSY
SSZ
Parameter
Name
TRACK
Default
Value
0
Description
UNL
Member
Length
795 STAAD.Pro
797 STAAD.Pro
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 19C.1-Swedish Concrete Design per BBK 94 Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default
Value
-
Description
ACTAGE
70
BRACE
0.0
CLEAR
25 mm
DRYCIR
100
EFACE
0.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
ELY
1.0
ELZ
1.0
ENVIR
Environment class
1. LA Least aggressive
2. NA Aggressive
3. MA Very aggressive
FC
FYMAIN
35 N/mm 2
LAGE
7 days
MAX
MAIN
32
MINMAIN
10
MOY
moy factor
MOZ
moz factor
NMAG
nmag factor
REIANG
RELHUM
40
RFACE
799 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
SFACE
Default
Value
0
Description
90
STIRDIA
10 mm
TORANG
45
TRACK
10
Stirrup diameter
801 STAAD.Pro
Section 20
Example
1 TO 5 TA ST CS12X11.8
9 TA ST I8.00X13.1
11 33 45 67 TA ST LS8.00X8.00X0.625
18 TA ST 1.50PIPEX160
15 TA ST T(A-N)6.00X8.00X11.2
23 25 29 TA ST 20X12RECTX.500WALL
Example
3 TA BACK C(A-N)7X3.61 SPACING 1.5
5 TA BACK C15X17.33 SP 0.75
Example
2 TA FRONT CS12X10.3 SP 1.0
4 TA FR CS10X10.1 SP 0.5
Example
14 TA LD LS4.00X3.00X0.375 SP 1.5
Example
12 TA SD L3.5X3X0.5 SP 0.25
13 TA SD L8X6X0.75 SP 1.0
803 STAAD.Pro
Note: The check for torsion per Clause 4.3 for open sections is currently not implemented
in STAAD.Pro.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 20A.1-Aluminum Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default Value
Description
ALCLAD
ALLOY
34
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
BEAM
0.0
DMAX
1000 in.
DMIN
0.0 in
KT
1.0
805 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LT
Member length
LY
Member length
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
LZ
Member length
PRODUCT
1 - All
2 - Extrusions
3 - Drawn Tube
4 - Pipe
The default value stands for All. The
PRODUCT parameter finds mention in
Table 3.3-1 in Section I-B of the
Aluminum specifications.
SSY
0.0
807 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
SSZ
Default Value
Description
0.0
STIFF
STR
UCTURE
Member length
Parameter
Name
TRACK
Default Value
Description
UNL
WELD
Member length
809 STAAD.Pro
Name
1100-H12
1100-H14
2014-T6
2014-T6510
2014-T6511
2014-T651
3003-H12
3003-H14
3003-H16
10
3003-H18
11
3004-H32
12
3004-H34
13
3004-H36
14
3004-H38
15
5005-H12
16
5005-H14
17
5005-H32
18
5005-H34
19
5050-H32
20
5050-H34
21
5052-H32
22
5052-H34
23
5083-H111
24
5086-H111
25
5086-H116
Value
Name
26
5086-H32
27
5086-H34
28
5454-H111
29
5454-H112
30
5456-H111
31
5456-H112
32
6005-T5
33
6105-T5
34
6061-T6
35
6061-T6510
36
6061-T6511
37
6061-T651
38
6063-T5
39
6063-T6
40
6351-T5
20A.5.1 Example
Sample input data for Aluminum Design
PARAMETER
CODE ALUMINUM
811 STAAD.Pro
BEAM 1 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
ALLOY 35 ALL
PRODUCT 2 ALL
TRACK 3 ALL
SELECT ALL
ALCLAD 1 ALL
STRUCT 1 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
813 STAAD.Pro
Section 21
815 STAAD.Pro
The detailing requirements, such as provisioning of stiffeners and checking the local effects
like flange buckling, web crippling, etc.must be performed manually. It is assumed that you
are familiar with the basic concepts of Steel Design facilities available in STAAD. Please refer
to Section 2 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for detailed information on this topic.
21A. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE 10-97
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
817 STAAD.Pro
Default Value
Description
BEAM
1.0
CMY
CMZ
0.85 for
sidesway and
calculated for
no sidesway
DMAX
45.0 in.
DBL
0.75 in.
DMIN
0.0 in.
ELA
21A. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE 10-97
Parameter
Name
ELB
Default Value
Description
FVB
30 KSI
FYB
36 KSI
36.0 KSI
FYLD
KT
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LEG
0.0
LT
819 STAAD.Pro
Member
Length
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
MAIN
NHL
NSF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
SSY
0.0
SSZ
0.0
TRACK
0.0
UNB
Member
Length
21A. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE 10-97
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
UNF
1.0
UNL
Member
Length
UNT
Member
Length
821 STAAD.Pro
21B. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE Manuals and Reports
Default
Value
Description
Must be specified as ASCE 52.
CODE
BEAM
DBL
823 STAAD.Pro
0.0
0.75 in.
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
DMAX
45.0 in.
DMIN
0.0 in.
ELA
ELB
FVB
30 KSI
FYB
36 KSI
36.0 KSI
FYLD
KT
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LEG
0.0
21B. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE Manuals and Reports
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
LT
Member
Length
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
Description
MAIN
NHL
NSF
1.0
1.0
RATIO
825 STAAD.Pro
TRACK
0.0
UNF
1.0
UNL
Member
Length
827 STAAD.Pro
Section 22
Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design;
Specify design parameter values, if different from the default values; and
These operations may be repeated any number of times depending upon the design
requirements.
The basic process is as follows:
1. Define the STAAD model geometry, loading, and analysis.
2. Run the analysis and API design which creates the Geometry file (file extension .PUN)
and give preliminary design results.
22A.1.1 Limitations
The parameter SELECT 1.0 should not be used while carrying out punching shear checks. It
can be used in initial runs for member selection.
No classification of the joint is performed using the loading. For the initial run of an API
code check, all joints will be assumed to be a T/Y joint. See "Joint Design" for details.
No hydrostatic checks are performed.
829 STAAD.Pro
E
Fy
xe
or F
xc
is substituted for F .
xy
Where:
F = the elastic local buckling stress calculated with C, the critical elastic
xe
buckling coefficient = 0.3 (3.2.2-3)
F
xc
Definitions
= Brace included rage
g = Gap between braces
t = Brace wall thickness at intersection
T = Chord wall thickness at intersection
d = Brace outside diameter
D = Chord outside diameter
= d/D
= D/(2T)
= t/T
Joint Validity
The validity range of the joints that are identified will be checked as per Cl. 4.3.1 of the code.
The conditions to be checked for each joint are as given below:
0.2 1.0
10 50
30 90
F = 90 ksi (500 MPa)
y
831 STAAD.Pro
If any of these conditions are not satisfied for the joint under consideration, the programissues
a warning message corresponding to the invalid parameter(s). The program will, however,
perform the joint checks as the code allows for the design of such joints with modified values
of yield strength. You can use the FYLD parameter to reset the yield strength.
Joint Capacity
The capacity of the joint, both the axial capacity and the moment capacity is
The allowable capacity for brace axial load, P , is evaluated as:
a
Pa = Q uQ f
F yc T
FSJsin
M a = Q uQ f
F yc T d
FSJsin
Where:
F = the yield stress of the chord member at the joint (or 0.8 of the tensile stress,
y
if less)
FSJ = the factor of safety parameter (1.6 by default)
Q and Q are the strength factor and the Chord factor that are to be
u
f
determined based on the joint type. The strength factor, Q , is to be determined
u
as given in Section 4.3.3 of the code (ref. Table. 4.3-1 of the APIcode).
FSJPc
FSJM c
2
Q f = 1 + C1
C 2 M y C3A
Py
FSJPc FSJM c
A=
+
Py M y
P = axial load
c
2
2
M c = M ipb
+ M opb
Joint Type
0.2
0.2 0.3
0.3
0.8
0.9
0.2
0.5
= 1.0
0.2
0.4
X joints under
brace
axial loading
Joint Type
0.2
0.4
Note: For values of between 0.9 and 1.0, coefficients are linearly interpolated between
listed values.
For joints that are a mixture of K, X, or Y joints, the capacity of the joint is evaluated as a
weighted average of the capacities of each joint.
In case the joint is subjected to combined axial load and bending moments (in-plane and/or
out-of-plane), the program performs the following interaction check as given by Cl 4.3.6 of
the code:
P
Pa
M
+ +
M
a ipb
M
Ma
1.0
opb
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 22A.1-American (API) Steel Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default Value
Description
833 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
BEAM
Default Value
1.0
Description
Beam parameter:
0.0 = design only for
end moments or
those at locations
specified by the
SECTION
command.
1.0 = calculate
moments at twelfth
points along the
beam, and use the
maximum Mz
location for design.
2.0 = Same for
BEAM 1.0, but
additional check is
made at each end.
CB
1.0
CMY
DMAX
100.0 in
DMIN
0.0
FSJ
1.6
CMZ
FYLD
36 ksi
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
LY
Member Length
LZ
Member Length
MAIN
0.0
NSF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
SSY
0.0
SSZ
0.0
TRACK
0.0
UNF
835 STAAD.Pro
1.0
Parameter
Name
UNL
Default Value
Member Length
WELD
Description
WMIN
1.16 in.
WSTR
0.4 X FLYD
Minimum thickness
Allowable welding stress
Note: The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used for member selection.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Member selection can be performed with all types of hollow steel sections.
Selection of members whose properties are originally input from a user created table
will be limited to sections in the user table.
Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section properties are input
as prismatic.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Member Selection command.
Q is a factor to account for the presence of nominal longitudinal stress in the chord. When
f
calculating Q for the joints, the moments used in the chord stress calculation will be from
f
the computer node results and not the representative moments underneath the brace. If the
moment varies significantly along the chord, it is more accurate to use the actual chord
moment in the middle of the brace foot print. The tests reported in Reference I [1] were
performed with a constant moment along the chord. Thus for a local joint check, the local
chord moment (under the brace) should be used.
STAAD calculates Q based on the moment at the chord member. The chord member can be
f
selected automatically by initial screening by the program (based on geometry and
independent of loading) or specified in the External file.
In the automatic selection of the chord two collinear members (5 degree tolerance) are used
to identify the chord. The chord is then selected from one of the two members based on the
larger diameter then thickness or then by the minimum framing angle; for T joints the first
member modeled will be selected as the chord.
You should confirm that the chord either be assigned by the program or the user is
representative of the local chord moment for the brace in question.
22A.6.1 Reference
1 Ref I: Boone, TJ. Yura, JA. and Hoadley, PW. Ultimate Strength if Tubular Joints Chord
Stress Effects, OTC 4828, 1984
837 STAAD.Pro
Note: If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block out part of the table and
will print the allowable bending stressed in compression (FCY & FCZ) and tension
(FTY & FTZ), allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and allowable shear stress
(FV).
7 ST PIP40610.0
2.76 T
0.00
(BRITISH SECTIONS)
PASS
API 3.3.1-3
98.14 C
0.00
5.12
3.00
0.078
5.12
2
0.00
(BRITISH SECTIONS)
PASS
API 3.3.1-3
0.130
2
67.16 C
0.00
0.29
4.24
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| MEMB=
14, UNIT NEW-MMS ,L= 4243. AX= 4670. SZ= 208157. SY= 208157.|
| KL/R-Y= 64.6 CB= 1.00 YLD= 248.21 ALLOWABLE STRESSES: FCZ= 186.2 |
| FTZ= 186.2 FCY= 186.2 FTY= 186.2 FA= 117.6 FT= 148.9
FV=
99.3 |
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
NODE NO:
NODE NO:
NODE NO:
0.049
0.245
0.222
PASS
PASS
PASS
839 STAAD.Pro
---------------------------------------------------------------------CRITICAL
:
2
0.245
PASS
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Material Strength
The API code states in Cl. 4.2.1 that the value of yield stress of the chord member to be used in
the calculation of the joint capacity should be limited to 0.8 times the tensile strength of the
chord for materials with a yield stress less than or equal to 500 MPa.
The yield stress to be used in the joint capacity checks value is specified in the joint data file
(filename.PUN). For every joint, the value specified in the FYLD column will be used as the
yield strength to be used for the joint capacity checks. When the file is created for the first
time by the program, a default value of 36 ksi is used for all joints. The value used for each
joint check will also be reported in the output file.
Note: All the fields in the joint data file (*.PUN file) are to be in imperial units.
Minimum Joint Capacity
Clause 4.2.3 of the code specifies a minimum capacity for any joint as follows:
The connections at the ends of a member should develop the strength required by the design
loads, but should not be less than 50% of the effective strength of the member. The effective
strength is defined as the buckling load for a compression member or the yield load for
members in tension. You, however, must ensure that this condition is satisfied even if the
joint strength indicates a PASS status.
The program checks to see if the capacity of a joint as calculated by the methods in the code
satisfies this requirement. If not the program issues a warning to that effect and marks the
joint as FAILED. The program calculates the axial and/or bending moment capacities of the
joint and reports the load/capacity ratio for each condition. The program also reports a critical
ratio along with the condition that induces this ratio. Note that the maximum among the
various individual ratios will be reported as the critical ratio. The program also reports a
PASS/FAIL status for the joint.
See "Simple Joints: Capacity Checks" for details of capacity checks performed.
Joint Classification
Clause of 4.2.4 of the API code essentially classifies a joint into one of the three basic types: K,
X, and Y. Joint classification is the process whereby the axial load in a given brace is
subdivided into its K, X, and Y components corresponding to the three joint types. A joint
as considered in the codeis the connection between a "chord" and a "brace" that are in the
same plane. The program considers any two members to be in the same plane if they lie in
planes that are within 15 degrees of each other. The classification of a joint can also be a
mixture of any of the basic types mentioned above. Once the classification of a joint has been
identified, the capacity of that joint is then evaluated per Section 4.3 of the code.
The program automatically identifies the joints in a structure and identifies the chord and
the brace members. The program applies the 15 rule to determine the members in a plane
and then determines the joint as being the intersection point of these members. Since a joint
is between a chord and a brace member, the program considers two members at a time and
then proceeds to identify the chord and the brace member at that joint. The program
assumes the member with the larger diameter among the two members as the chord member
and the other is considered as the brace. If both members have the same diameter, the chord
is assumed to be the member with the thicker wall. If both the diameter and thickness of the
members are identical, the program will assume the most horizontal member to be the
chord. To be automatically considered as a chord member, the member has to be continuous
across the joint. The user can always edit the joint data file (*.PUN) to add or delete new
BRACE-CHORD joints.
The chord and brace member numbers (from the STAAD input file) are saved under the
CHORD and BRACE columns in the filename.PUN file.
When the joint data file (.PUN)is created by the program, a default joint Class Y is assumed
for the initial joint checks. This is indicated by the K, X, and Y column values being set to 0,
0, and 1 respectively. Since the API code allows for a mixed joint classification, you must
manually vary the contribution factors for K, X, and Y joint classes for a given joint. For
example, if a joint is to be 25% K, 25% X, and 50% Y, then you must assign K column value of
0.25, X column value of 0.25, and a Y column value of 0.50 for that joint. The program will
verify that the supplied contributions sum to 1.0.
If the joint has a gap (i.e., a K-GAP joint), the gap distance (in inches) must be supplied in
the GAPcolumn. The value to be provided will be the actual gap between the brace members
at the joint. An overlap can be specified by setting the gap to a negative value. The
overlapping brace in this case can then be indicated by specifying the member number at the
OBRACE (Overlapping brace) column in the data file.
Overlapping Joints
Clause 4.4 of the API discusses overlapping joints. Checks for overlapping joints will be
performed as described Section 22A.2.6. The difference will be in that the gap value, g, will be
taken as negative in evaluating the various factors.
841 STAAD.Pro
If the axial loads in the overlapping brace and the through brace have the same sign, the axial
load in the through brace will be increased to allow for the loads in the overlapping brace.
This will be achieved by allowing a portion of the overlapping brace load equal to the
proportion of the overlapping brace area to be added to the axial load in the through brace.
Note: The program issues a warning for any joint overlap is less than 0.25D.
Example
*BRACE CHORD
T
GAP
10
7
16.000 0.394
13
7
7.626 0.315
14
11
7.626 0.315
843 STAAD.Pro
K
X
Y
D
FYLD OBRACE TW SWAP
0.000 0.000 1.000 16.000
0.00 36.0 0.0 0.00 0
0.000 0.000 1.000 16.000
0.00 36.0 0.0 0.00 0
0.000 0.000 1.000 16.000
0.00 36.0 0.0 0.00 0
T
0.394
0.394
0.394
Section 23
845 STAAD.Pro
Note: By default, N690 code uses Stainless Steel material in the design. Care should be
taken to assign the proper Stainless Steel material properties to the members for the
analysis. There is a parameter STYPE to change material type to either Stainless
Steel (STYPE=1) or Carbon Steel (STYPE=0).
SMY C my fby
f
Fby 1 a
F ey
SMZ C mzfbz
f
Fbz1 a
F ez
1.0
and Q1.6-1b:
SFC fa
0.6F y
SMY fby
Fby
SMZ fbz
Fbz
1.0
SMY fby
Fby
SMZ fbz
Fbz
1.0
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the
a a
program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would
result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for sidesway and [0.6 - 0.4(M1/M2)], but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy
equation Q1.6-3:
SFT fa
0.6F y
SMY fby
Fby
SMZ fbz
Fbz
1.0
Where:
SFC, SFT, SMZ, and SMY are stress limit coefficient parameters used to control the
components of the interaction equations. Refer to Table 23A.1 for details.
Default
Value
-
Description
BEAM
Beam parameter
0. Perform design at ends and those
locations in the
SECTIONcommand.
1. Perform design at ends and at
1/12th section locations along the
member length.
847 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
CAN
Default
Value
Description
CB
1.0
CMY
CMZ
COMPOSITE
0.85 for
sidesway
and
calculated
for no
sidesway
0
CONDIA
CONHEIGHT
CYCLES
0.625 in
2.5 in
500,000
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
DFF
None
(Mandatory
for
deflection
check)
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint
of member
DLR2
0.4
DLRATIO
0.4
DMAX
45 inch
DMIN
0.0 inch
EFFWIDTH
FYLD
36 KSI
FPC
3 KSI
FSS
849 STAAD.Pro
FU
60 KSI
FYLD
46 KSI
KX
1.0
KY
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
KZ
1.0
LX
Member
Length
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
MAIN
0.0
NSF
1.0
OVR
1.0
PLTHICK
PLTWIDTH
PROFILE
None
RATIO
1.0
RIBHEIGHT
RIBWIDTH
SFC
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
SFT
1.0
SHE
SHORING
SLABTHICK
4 in
SMY
1.0
SMZ
1.0
SSY
SSZ
STIFF
Member
length or
depth
whichever
is greater
STYPE
0.0
851 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
TAPER
Default
Value
1
Description
TMAIN
240 for
main
member
300 for
Truss
member
TORSION
TRACK
0.0
UNB
Member
Length
UNT
Member
Length
WELD
WMAX
1 in
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
WMIN
0.625 in
WSTR
0.4Fyld
23A.2.1 Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units
2. parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command
23A.3 Examples
These example problems are included for the verification of design results.
23A.3.1 Example 1
This example is included as C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\N690\N690_case1.std
Solution
Allowable Compressive Stress:
Maximum Slenderness Ratio, (Kl/r)max = 171.31
Yield Stress of Steel, F = 36 ksi
y
Comparison
Table 23A.2-ANSI-AISC N690-1994 Code Verification
Problem 1
Value of
Reference
STAAD.Pro
Difference
5.21
5.22
Negligible
F (ks)
a
Input File
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 30-NOV-07
853 STAAD.Pro
Output
The corresponding TRACK 2 output is shown below:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( ANSI N690-1994)
v1.0
********************************************
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|
Y
PROPERTIES
|
|*************
|
IN INCH UNIT |
|
* |=============================|
===|===
------------ |
|MEMBER
1 * | AISC SECTIONS
|
|
AX =
3.55 |
|
* | ST W6X12
|
|
--Z AY =
1.25 |
|DESIGN CODE * |
|
|
AZ =
1.50 |
|ANSI N690-94* ===============================
===|===
SY =
1.50 |
|
*
SZ =
7.33 |
|
* |<---LENGTH (FT)=
13.12 --->|
RY =
0.92 |
|*************
RZ =
2.50 |
|
|
|
7.4 (KIP-FEET)
|
|PARAMETER
|
L1
STRESSES
|
|IN KIP INCH
|
IN KIP INCH |
|--------------- +
L1
L1
-------------|
| KL/R-Y= 171.31 |
FA =
5.22 |
| KL/R-Z= 63.12 +
L1
L1
fa =
0.60 |
| UNL
= 157.48 |
FCZ = 14.15 |
| CB
=
1.00 +
L1
L1
FTZ = 21.60 |
| CMY
=
0.85 |
L1
L1
FCY = 27.00 |
| CMZ
=
0.85 +
FTY = 27.00 |
| FYLD = 36.00 |L0
L0 fbz = 12.07 |
| NSF
=
1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---|
fby =
0.00 |
| DFF
=
0.00 -0.4
Fey =
4.65 |
| dff=
0.00
ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE
Fez = 34.26 |
| (KL/R)max = 171.31
(WITH LOAD NO.)
FV = 14.40 |
|
fv =
0.90 |
|
|
|
MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KIP-FEET)
|
|
------------------------|
|
|
|
AXIAL
SHEAR-Y
SHEAR-Z
MOMENT-Y
MOMENT-Z
|
|
|
|
VALUE
2.1
1.1
0.0
0.0
7.4
|
|
LOCATION
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
6.6
|
|
LOADING
3
1
0
0
1
|
|
|
|**************************************************************************|
|*
*|
|*
DESIGN SUMMARY (KIP-FEET)
*|
|*
-------------*|
|*
*|
|*
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
*|
|
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
|
|
======================================================
|
|
PASS
ANSI Q1.6-2
0.968
3
|
855 STAAD.Pro
|
2.14 C
0.00
-7.38
6.56
|
|*
*|
|**************************************************************************|
|
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
23A.3.2 Example 2
This example is included as C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\N690\N690_case2.std
Solution
Allowable Compressive Stress:
Maximum Slenderness Ratio, (Kl/r)max = 85.65
Yield Stress of Steel, F = 36 ksi
y
Comparison
Table 23A.3-ANSI-AISC N690-1994 Code Verification
Problem 2
Value of
F (ks)
a
Reference
9.07
STAAD.Pro
9.08
Difference
Negligible
Input File
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 30-NOV-07
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
3 0 0 1; 4 2 0 1;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
2 3 4;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05E+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
2 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
3 PINNED
4 FIXED BUT FX MY MZ
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
MEMBER LOAD
UNIT METER KIP
2 CON GY -2.24809 1
UNIT METER KN
LOAD 2 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 2
JOINT LOAD
4 FX -1
LOAD COMB 3 COMBINATION LOAD CASE 3
1 1.0 2 9.5
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK
PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS
UNIT METER KIP
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The corresponding TRACK 2 output is shown below:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( ANSI N690-1994)
v1.0
********************************************
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|
Y
PROPERTIES
|
|*************
|
IN INCH UNIT |
|
* |=============================|
===|===
------------ |
|MEMBER
2 * | AISC SECTIONS
|
|
AX =
3.55 |
|
* | ST W6X12
|
|
--Z AY =
1.25 |
857 STAAD.Pro
|DESIGN CODE * |
|
|
AZ =
1.50 |
|ANSI N690-94* ===============================
===|===
SY =
1.50 |
|
*
SZ =
7.33 |
|
* |<---LENGTH (FT)=
6.56 --->|
RY =
0.92 |
|*************
RZ =
2.50 |
|
|
|
3.7 (KIP-FEET)
|
|PARAMETER
|
L1
STRESSES
|
|IN KIP INCH
|
IN KIP INCH |
|--------------- +
L1
L1
-------------|
| KL/R-Y= 85.65 |
FA =
9.08 |
| KL/R-Z= 31.56 +
L1
fa =
0.60 |
| UNL
= 78.74 |
L1
FCZ = 21.60 |
| CB
=
1.00 +
L1
L1
FTZ = 21.60 |
| CMY
=
0.85 |
L1
FCY = 27.00 |
| CMZ
=
0.85 +
L1
FTY = 27.00 |
| FYLD = 36.00 |L0
L0 fbz =
6.04 |
| NSF
=
1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---|
fby =
0.00 |
| DFF
=
0.00 -0.2
Fey = 18.60 |
| dff=
0.00
ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE
Fez = 137.05 |
| (KL/R)max = 85.65
(WITH LOAD NO.)
FV = 14.40 |
|
fv =
0.90 |
|
|
|
MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KIP-FEET)
|
|
------------------------|
|
|
|
AXIAL
SHEAR-Y
SHEAR-Z
MOMENT-Y
MOMENT-Z
|
|
|
|
VALUE
2.1
1.1
0.0
0.0
3.7
|
|
LOCATION
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
3.3
|
|
LOADING
3
1
0
0
1
|
|
|
|**************************************************************************|
|*
*|
|*
DESIGN SUMMARY (KIP-FEET)
*|
|*
-------------*|
|*
*|
|*
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
*|
|
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
|
|
======================================================
|
|
PASS
ANSI Q1.6-2
0.346
3
|
|
2.14 C
0.00
-3.69
3.28
|
|*
*|
|**************************************************************************|
|
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
23A.3.3 Example 3
This example is included as C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\N690\N690_case3.std
Solution
Allowable Compressive Stress:
Comparison
Table 23A.4-ANSI-AISC N690-1994 Code Verification
Problem 3
Value of
F (ks)
a
Reference
7.08
Input File
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 30-NOV-07
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 2.85 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05E+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
1 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
859 STAAD.Pro
STAAD.Pro
7.08
Difference
None
1 PINNED
2 FIXED BUT FX MY MZ
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
MEMBER LOAD
1 CON GY -10 2
UNIT METER KIP
UNIT METER KN
LOAD 2 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 2
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -1
LOAD COMB 3 COMBINATION LOAD CASE 3
1 1.0 2 9.5
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK
PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS
UNIT METER KIP
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The corresponding TRACK 2 output is shown below:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( ANSI N690-1994)
v1.0
********************************************
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|
Y
PROPERTIES
|
|*************
|
IN INCH UNIT |
|
* |=============================|
===|===
------------ |
|MEMBER
1 * | AISC SECTIONS
|
|
AX =
3.55 |
|
* | ST W6X12
|
|
--Z AY =
1.25 |
|DESIGN CODE * |
|
|
AZ =
1.50 |
|ANSI N690-94* ===============================
===|===
SY =
1.50 |
|
*
SZ =
7.33 |
|
* |<---LENGTH (FT)=
9.35 --->|
RY =
0.92 |
|*************
RZ =
2.50 |
|
|
|
4.2 (KIP-FEET)
|
|PARAMETER
|
L1
STRESSES
|
|IN KIP INCH
|
L1
IN KIP INCH |
|--------------- +
L1
-------------|
| KL/R-Y= 122.06 |
L1
FA =
7.08 |
| KL/R-Z= 44.97 +
L1
fa =
0.60 |
| UNL
= 112.20 |
FCZ = 19.86 |
| CB
=
1.00 +
L1
L1
FTZ = 21.60 |
| CMY
=
0.85 |
L1
FCY = 27.00 |
| CMZ
=
0.85 +
L1
FTY = 27.00 |
| FYLD = 36.00 |L0
L0 fbz =
6.84 |
| NSF
=
1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---|
fby =
0.00 |
| DFF
=
0.00 -0.2
Fey =
9.16 |
| dff=
0.00
ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE
Fez = 67.49 |
| (KL/R)max = 122.06
(WITH LOAD NO.)
FV = 14.40 |
|
fv =
0.54 |
|
|
|
MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KIP-FEET)
|
|
------------------------|
|
|
|
AXIAL
SHEAR-Y
SHEAR-Z
MOMENT-Y
MOMENT-Z
|
|
|
|
VALUE
2.1
1.6
0.0
0.0
4.2
|
|
LOCATION
0.0
7.0
0.0
0.0
6.2
|
|
LOADING
3
1
0
0
1
|
|
|
|**************************************************************************|
|*
*|
|*
DESIGN SUMMARY (KIP-FEET)
*|
|*
-------------*|
|*
*|
|*
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
*|
|
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
|
|
======================================================
|
|
PASS
ANSI Q1.6-2
0.429
3
|
|
2.14 C
0.00
-4.18
6.23
|
|*
*|
|**************************************************************************|
|
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
861 STAAD.Pro
23B.2.1 Slenderness
The maximum allowable slenderness ratio in Compression (KL/r_min), as per clause Q1.8.4 of
the code shall not exceed 200. And the maximum allowable slenderness ratio in Tension (L/r_
min) shall not exceed 240 for main members and 300 for bracing members and other
secondary members.
This can be controlled by using the existing MAIN and TMAIN parameters respectively.
The default value of MAIN is 200 and for TMAIN is 240.
23B.2.3 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as 0.60Fy , but not more than 0.5Fu
on the Effective Net area, as per section Q1.5.1.1.
The Net Area (An) shall be determined in accordance with Q1.14, and the NSF parameter can
be utilized for that.
The Effective Net Area (Ae) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is transmitted
by bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member, shall be
computed from the formula (ref. Q1.14),
Ae = CtAn
Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75.
The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section Q1.14.
The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in
STAAD.
23B.2.4 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns which meet the provisions of section Q1.9,
except those fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by Q1.5.1.3. The
allowable compressive stress for columns fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be in
accordance to section Q1.5.9.
A. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless steel:
1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) Cc,
Fa = [1 - (Kl/r)2 /(2Cc2 )]Fy / {5/3 + [3(Kl/r)/(8Cc)] - [(Kl/r)3 /(8Cc3 )]}
Where:
Cc = [(22 E)/Fy ]1/2
2. When (Kl/r) > Cc,
Fa = 122 E/[23(kL/r)2 ]
B. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel:
1. When (Kl/r) 120,
Fa = Fy /2.15 - [(Fy /2.16 - 6)/120](kL/r)
2. When (Kl/r) > 120,
Fa = 12 - (KL/r)/20
If the provisions of the section Q1.9 are not satisfied,
A. For un-stiffened compression element, a reduction factor Q is introduced. Detailed
s
values of Qs for different shapes are given in Section QC2.
B. For stiffened compression element, a reduced effective width b is introduced.
e
863 STAAD.Pro
Where:
C'c = [(22 E)/(QsQaFy )]1/2
865 STAAD.Pro
Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility except for the General
and Prismatic member.
For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference
Manual.
Default
Value
Description
CAN
CB
1.0
Parameter
Name
CMY
CMZ
Default
Value
0.85 for
sidesway
and
calculated
for no
sidesway
CT
0.75
DFF
None
(Mandatory
for
deflection
check)
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
Description
DMAX
45 inch
DMIN
0.0 inch
FU
60 KSI
FYLD
36 KSI
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
MAIN
0.0
867 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
NSF
PROFILE
Default
Value
1.0
None
Description
RATIO
1.0
SFC
1.0
SFT
1.0
SMY
1.0
SMZ
1.0
STIFF
STYPE
Member
Spacing of stiffeners for plate girder design
length or
depth
whichever is
greater
0.0
TMAIN
240 for
main
member
300 for
Truss
member
TRACK
0.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
UNB
Member
Length
UNT
Member
Length
23B.4.1 Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units
2. parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command
23B.6 Examples
These example problems are included for the verification of design results.
Problem
A 10 ft long simply supported beam subject to axial (+/- 10 kip) and bending loads (3 kip/ft)
in both the local y and z axis. The beam is a 5" diameter, Schedule 40 Pipe section made from
Grade 36 steel.
Solution
Section Properties:
Ax = 4.30 in.2
869 STAAD.Pro
Iy = Iz = 15.20 in.4
r = (15.20/4.30)1/2 = 1.88 in.
O.D. = 5.56 in., t = 0.26 in.
Sx = Sy = 15.20 in.4 2/5.56 in. = 5.468 in.3
Load Case 1: Tension-only
Allowable Tensile Stress:
Ft = min(0.6Fy , 0.5Fu ) = 0.6(36 ksi) = 21.60 ksi
Actual Tensile Stress:
ft = P/Ae
Where:
Ae = CtAn = 0.75(4.30 in.2 ) = 3.23 in.2
ft = 10 kip/ 3.23 in.2 = 3.10 ksi
Stress Ratio = 3.10 ksi/21.60 ksi = 0.144 < 1.0, OK.
Load Case 2: Compression-only
Allowable Compressive Stress:
Maximum Slenderness Ratio, (Kl/r)max = 1.0(10 ft)(12 ft/in.)/1.88in. = 63.83 <200,
OK.
Yield Stress of Steel, F = 36 ksi
y
Cc =
= 127.68
(Kl/r)max < Cc
Fc = Fy
1.0
5
3
( Kl / r)
2
2C c
3( Kl / r)
8C c
( Kl / r)
8C c3
1.0
3
= 36ksi
(63.83)
2(127.68)
5
3
3(63.83)
8(127.68)
(63.83)
= 17.06ksi
8(127.68)
Comparison
Table 23B.2-ANSI/AISC N690-1984 Code Verification Problem 1
Condition
Reference
STAAD.Pro
Difference
0.144
Tension
0.108
(0.107, CT = 1.0)
Compression
0.136
0.136
None
0.815
2.51%
0.844
Negligible
0.853
Tension +Bending
(0.817, CT = 1.0)
Compression +Bending
Input File
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 09-DEC-09
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT FEET KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 10 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
871 STAAD.Pro
0.845
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 4.176E+006
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 0.489024
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT INCHES KIP
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
1 TABLE ST PIPS50
UNIT FEET KIP
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
2 FIXED BUT FX
LOAD 1 TENSION ONLY
JOINT LOAD
2 FX 10
LOAD 2 COMPRESSION ONLY
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -10
LOAD 3 TENSION+BENDING
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -0.3
JOINT LOAD
2 FX 10
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GZ 0.3
LOAD 4 COMPRESSION+BENDING
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -0.3
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -10
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GZ 0.3
873 STAAD.Pro
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
LOAD LIST 3
PARAMETER 3
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
LOAD LIST 4
PARAMETER 4
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
LOAD LIST ALL
PARAMETER 5
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The TRACK 2 output for the final parameter set is shown here:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( AISC N690 1984)
v1.0
********************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KIP INCH (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST
PIPS50
(AISC SECTIONS)
PASS
Q1.6-Eqn 2
0.844
4
10.00 C
44.84
47.02
120.00
875 STAAD.Pro
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SLENDERNESS CHECK:
ACTUAL RATIO: 63.83 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 200.00
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES:
(UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 1.71E+01 FCZ: 2.38E+01 FCY: 2.38E+01 FTZ: 2.38E+01 FTY: 2.38E+01
|
| SHEAR: 1.44E+01
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 2.33E+00 FBZ: 8.60E+00 FBY: 8.20E+00 SHEAR: 9.12E-01
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH)
|
| AXX:
4.30 AYY:
2.27 AZZ:
2.27 RZZ: 1.88 RYY: 1.88
|
| SZZ:
5.46 SYY:
5.46
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| KL/R-Z: 63.83
KL/R-Y: 63.83
UNL:
30.0
CMZ: 0.60
CMY: 0.60
|
| CB: 1.00
FYLD:
36.00
FU:
58.00
NET SECTION FACTOR: 1.00
|
| CT: 0.75
STEEL TYPE: 0.0
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH)
|
| CLAUSE
RATIO LOAD
FX
VY
VZ
MZ
MY
|
| TENSION
0.108
1
1.00E+01
|
| COMPRESSION 0.136
2
1.00E+01
|
| COMP&BEND
0.844
4
1.00E+01
4.70E+01 4.48E+01
|
| TEN&BEND
0.815
3
1.00E+01
4.70E+01 4.48E+01
|
| SHEAR-Y
0.063
3
1.96E+00
|
| SHEAR-Z
0.060
3
1.87E+00
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Problem
A 12 ft long simply supported beam subject to uniform load (3 kip/ft). The beam is a W6x12
section made from Grade 36 steel.
Solution
Section Properties:
A = 3.55 in.2
d = 6.03 in.
tw = 0.230 in.
Sz = 7.31 in.3
Allowable Bending Stress:
Fbz = 0.66Fy = 0.66(36 ksi) = 23.76 ksi
Actual Bending Stress (include member selfweight in Y dir.):
Mz = 0.312 kip/ft (12 ft)2 /8 (12 in./ft) = 67.4 inkip
fbz = 67.4 inkip/7.31 in.3 = 9.22 ksi
Stress Ratio = 9.22 ksi/ 23.76 ksi = 0.388 < 1.0, OK
Allowable Shear Stress:
Fv = 0.4Fy = 0.4(36 ksi) = 14.40 ksi
Actual Shear Stress:
Vz = 0.5(12 ft)(0.312 kip/ft) = 1.872 kip
fvz = 1.872 kip/(6.03 in. x 0.230 in.) = 1.35 ksi
Stress Ratio = 1.35 ksi/ 14.40 ksi = 0.094 <1.0, OK.
Comparison
Table 23B.3-ANSI/AISC N690-1984 Code Verification Problem 3
Condition
877 STAAD.Pro
Reference
STAAD.Pro
Difference
Bending
0.388
0.387
Negligible
Shear
0.094
0.094
None
Input File
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 09-DEC-09
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT FEET KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 12 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 4.176E+006
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 0.489024
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
1 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 2 PINNED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
SELFWEIGHT Y -1 ALL
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -0.3
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD DATA
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES ALL
*UNIT KIP INCH
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 3 ALL
UNT 3 ALL
UNIT KIP INCH
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The TRACK 2 output for the final parameter set is shown here:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( AISC N690 1984)
v1.0
********************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KIP INCH (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST
W6X12
(AISC SECTIONS)
PASS
Q1.6-Eqn 2
0.387
1
0.00 T
0.00
-67.40
72.00
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SLENDERNESS CHECK:
ACTUAL RATIO: 156.64 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 300.00
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES:
(UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 6.09E+00 FCZ: 2.38E+01 FCY: 2.70E+01 FTZ: 2.38E+01 FTY: 2.70E+01
|
| SHEAR: 1.44E+01
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 0.00E+00 FBZ: 9.20E+00 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 0.00E+00
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH)
|
| AXX:
3.55 AYY:
1.39 AZZ:
1.49 RZZ: 2.50 RYY: 0.92
|
879 STAAD.Pro
| SZZ:
7.33 SYY:
1.50
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| KL/R-Z: 57.71
KL/R-Y:156.64
UNL:
36.0
CMZ: 0.60
CMY: 0.60
|
| CB: 1.00
FYLD:
36.00
FU:
58.00
NET SECTION FACTOR: 1.00
|
| CT: 0.75
STEEL TYPE: 0.0
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH)
|
| CLAUSE
RATIO LOAD
FX
VY
VZ
MZ
MY
|
| TENSION
0.000
1
0.00E+00
|
| COMPRESSION 0.000
1
0.00E+00
|
| COMP&BEND
0.387
1
0.00E+00
6.74E+01 0.00E+00
|
| TEN&BEND
0.000
1
0.00E+00
6.74E+01 0.00E+00
|
| SHEAR-Y
0.094
1
1.87E+00
|
| SHEAR-Z
0.000
1
0.00E+00
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
881 STAAD.Pro
Section 24
883 STAAD.Pro
Note: From design point of view, there are no major differences between NF-3000 1974
and NF-3000 1977 version of codes.
Design of members per ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 requires the STAAD Nuclear Design
Codes SELECTCode Pack.
24A.1.1 Slenderness
As per clause XVII-2223 of NF-3000 1974, the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members
shall not exceed 200, and the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should not
exceed 240 for main members and 300 for lateral bracing members and other secondary
members. The default limit for TRUSS members in Tension is set at 300.
24A.1.2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60*F ), but not more than
y
(0.5*F ) on the Net area.
u
The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with the clause XVII-2283 of NF-3000
n
1974, and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that.
The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in
STAAD.
24A.1.3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns shall be as required by clause XVII-2213 of NF3000 1974.
a. Gross Sections of Columns:
1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) < Cc,
Fa = Fy
( KL / r)
1
2C c
5/3+
3( KL / r)
8C c
( KL / r)
8C c3
Where:
2 E
Fy
Cc =
12 E
Fa =
23(KL / r ) 2
( )
l
200r
be =
50.3
1 b / t f b
( )
be =
44.3
1 b / t f b
( )
Consequently, a reduction factor, Q , equal to the effective area divided by the actual
a
area is introduced.
Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded compression members
containing stiffened or un-stiffened elements shall not exceed
Fa = Fy
( KL / r)
Q sQ a1
2C c
5/3+
3( KL / r)
8C c
Where:
C c =
885 STAAD.Pro
2 E
Q sQ aF
( KL / r)
3
8C c
b. Width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression flange shall not exceed
190/F .
y
d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members other than boxshaped members shall not exceed the value of 76b /F nor 20000/(d/A )F .
f
b. For noncompact and slender elements, clause XVII-2214.2 and XVII-2214.5 of NF-3000
1974 are followed respectively.
c. For box-type flexural members, maximum bending stress is:
F = 0.60*F
b
C mzfbz
(1 fa / F ex )Fbx
C my fby
1 fa / F ey Fby
1.0
and
fa
0.60F y
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the
a a
program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would
result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for sidesway and 0.6 - 0.4(M1/M2), but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy
fa
0.60F y
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
Where:
Cv =
Cv =
45, 000k
F y (h / t )
190
h/t
k
Fy
For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total depth and
the web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken as the total flange areas.
887 STAAD.Pro
following table.
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers
for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis,
some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical
structure. For example, by default the KZ value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to
1.0, while in the real structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be
changed to 1.5, as shown in the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a
member is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the
allowable stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0.
Note: Unlike many other design codes available in STAAD.Pro (which use the BEAM
parameter), design per ASME NF 3000 codes in STAAD.Pro is always performed
based on forces calculated at 13 sections, including ends.
Table 24A.1-ASME NF 3000 Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default Value
Description
CAN
CB
1.0
CMY
CMZ
0.85 for
sidesway and
calculated for
no sidesway
Parameter
Name
Default Value
DFF
None
(Mandatory
for deflection
check)
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
Description
DMAX
45 inch
DMIN
0.0 inch
FYLD
36 KSI
FU
60 KSI
KBK
1.0
1.0
889 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
KV
Default Value
1.0
Description
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
MAIN
0.0
NSF
PROFILE
RATIO
1.0
None
1.0
Parameter
Name
SRL
Default Value
Description
STIFF
Member
length or
depth
whichever is
greater
TMAIN
0.0
891 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
UNB
Member
Length
UNT
Member
Length
24A.5 Example
A cantilever beam of length 30 inch is loaded at its free end with 5 kip compressive load and 5
kip lateral load. The beam is assigned with W24X104 steel member and is designed in
accordance with ASME NF3000 1974.
The corresponding input of STAAD input editor file is shown as below:
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 18-JUN-08
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT INCHES KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 30 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 29000
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
1 TABLE ST W24X104
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -5 FY -5
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PRINT SUPPORT REACTION
PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS
PRINT MEMBER FORCES
PARAMETER 1
CODE NF3000 1974
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 0.9 ALL
KZ 0.9 ALL
NSF 0.85 ALL
CB 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
v1.0
893 STAAD.Pro
| SLENDERNESS CHECK:
ACTUAL RATIO:
9.28 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 200.00
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES:
(UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 2.07E+01 FCZ: 2.38E+01 FCY: 2.70E+01 FTZ: 2.38E+01 FTY: 2.70E+01
|
| SHEAR: 1.44E+01
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 1.63E-01 FBZ: 5.82E-01 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 4.16E-01
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH)
|
| AXX: 30.60 AYY: 12.03 AZZ: 12.75 RZZ: 10.07 RYY: 2.91
|
| SZZ:
257.69 SYY:
40.63
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| KL/R-Z: 2.68
KL/R-Y: 9.28
UNL:
30.0
CMZ: 1.00
CMY: 1.00
|
| CB: 1.75
FYLD:
36.00
FU:
58.00
NET SECTION FACTOR: 0.85
|
|
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH)
|
| CLAUSE
RATIO LOAD
FX
VY
VZ
MZ
MY
|
| TENSION
0.009
1
5.00E+00
|
| COMPRESSION 0.008
1
5.00E+00
|
| COMP&BEND
0.032
1
5.00E+00
1.50E+02 0.00E+00
|
| TEN&BEND
0.000
1
5.00E+00
1.50E+02 0.00E+00
|
| SHEAR-Y
0.029
1
5.00E+00
|
| SHEAR-Z
0.000
1
0.00E+00
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
895 STAAD.Pro
24B.2 .1 Slenderness
As per NF-3322.2(c), the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members shall not exceed 200,
and the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should not exceed 240 for main
members and 300 for lateral bracing members and other secondary members. The default limit
for TRUSS members in Tension is set at 300.
24B.3 .2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60*F ), but not more than
y
(0.5*F ) on the Effective Net area.
u
The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with NF-3322.8(c)(1) - (a), (b) and (c),
n
and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that.
The Effective Net Area (A ) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is transmitted
e
by bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member, shall be
computed from the formula (ref. NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)),
A =C *A
e
t
n
Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75.
The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1), (2)
and (3).
The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in
STAAD.
24B.4 .3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns, except those fabricated from austenitic stainless
steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(1). The allowable compressive stress for columns
fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(2). The allowable
compressive stress for member elements other than columns constructed by any material,
including austenitic stainless steel, shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(3).
a. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless steel:
1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) < Cc,
Fa = Fy
( KL / r)
1
2C c
5/3+
3( KL / r)
8C c
( KL / r)
8C c3
Where:
Cc =
2 E
Fy
12 E
23(KL / r ) 2
( )
l
200r
Fa = Fy 0.47
KL / r
444
Fa = Fy 0.40
KL / r
600
897 STAAD.Pro
be =
50.3
1 b / t f b
( )
be =
44.3
1 b / t f b
( )
Consequently, a reduction factor, Q , equal to the effective area divided by the actual
a
area is introduced.
Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded compression members
containing stiffened or un-stiffened elements shall not exceed
Fa = Fy
( KL / r)
Q sQ a1
2C c
5/3+
3( KL / r)
8C c
( KL / r)
3
8C c
Where:
C c =
2 E
Q sQ aF
C mzfbz
(1 fa / F ex )Fbx
C my fby
(1 fa / F ey)Fby
1.0
and
fa
0.60F y
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the
a a
program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would
result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for sidesway and 0.6 - 0.4(M1/M2), but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy
fa
0.60F y
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
899 STAAD.Pro
Where:
Cv =
Cv =
45, 000k
F y (h / t )
190
h/t
k
Fy
For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total depth and
the web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken as the total flange areas.
Note: Unlike many other design codes available in STAAD.Pro (which use the BEAM
parameter), design per ASME NF 3000 codes in STAAD.Pro is always performed
based on forces calculated at 13 sections, including ends.
Default Value
Description
CAN
CB
1.0
CT
0.75
CMY
DFF
None
(Mandatory for
deflection check)
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
DMAX
45 inch
CMZ
901 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
DMIN
0.0 inch
FYLD
36 KSI
FU
60 KSI
KBK
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member Length
LZ
Member Length
Parameter
Name
MAIN
Default Value
0.0
Description
NSF
1.0
PROFILE
None
RATIO
1.0
SRL
STIFF
Member length or
depth whichever is
greater
STYPE
0.0
903 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
TMAIN
Default Value
Description
0.0
UNB
Member Length
UNT
Member Length
905 STAAD.Pro
v1.0
| COMP&BEND
0.290
1
5.00E+00
5.00E+03 0.00E+00
|
| TEN&BEND
0.000
1
5.00E+00
5.00E+03 0.00E+00
|
| SHEAR-Y
0.770
1
1.00E+02
|
| SHEAR-Z
0.000
1
0.00E+00
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
907 STAAD.Pro
24C.2 .1 Slenderness
As per NF-3322.2(c), the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members shall not exceed 200,
and the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should not exceed 240 for main
members and 300 for lateral bracing members and other secondary members. The default limit
for TRUSS members in Tension is set at 300.
24C.3 .2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60*F ), but not more than
y
(0.5*F ) on the Effective Net area.
u
The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with NF-3322.8(c)(1) - (a), (b) and (c),
n
and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that.
The Effective Net Area (A ) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is transmitted
e
by bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member, shall be
computed from the formula (ref. NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)),
A =C *A
e
t
n
Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75.
The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1), (2)
and (3).
The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in
STAAD.
24C.4 .3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns, except those fabricated from austenitic stainless
steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(1). The allowable compressive stress for columns
fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(2). The allowable
compressive stress for member elements other than columns constructed by any material,
including austenitic stainless steel, shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(3).
a. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless steel:
1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) < Cc,
Fa = Fy
( KL / r)
1
2C c
5/3+
3( KL / r)
8C c
( KL / r)
8C c3
Where:
Cc =
2 E
Fy
12 E
23(KL / r ) 2
( )
l
200r
Fa = Fy 0.47
KL / r
444
Fa = Fy 0.40
KL / r
600
909 STAAD.Pro
In the case for angles or plates projecting from compression members and for projecting
elements of compression flanges of girder,
When 95 / Fy / kc < b / t < 195 / Fy / kc , Q s = 1.293 0.00309 b / t
( )
Fy / kc
Qs =
F y (b / t )
Where:
kc =
4.05
(h / t ) 0.46
be =
50.3
1 b / t f b
( )
be =
44.3
1 b / t f b
( )
Consequently, a reduction factor, Q , equal to the effective area divided by the actual
a
area is introduced.
Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded compression members
containing stiffened or un-stiffened elements shall not exceed
Fa = Fy
( KL / r)
Q sQ a1
2C c
5/3+
3( KL / r)
8C c
( KL / r)
3
8C c
Where:
C c =
2 E
Q sQ aF
1. For Compact Sections, tension and compression on extreme fibres of compact hot
rolled or built-up members symmetrical about and loaded in the plane of their minor
axes and meeting the requirements of Subsection NF shall result in a maximum
bending stress:
F = 0.66*F
b
y
If meeting the requirements of this member of:
a. Width-thickness ratio of unstiffened projecting elements of the compression flange
shall not exceed 65/F .
y
b. Width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression flange shall not exceed
190/F .
y
c. The depth-thickness ratio of the web shall not exceed
d/t = (640/F )[1 3.74(f /F )] when f /F <=0.16
y
a y
a y
d/t = 257/F when f /F > 0.16
y
a y
d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members other than
box-shaped members shall not exceed the value of 76b /F nor 20000/(d/A )F .
f y
f y
2. For noncompact and slender elements, NF-3322.1(d)(5) and NF-3322.1(d)(3) are
followed respectively.
3. For box-type flexural members, maximum bending stress is:
F = 0.60*F
b
y
b. Along Minor Axis:
1. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF-3322.1(d)
(1)(a) and (b), maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed:
F = 0.75*F
b
y
2. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF-3322.1(d)
(1)(a), except where b /2t exceeds 65/F but is less than 95/F , maximum tensile and
f f
y
y
compressive bending stress shall not exceed:
F = F [1.075 0.005(b /2t )F ]
b
y
f f y
C mzfbz
(1 fa / F ex )Fbx
C my fby
(1 fa / F ey)Fby
and
fa
0.60F y
fbz
Fbz
911 STAAD.Pro
fby
Fby
1.0
1.0
otherwise
fa
Fa
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the
a a
program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would
result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for sidesway and 0.6 - 0.4(M1/M2), but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy
fa
0.60F y
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
Where:
Cv =
Cv =
45, 000k
F y (h / t )
190
h/t
k
Fy
For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total depth and
the web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken as the total flange areas.
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers
for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis,
some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical
structure. For example, by default the KZ value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to
1.0, while in the real structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be
changed to 1.5, as shown in the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a
member is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the
allowable stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0.
Note: Unlike many other design codes available in STAAD.Pro (which use the BEAM
parameter), design per ASME NF 3000 codes in STAAD.Pro is always performed
based on forces calculated at 13 sections, including ends.
Table 24C.1-ASME NF 3000 1998 Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default Value
Description
CAN
CB
1.0
Bending coefficient
dependent upon moment
gradient
0.0 = CB is calculated itself
Any other user-defined value
is accepted.
913 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
CMY
Default Value
Description
CT
0.75
Reduction Coefficient in
computing effective net area
of an axially loaded tension
member. [Refer NF-3322.8(c)
(1)(d)]
DFF
None
(Mandatory for
deflection check)
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
DMAX
45 inch
DMIN
0.0 inch
FYLD
36 KSI
FU
60 KSI
CMZ
"Deflection Length" /
Maximum allowable local
deflection
Joint No. denoting starting
point for calculation of
"Deflection Length"
Parameter
Name
KBK
Default Value
Description
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member Length
Length to calculate
slenderness ratio for buckling
about local Y axis.
LZ
Member Length
MAIN
0.0
NSF
915 STAAD.Pro
1.0
Parameter
Name
PROFILE
Default Value
None
Description
RATIO
1.0
SRL
STIFF
Member length or
depth whichever is
greater
STYPE
0.0
Parameter
Name
TMAIN
Default Value
TRACK
0.0
Description
UNB
Member Length
UNT
Member Length
Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units.
2. The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION
command.
917 STAAD.Pro
KZ 0.75 ALL
FU 58 ALL
NSF 0.9 ALL
CT 0.85 ALL
CB 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
v1.0
919 STAAD.Pro
| CT: 0.85
STEEL TYPE: 1.0
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH)
|
| CLAUSE
RATIO LOAD
FX
VY
VZ
MZ
MY
|
| TENSION
0.005
1
5.00E+00
|
| COMPRESSION 0.009
1
5.00E+00
|
| COMP&BEND
0.272
1
5.00E+00
5.00E+03 0.00E+00
|
| TEN&BEND
0.000
1
5.00E+00
5.00E+03 0.00E+00
|
| SHEAR-Y
0.635
1
1.00E+02
|
| SHEAR-Z
0.000
1
0.00E+00
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
921 STAAD.Pro
Note: Use of 2004 edition requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) NRC (build
20.07.07.30)or higher. Use of 2001 edition requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 3)
NRC (build 20.07.08.22)or higher.
Design of members per ASME NF 3000 - 2001 &2004 requires the STAAD Nuclear Design
Codes SELECTCode Pack.
24D.1.1 Slenderness
As per NF-3322.2(c), the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members shall not exceed 200,
and the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should not exceed 240 for main
members and 300 for lateral bracing members and other secondary members. The default limit
for TRUSS members in Tension is set at 300.
24D.1.2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60F ), but not more than (0.5F )
y
u
on the Effective Net area.
The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with NF-3322.8(c)(1) - (a), (b) and (c),
n
and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that.
The Effective Net Area (A ) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is transmitted
e
by bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member, shall be
computed from the formula (ref. NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)),
A e = Ct A n
Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75.
The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1),
(2) and (3).
The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in
STAAD.
24D.1.3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns, except those fabricated from austenitic stainless
steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(1). The allowable compressive stress for columns
fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(2). The allowable
compressive stress for member elements other than columns constructed by any material,
including austenitic stainless steel, shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(3).
A. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless steel:
1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) Cc,
Fa = [1 - (Kl/r)2 /(2Cc2 )]Fy / {5/3 + [3(Kl/r)/(8Cc)] - [(Kl/r)3 /(8Cc3 )]}
(Eq. A1)
Where:
Cc = [(22 E)/Fy ]1/2
2. When (Kl/r) > Cc,
Fa = 122 E/[23(kL/r)2 ]
(Eq. A2)
3. When (Kl/r) > 120,
Fas = Fa[(Eq.A1) or (Eq. A2)]/{1.6 - [l/(200r)]}
B. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel:
1. When (Kl/r) 120,
Fa = Fy [0.47 - (Kl/r)/444]
2. When (Kl/r) > 120,
Fa = Fy [0.40 - (Kl/r)/600]
C. Member elements other than columns:
1. For Plate Girder Stiffeners,
Fa = 0.60Fy
2. For webs of rolled shapes,
Fa = 0.75Fy
923 STAAD.Pro
The above clauses are applicable only when the width-thickness ratio of the element
satisfies all the sub-sections of NF-3322.2(d)..
If the above-mentioned clauses are not satisfied,
a. For un-stiffened compression element,
A reduction factor Q is introduced. Detailed values of Q for different shapes are given
s
s
in NF-3322.2(e)(2)(a) to NF-3322.2(e)(2)(d).
In the case for angles or plates projecting from compression members and for projecting
elements of compression flanges of girder,
When 95/(Fy /kc)1/2 < b/t < 195/(Fy /kc)1/2 , Qs = 1.293 - 0.00309(b/t)(Fy /kc)1/2
Whenb/t > 195/(Fy /kc)1/2 , Qs = 26,200kc/[Fy (b/t)2 )]
Where:
kc = 4.05/[(h/t)0.46 ] if h/t >70, otherwise kc = 1.0.
b. For stiffened compression element,
A reduced effective width b is introduced.
e
C mzfbz
(1 fa / F ex )Fbx
C my fby
(1 fa / F ey)Fby
and
fa
0.60F y
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
925 STAAD.Pro
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
1.0
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the
a a
program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would
result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for sidesway and 0.6 - 0.4(M1/M2), but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy
fa
0.60F y
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
Where:
Cv =
Cv =
45, 000k
F y (h / t )
190
h/t
k
Fy
For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total depth and
the web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken as the total flange areas.
1.0, while in the real structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be
changed to 1.5, as shown in the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a
member is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the
allowable stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0.
Note: Unlike many other design codes available in STAAD.Pro (which use the BEAM
parameter), design per ASME NF 3000 codes in STAAD.Pro is always performed
based on forces calculated at 13 sections, including ends.
Table 24D.1-ASME NF 3000 2001 &2004 Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default
Value
-
Description
CB
1.0
CMY
CMZ
0.85 for
sidesway
and
calculated
for no
sidesway
CT
0.75
DFF
None
(Mandatory
for
deflection
check)
927 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
DJ1
Start Joint
of the
member
DJ2
End Joint
of the
member
DMAX
45 inch
DMIN
0.0 inch
FYLD
36 KSI
FU
60 KSI
1.0
KBK
1.0
1.0
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
Parameter
Name
MAIN
Default
Value
0.0
Description
NSF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
SRL
STIFF
Member
length or
depth
whichever
is greater
STYPE
0.0
929 STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
TRACK
Default
Value
0.0
Description
UNB
Member
Length
UNT
Member
Length
Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units.
2. The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command.
931 STAAD.Pro
v1.0
| SHEAR-Y
0.635
1
1.00E+02
|
| SHEAR-Z
0.000
1
0.00E+00
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
933 STAAD.Pro
Service Level Conditions are basically the loading conditions for which the plant structure and
its components are to be designed. The same primary load can be multiplied by different
factors to signify the different service levels. Also the load combinations for various service
levels are different and pre-defined by the code.
Description
A. Normal
Working
B. Upset
C.
This situation can be termed as a major failure, and the
Emergency repairing of the structure can be done only after shutting
down the entire plant.
D. Faulted
These Service Levels are the attribute of the whole structure or the structural system. So, the
existence of different Service Levels to the different parts of the structure at the same point of
time is totally ruled out.
The Service Level Factors are basically few multiplying factor by which the Allowable Stress
values are to be multiplied based on the Service Level. The different actions (e.g. Tension,
Compression, Bending, Shear etc.) have different Service Level Factors.
However, this is to be noted, the stipulated multiplying factors for creating load combinations
for Service Level B, C, and D are to be user defined in this case. The facility of creating Auto
Load Combination for different Service Levels is out of the scope of this implementation. The
user has to take care of this.
Note: Clause NF-3321.1 also indicates that the allowable stress shall be limited to twothirds (2/3x) the critical buckling stress. However, the critical buckling stress is not
clearly defined so it is left to the user to ensure that this code requirement is met.
The values used for the stress level factors in STAAD.Pro are as follows:
Service Level
Ks
Kv
Kbk
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.33
1.33
1.33
1.50
1.50
1.50
D*
KS
KV
KBK
* It is evident from the Table NF-3523(b)-1, that there are no predefined Stress Limit Factors
for Service Level D. So, for Service Level D, the Factors Ks, Kv and Kbk are to be user defined.
Refer to Appendix F in the code for guidance on values to specify in the design parameters.
where
Ks
Stress Limit Factor applicable to the Design Allowable Tensile and Bending
Stresses.
Kv
Stress Limit Factor applicable to the Design Allowable Shear Stresses
Kbk
Stress Limit Factor applicable to the Design Allowable Compressive Axial and
Bending stresses to determine the Buckling Limit.
The program uses the service level factorseither those specified for levels A through C or the
user defined values in level Das follows:
l
As per NF-3322.1.(e), for checking Combined Stresses as per equation 20, the value of
Fey and Fez the Euler Stress divided by the factor of safety, may also be multiplied
by the appropriate Stress Limit Factor. This is also implemented. Fe is to be multiplied
by Kbk
935 STAAD.Pro
Section 24
Technical Support
These resources are provided to help you answer support questions:
l
937 STAAD.Pro
Index
B
British
A
Codes 49
National AnnexSeeNational
Annex, British
British Codes 67
AISC 80
Alclad 804
Aluminum Design 802
American Transmission Tower
Code 822
Analysis
BS EN 1993-1-1 281
BS4360 79
BS5400SeeSteel Design, BS5400
BS5950SeeSteel Design, BS5950
BS8110SeeConcrete Design, BS8110
PDelta 14
ANSI/AISC N690 Codes 844
AS 1170 21
CAN/CSA-086-01SeeWood Design,
CAN/CSA-086-01
Australian Codes 9
AS 3600 11
B4 378
BBK 94 796
BS8007 97
BS8110 51, 54
CP65 746
CSA A23.3 121
Cyprus 193
Index:CSA Japanese
IS456 426
NS 3473 692
Extrusions 807
F
Finnish
National AnnexSeeNational
Annex, Finnish
French
Codes 386
Concrete Design 388
National AnnexSeeNational
Annex, French
Steel Design 394
GB 1591 79
I
EC5 356
EN 1993 235
Equivalent slenderness 73
J
Japanese
Codes 548
Concrete DesignSeeConcrete
Design, AIJ 1991
939 STAAD.Pro
P
PN EN 1993-1-1 282
M
Modulus of Elasticity 26
MS NE 1993-1-1 282
Polish
National AnnexSeeNational
Annex, Polish
Belgian 282
British 281
Dutch 281
Finnish 282
SABS-0100-1SeeConcrete Design,
SABS-0100-1
SFS EN 1993-1-1 282
French 282
Malaysian 282
SS EN 1993-1-1 282
Norwegian 282
output 278
Polish 282
Singaporean 282
National Application
Documents 213, 220
AS 4100 19
NF EN 1993-1-1 282
B7 382
Norwegian
BS 5950-5 101
National AnnexSeeNational
Annex, Norwegian
NS-EN 1993 282
NTC 1987SeeConcrete Design, NTC
1987
BS5400 93
BS5950 67
BSK 99 792
CSA CAN/CSA-S16-01 129
DIN 18800 414
DS412 201
Verification Problem
IS 802 490
IS801 512
NBE-MV103-1972 784
S136-94 165
W
Weld Type 80
British 68
Japanese 572
Wood Design
CAN/CSA-086-01 173
941 STAAD.Pro
Y
Young's ModulusSeeModulus of
Elasticity